11th MCQ Question Bank

1 Physical World and Measurement
Physics : Scope, Technology and under standing
In physics we have study mechanial, thermal, electrical, magnetic and optical charcteristics of a
body.
To understand such a property, physics developed mechanics, thermodynamics,
electormagnetism, optics and electrodynamics, such like branches.
Range of physics is from zero to infinite.
Range of length in physics is from 10-14m (radius of nucleus) to 1026m (length of Galaxy.)
Hence ratio of measurement is in order of 1040.
Range of measurement of time is 10-22 s to 1018 s.
Range of mass is from 1030 kg (mass of an electron) to 1055 kg (mass of Galaxy).
There are four type of fundamental forces in nature : (1) Gravitational force
(2) Electro magnetic force (3) Weak nuclear force (4) Strong nuclear force.
(1) Universe is made of ......
(A) Only radiation (B) Only matter (C) Vacuum (D) Matter and radiation
(2) Full name of AFM is ......
(A) Atomic force mirror (B) Atomic force microscope
(C) Atomic fire microscope (D) Automatic force microscope
(3) Full name of ESR is ......
(A) Electron spin resonance (B) Electron spin range
(C) Electric spin resonance (D) Electric space radar
(4) The range of physics is about ......
(A) Zero to infinite (B) range of nucleus (C) Earth to sun (D) near around the earth
(5) Physics considered vacuum as one ......
(A) Physical Quantity (B) Physical State (C) Physical unit (D) Infinite
(6) ...... is a branch of physics related to charge and magnetic field.
(A) Mechanics (B) Electrodynamics (C) Thermodynamics (D) Optics
(7) Electromagnetic force is ......
(A) only attractive (B) Attractive and repulsive
(C) Only repulsive (D) Short range force
(8) Strong nuclear force acting in the nucleus is between ......
(1) Proton-Proton (2) Proton-Neutron (3) Neutron-Neutron (4) Proton-Electron
(A) 1, 2, 3 (B) 1, 2, 4 (C) 1, 3, 4 (D) 4
1
(9) During the b-emission, nucleus emits ......
(A) neutron and electron (B) neutron and proton (C) neutrino and electron (D) neutrino and proton
(10) As space is isotropic, which law of conservation is obtained ?
(A) Law of conservation of energy (B) Law of conservation of charge
(C) Law of conservation of linear momentum (D) Law of conservation of angular momentum
(11) ...... is responsible for the conservation of linear momentum.
(A) Homogenity of a space (B) Isotropy of a space
(C) Homogenity of time (D) Isotropy of time
(12) If time is homogeneous, which law of conservation is obtained ?
(A) Law of conservation of energy (B) Law of conservation of charge
(C) Law of conservation of linear momentum (D) Law of conservation of angular momentum
(13) Full name of LHC is ......
(A) Large hedron collider (B) Large heater collider
(C) Large heater collision (D) Large hedron cobalt.
(14) If the resultant external ...... acting on the system is zero, total linear momentum of the system
remains constant.
(A) Force (B) Torque (C) Charge (D) Mass
Ans : 1 (D), 2 (B), 3 (A), 4 (A), 5 (B), 6 (B), 7 (B), 8 (A), 9 (C), 10 (D), 11 (A), 12 (A), 13 (A),
14 (A)
Units and Unit systems :
SI unit system :
Fundamental physical Name of Unit Symbol
quantity
Length (l) metre m
mass (m) kilogram kg
time (t) second s
Electric current (I) Ampere A
Thermodynamic Kelvin K
temperature (T)
Lumnious Intensity (I) Candella cd
Quantity of matter (m) Mole mol
Supplementry Units :
No. Supplementry SI Unit Symbol Formula

physical quantity
arc
1. Plane angle (q) Radian rad q=
radius
area
2. Solid angle (W) Steradian Sr W= =
+A
(radius)2 r2
2
(15) Number of fundamental units in SI system are ......
(A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 7 (D) 9
(16) Which is not a unit of energy ?
(A) joule (B) watt sec
(C) newton meter (D) kilogram-meter/sec2
(17) Which one have derived unit ?
(A) Pressure (B) quanitity of matter
(C) mass (D) Thermodynamic temperature
(18) KWh is unit of which physical quantity ?
(A) Power (B) momentum (C) work (D) Electric potential
(19) Unit of modulus of rigidity is ......
(A) Nm (B) Nm1 (C) Nm2 (D) Nm2
(20) Qurie is unit of which physical quantity ?
(A) Energy of g - ray (B) radioactivity (C) Half life (D) Intensity of radiation
(21) SI unit of an angular momentum is ......
(A) kg ms1 (B) kg m2 s1 (C) kg m2 s1 (D) kg m2 s2
(22) Which one is supplementary unit ?
(A) second (B) Ampere (C) Candella (D) Steradian
(23) Which one is not a true unit of given physical quantity ?
(A) Power : N ms1 (B) Torque : N m
(C) Pressure : N m2 (D) Surface tension : N m2
(24) Parsec is unit of ......
(A) Distance (B) velocity (C) time (D) plane angle
(25) Which one is unit of Intensity of an electric field ?
(A) Vm (B) NC (C) Vm1 (D) As
(26) Which one is not a unit of time ?
(A) second (B) hour (C) year (D) lightyear
(27) Which one is not a physical quanitity ?
(A) Kelvin (B) Candella (C) Volt (D) All
(28) Which physical quantity having same unit in all the unit system ?
(A) Length (B) Time (C) mass (D) Work
(29) dyne g1 is a unit of which physical quantity ?
(A) Velocity (B) mass (C) Force (D) Acceleration
(30) Which physical quantity from given below is dimensionless ?
(A) Angle (B) Stress (C) density (D) Latent heat
3
(31) Which relation given below is wrong ?
(A) 1J = 107 erg (B) 1 dyne = 105 N
(C) 1 fm = 1015 m (D) 1 parsec = 3.08 × 1016 m
(32) The average distance between sun and earth is called ......
(A) 1 Parsec (B) 1 lightyear (C) 1 AU °
(D) 1A
(33) SI unit of moment of inertia is ......
(A) kg m (B) kg m2 (C) kg m2 (D) kg cm2
(34) Which unit is different than other unit ?
(A) Ws (B) KWh (C) Js (D) eV
(35) If the units for mass, length and time becomes double, then unit of angular momentum becomes ......
(A) Doubles (B) Three times (C) Four times (D) Eight times
(36)
1ns
1Ps
= ......
(A) 103 (B) 103 (C) 109 (D) 106
(37) Ns is a unit of which physical quantity ?
(A) velocily (B) Angular momentum (C) Linear momentum (D) work
(38) The volume and area of surface are equal for a given cube. Then the surface area = ...... unit.
(A) 36 (B) 216 (C) 144 (D) 1000
(39) Nm-2 is not a unit of physical quantity given below ?
(A) Pressure (B) Stress (C) Bulk modulus (D) Strain
Ans. : 15 (C), 16 (D), 17 (A), 18 (C), 19 (C), 20 (B), 21 (B), 22 (D), 23 (D), 24 (A), 25 (C), 26 (D),
27 (D), 28 (B), 29 (D), 30 (A), 31(B), 32 (C), 33 (C), 34 (C), 35 (C), 36 (A), 37 (C), 38 (B),
39 (D)
Measurement : Planet
Measurement for a long distance d
A
D
b q P
Planet
D
B D
Earth
Earth
Distance between Earth and planet, D = Measurement of dimension of planet and Star a =
b d
T D
Where, b = Distance between two positions for observation on the Earth.

a = angular diameter of planet.
q = angle in radian
D = Distance between planet and the Earth d = diameter of the planet
4
Units for very small and very large distances
Multiples Submultiples
Value Prefix Symbol Value Prefix Symbol
1018 Exa E 101 deci d
1015 Peta P 102 centi c
1012 Tera T 103 milli m
109 Giga G 106 micro m
10 6
Mega M 109
nano n
103 Kilo k 1012 pico p
102 Hecto h 1015 femto f
101 Deca da 1018 atto a
For very small distance
1 fm = 1015 m fm = Fermi
1A ° = 1010 m A° = Angstrom
1 nm = 109 m nm = nanometer
For very large distance
The average distance between the Sun and the Earth is called 1AU
1 Astronomical unit = 1 AU° = 1.496 × 1011 m
The distance corresponding to 1AU length where 1" angle lubtended, is called 1 parsec (1 pc).
1 Parsec = 3.08 × 1016 m
1 lightyear = 1 ly = 9.46 × 1015 m
Some units of mass :
1 quintal = 100 kg
1 Metric ton = 1000 kg
1 atomic mass unit (amu) = 1.67 × 1027 kg
Some units of time :
1 year = 365.25 days = 3.156 × 107 Sec.
1 LM (Lunar Month) = 27.3 days.
Time taken by moon to complete 1 revolution around the Earth is called 1 LM.
For a given physical quantity nu = Constant
Where n = Quntitative value, u = unit
\ n1u1 = n2u2
u1 = unit of physical quantity in one system.
u2 = unit of physical quantity in other system.
(40) 1° = ...... rad
(A) 180 (B) (C) (D) 360

S 180 360 n
S n
5
(41) If the unit of length and force increases to four times, the unit of energy ......
(A) Increases to 8 times (B) Increases to 16 times
(C) Decreases to 8 times (D) Decreases to 16 times
(42) If the unit of length and time are taken as km and hr, What is the value of g in km h1.
(A) 980 (B) 9800 (C) 1,27,008 (D) 12,700
(43) The angle between two observed direction for a planet observed from two diametrically opposite
points A and B of the earth is 1.6°. If the diameter of the earth is 1.276 × 104 km, Find the
distance between earth and planet.
(A) 4.57 × 105 km (B) 4.57 × 108 km (C) 3.84 × 108 m (D) 4.08 × 108 m
(44) Diameter of the sun is 1.393 × 109m. Angular diameter of the Sun is ...... . Distance between Sun
and earth is 1.496 × 108 km and 1" = 4.85 × 106 rad.
(A) 1920" (B) 1920' (C) 192.0" (D) 1920 rad
(45) If the angle between two observed direction for moon is 54', When it is observed from the two
diametrically opposite points simultaneously. If the radius of the earth is 6.4 × 106 m. Find the
distance between earth and moon.
(A) 8.153 × 108 m (B) 4.076 × 108 m (C) 5.813 × 108 m (D) 3.581 × 108 m
Ans : 40 (A), 41 (B), 42 (C), 43 (A), 44 (A), 45 (A)
Errors in measurement :
Measurement of inaccuracy is called error.
Estimation of Error :
(1) Absolute error :
Observations for any physical quantity are a1, a2, ......, an
a1 a 2 ...... a n
¦ ai
n
Mean a = =
1
n n i 1
Absolute error in each observation

Da1 = a a1, Da2 = a a2..... Dan = a an
Average (Mean) Absolute error.
¦ 'ai
' a1 ' a 2 ... ' a n n
Da = = n1
n i 1
\ Measurement of any physical quantity = a ± D a

(2) Relative error.
'a
da =
a
(3) Percentage error

'a
da × 100 % = × 100 %
a
6
Combination of errors :
No. Formula error
1. Addition Z = A + B DZ = DA + DB
2. Subtraction Z = A B DZ = DA + DB
'Z 'A 'B
3. Multiplication Z = AB = +
Z A B
'Z 'A 'B

4. Division Z = A/B = +
Z A B
'Z 'A
5. Terms with power Z = An =n
Z A
Significant digits :
The number of digits whose value is accurately known in a measurement plus one additional digit
about which we not certain are called significant figures (digits)
Rules to decide significant digits
(1) All non - zero digits are significant.
(2) All zeros between two non - zero digits are significant.
(3) When the value is less than one, All zeros to the right of decimal and left of non - zero digit are
never significant.
(4) All zeros on the right of non - zero digit are not significant.
(5) All zeroes after nonzero mumber in, number having decimal point are significant.
As number of significant digits after decimal points are more, accuracy in measurement
is more.
(46) A body travels a distance (14.0 ± 0.2) m in (4.0 ± 0.3) s, its velocity is ...... ms1
(A) (3.5 ± 0.51) ms1 (B) (3.5 ± 0.41) ms1 (C) (3.5 ± 0.31) ms1 (D) (3.5 ± 0.21) ms1
R1R 2 'R p
(47) For parallel connection of Resistance Rp = R R then = ......
1 2 R p2
' R1 'R 2 ' R1 'R 2 'R1 'R 2 'R1 'R 2

(A) R + (B) (C) (D) +
1 R2 R1 R2 R12 R 22 R12 R 22
(48) Two resistances R1 = (3 ± 0.1) W and R2 = (6 ± 0.3) W are connected in series, net resistance
R = ...... W
(A) 9 ± 0.2 (B) 3 ± 0.2 (C) 9 ± 0.4 (D) 9 ± 0.1
(49) The mass, lenght, breadth and thickness for a cube is (39.3 ± 0.1)g, (5.12 ± 0.01)cm
(2.56 ± 0.01) cm, (0.37 ± 0.01) cm respectively then inaccuracy in measurement of density
is ...... g cm3
(A) 0.29 (B) 0.41 (C) 0.19 (D) 0.035
(50) For a wire, mass = (0.3 ± 0.003) g radius = (0.5 ± 0.005) mm and length = (6 ± 0.06) cm,
percentage error in density is ......
(A) 1 % (B) 2 % (C) 3 % (D) 4 %
7
(51) The periodic time of second pendulum is 2.0 s and mean absolute error in its measurement is
0.01s, then value of periodic time with error is ......
(A) 2.0 ± 0.10 s (B) 2.0 ± 0.05 s (C) 2.0 ± 0.02 s (D) 2.0 ± 0.01 s
(52) V = (100 ± 5) V, I = (10 ± 0.1) A, then percentage error in measurement of Resistance is ......
(A) 5.1 % (B) 4.9 % (C) 6 % (D) 3 %
(53) When current I passes through a resistance R in time t, Heat energy produced is given by
H = I2Rt. Percentage error in I, R and t are 2 %, 3 % and 1 % respectively then percentage
error in H = ......
(A) 6 % (B) 5 % (C) 7 % (D) 8 %
(54) A length of cube l = (1.5 ± 0.02) cm its volume V = ...... cm3
(A) 3.375 ± 0.04 (B) 3.375 ± 0.135 (C) 3.375 ± 0.4 (D) 3.375 ± 0.013
1
2 B2
(55) Physical quantity Z =
A
. Percentage error in measurement of A, B, C, D are 2 %, 1 %,
CD3
3 % and % respectively. Find the percentage error in measurement of Z.

1
3
(A) 8 % (B) 7 % (C) 6 % (D) 5 %

(56) How many significant digits in 0.0250 ?
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
(57) Significant digits in 5.4 × 103 is ......
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
(58) 1.875 + 2.41 = ...... (by considering significant digits)
(A) 4.3 (B) 4.28 (C) 4.285 (D) 4.29
(59) Mass and radius of sphere are 5.13 g and 2.10 mm. Find its density by considering significant
digits.
(A) 132 g cm3 (B) 130 g cm3 (C) 132.3 g cm3 (D) 132.30 g cm3
(60) Multiplication of 15.235, 3.315 and 2 = ...... (by considering significant digits)
(A) 101.0 (B) 101.00 (C) 101 (D) 100
(61) 1.97855 is round off to three digits then obtained number = ......
(A) 1.97 (B) 1.98 (C) 1.90 (D) 2.00
(62) Significant figures in 71.15, 3.008 and 0.1237×105 are ......
(A) 4, 2, 4 (B) 4, 4, 4 (C) 4, 3, 5 (D) 4, 4, 6
(63) Significant digits in 0.0007 are ......
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
(64) When 1.71 N is Subtracted from 3.75 N the result in significant figures is ......
(A) 2 N (B) 2.0 N (C) 2.04 N (D) 2.000 N
8
(65) Lenght of simple pendulum measured with scale of least count 1mm is 10 cm. Clock having
dispersions is measures 90 s for 100 oscillations. The value of g = ...... ms-2. (take g = 9.8 ms2)
(A) 9.8 ± 0.11 (B) 9.8 ± 0.21 (C) 9.8 ± 0.31 (D) 9.8 ± 0.41
(66) Thickness of plate measured with l1 = 40.2 ± 0.1 and l2 = 20.1 ± 0.1, maximum uncertainity in
l1 + l2 = .......
(A) 0.1 (B) 0.2 (C) 0.3 (D) 0.4
(67) Thickness of plate measured by micrometer having least count 0.01mm is 1.03 mm. What is the
percentage error in the measurement of thickness of plate ?
(A) 0.7 % (B) 0.97 % (C) 1 % (D) 1.2 %
(68) 9.15 + 3.8 = ...... (by considering significant digits).
(A) 13 (B) 13.0 (C) 13.00 (D) 13.000
(69) Observations for the measurement in length are 2.01 m, 2.03 m, 2.09 m, 2.07 m and 2.01 m.
Mean absolute error in the measurement is ......
(A) 0.028 m (B) 0.030 m (C) 0.152 m (D) 0.048 m
'I
(70) f= (gravitational potential), then = ...... .
GM
r I
'r 'r 'r

(A) (B) (C) 2 (D)
r
r r r 'r
(71) If the percentage error in the measurement of volume of a sphere is 3 %, percentage error in the
measurement of surface area is ......
(A) 2 % (B) 1 % (C) 3 % (D) 4 %
(72) Radius of a sphere is 1.51 cm. Area of sphere by considering significant figures is ......
(A) 28.6 cm2 (B) 28.63 cm2 (C) 28.638 cm2 (D) 28.6381 cm2
Ans : 46 (C), 47 (D), 48 (C), 49 (A), 50 (D), 51 (D), 52 (C), 53 (D), 54 (B), 55 (B), 56 (C),
57 (B), 58 (B), 59 (A), 60 (A), 61 (B), 62 (B), 63 (A), 64 (C), 65 (C), 66 (B), 67 (B),
68 (B), 69 (B), 70 (B), 71 (A), 72 (A)
Dimension and Dimensional Formula
When any physical quantity is represented in terms of M, L, T, ......, the equation is known as
dimensional formula and power of M, L, T.... is known as dimension.
If the dimensional formula for a physical quantity is Ma Lb Tc, their values in two different unit
system are n1 and n2 then,
ª M1 º ª L1 º ª T1 º
a b c
n2 = n1 « » « » « »
¬ M2 ¼ ¬ L 2 ¼ ¬ T2 ¼
9
Physical quantity : Formule, Units and dimensional formula.
No. Physical Quantity Formula Unit Dimensional
Formula
1. Speed Distance / time ms1 M° L1 T1
2. Acceleration Change in volocity/time ms2 M° L1 T2
3. Force Mass × accleration N = kg ms2 M1 L1 T2
4. Density Mass/volume kg m3 M1 L3 T°
5. Pressure Force/area Nm2 = Pa M1 L1 T2
6. Work Force × displacement Nm = J M1 L2 T2
7. Energy - J M1 L2 T2
8. Power Work / time Watt M1 L2 T3
9. Impulse of force Force × Change in time Ns M1 L1 T1
10. momentum mass × velocity kg ms1 M1 L1 T1
11. Torque Force × position vector Nm M1 L2 T2
12. Temperature (T) Kelvin M° L° T° q1
13. Heat (Q) - J M1 L2 T2
Heat
14. Specific heat J kg1 K1 M° L2 T2q1
Q
m'T mass × Temp. diffrence
15. Latent heat Heat J kg1 M° L2 T2
mass
16. Gas constant (R) J mol1 K1 M1 L2 T2q1
gas constant
17. Boltzmann constant (kB) J K1 M1 L2 T2q1
R
=
NA Avagrados No.
18. Planks constant (h) Energy / frequency Js M1 L2 T1

19. Charge (q) Electric current × time As = C M° L° T1A1
20. Surface Charge Charge
density (s) area Cm2 M° L2 T1A1
21. Electric current density (J) Current per unit area Am2 M° L2 T°A1
22. Electric potential (V) Work JC1 M1 L2 T3A1
Charge
23. Intensity of electric (E) Force/Charge NC1 or Vm1 M1 L1 T3A1
field
Potential difference
24. Resistance (R) =W M1 L2 T3A2
V
Electric current A
R1
Electric current
25. Conductance W1 = mho M1 L2 T3A2
Potrential difference
26. Resistivity (r) RA Resistance × Area Wm M1 L3 T3A2

=
l length
10
No. Physical Quantity Formula Unit Dimensional
Formula
27. Conductivity (s) U = RA W1m1 M1 L3 T3A2

1 l
q1 q 2
28. Permitivity of e = N1C2m2 M1 L3 T4A2
o 4 SFr 2
vacuum (eo)
29. Capacitance (C) Charge CV1 or F M1 L2 T4A2

potential difference
B=
F
30. Intensity of magnetic qv NA1 m1 or tesla M1 L0 T2A1
field (B)
31. Magnetic flux (f) N B A Vs or weber M1 L2T2A1

JG JG
32. Self inductance (L) NI Vs A1 or henry M1 L2T2A2

I
33. Stress Force / area Nm2 M1 L1T2

34. Modulus of elasticity Stress/Strain Nm2 M1 L1T2
35. Moment of Inertia (I) mass × (Perpendicular distance)2 kg m2 M1 L2To
Force or Energy
36. Surface Tension (T) length area Nm1 = Jm2 M1 L0T2
37. Co-efficient of viscosity (h) Nsm2 M1 L1T1

F
6 Srv
Physical quantity having same dimension :
No. Dimensional Physical quantity
Formula
1. M° L° T1 Frequency, Angular frequency, Angular Speed, Angular velocity velocity gradient,
decay constant
2. M1 L2 T2 Work, kinetic energy, potential energy Internal energy, Torque, Heat energy
moment of force
3. M1 L1 T2 Pressure, Stress, Bulk modulus, Youngs modulus, modulus of rigidity energy density
4. M1 L1 T1 Linear momentum, Impulse of Force.
5. M° L1 T2 Acceleration, Acceleration due to gravity, Intensity of gravitational field
6. M L T
1 1 2
Force, Weight, Thrust
7. M1 L° T2 Surface Tension, Surface energy (energy per unit area), spring constant.
8. M° L° T° Strain, relative density, plane angle, solid angle, relative permitivity (Dielectric
constant), relative permeability.
9. M° L2 T2 Latent heat, Gravitational potential
10. M1 L2 T2q1 Heat capacity, gas constant, Boltzmanns Constant, Antropy
11
(73) Dimensional formula of moment of force couple is ......
(A) M1 L1 T2 (B) M1 L2 T2 (C) M2 L2 T2 (D) M1 L2 T2
(74) Dimensional formula of energy density is ......
(A) M1 L1 T1 (B) M1 L1 T2 (C) M1 L2 T2 (D) M1 L2 T1
(75) If E, M, L G are Energy, mass, angular momentum and universal constant of gravitation
EL2
respectively then dimension of is ......
M5G 2
(A) Plane angle (B) time (C) mass (D) Length

(76) Which pair (given below) having same dimensional formula ?
(A) Force and work (B) Torque and Power (C) Energy and Torque (D) Power and Energy
(77) If Speed of light (c), Acceleration due to gravity (g) and pressure (P) are taken as fundamental
unit. Then the dimensions of Gravitational constant (G) in c, g, P is ...... .
(A) 1, 2, 1 (B) 1, 2, 1 (C) 2, 2, 1 (D) 0, 2, 1
§ a ·
(78) Dimensional formula of ab in ¨ P 2 ¸ (vb) = mRT is ...... . Where V = volume, P = pressure,
© V ¹
T = Temperature
(A) M1 L3 T2 (B) M1 L5 T2 (C) M1 L8 T2 (D) M1 L8T2
(79) Which one is dimensionally correct ?
(A) v = v0 + at2 (B) F = (C) d = v (D) d =

W 2 v 2 v02
d 2 at 2a
v = final velocity, v0 = initial velocity, a = acceleration, W = work, d = displacement
(80) If A, B and C are physical quantities having different dimension, then which one, given below is true ?
(A) (B) AB + C (C) (A + B)C (D) AB

A–B
C C
(81) Which pair given below having different dimension ?
(A) Torque and Work (B) Angular momentum, Planks constant
(C) Impulse of force & linear momentum (D) Tension, Surface tension
– bt
(82) Amplitude of damped oscillation A(t) = Ae 2 m . Dimensional formula of b = ......
A = Initial Amplitude, m = mass, t = time.
(A) M1 L° T1 (B) M1 L1 T1 (C) M1 L1T1 (D) M1 L1 T°
12
(83) The number of undecayed atoms at time t in a element is given by N = N0 elt. Where
N0 = Initial undecayed atoms. Find the dimensional formula of l.
(A) M1 L° T° (B) M° L° T1 (C) M° L1T° (D) M1 L° T1
(84) Dimensional formula of Power is ......
(A) M1 L2 T2 (B) M1 L2 T2 (C) M1 L2T3 (D) M° L2 T3
(85) Dimensional formula of Impulse of force is ......
(A) M1 L1 T1 (B) M1 L1 T1 (C) M1 L1T1 (D) M1 L2 T1
(86) M° L° T1 is dimensional formula of ......
(A) R
L
(B) R
L
(C) LR (D) LR
1
(87) Dimensional formula of Intensity of radiation is ......
(A) M1 L2 T2 (B) M° L3 T2 (C) M1 L°T1 (D) M1 L° T3
(88) Distance travelled by particle in time t is x, x = [1 ekt], v0= initial velocity, then
v0
k
dimensional formula of k = ......
(A) M° L1 T1 (B) M° L1 T° (C) M° L°T1 (D) M° L° T1
(89) dx
dt
= aebt, a and b are constant, x is a displacement of a particle in time t. Dimension of
is ......
a
b
(A) Distance (B) time (C) mass (D) velocity
(90) Pressure difference for inner and outer side of bubble formed in air is Pi Po = 4RT . Where
R = Radius of bubble, T = Surface tension, dimension of surface Tension is ......
(A) M1 L1 T1 (B) M1 L1 T1 (C) M1 L°T2 (D) M1 L° T1
(91) Young modulus for steel in MKS is 2 × 1011 Pa then in CGS its value is ...... dyne cm2.
(A) 2 ×1010 (B) 2 ×1012 (C) 2 ×1013 (D) 2 ×106
(92) In a new unit system units of force, distance and time are 100N, 10m and 10s respectively. What
is the unit of mass in new system ?
(A) 103 kg (B) 104 kg (C) 105 kg (D) 106 kg
(93) u1 and u2 are units of some physical quantity, n1 and n2 are their quantitative values then ......
(A) n = u (B) n = u (C) u = n (D) u = u

n1 u1 n1 u2 n1 u1 n1 n2
2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
13
(94) Force acting on a body is 10N. If the unit of mass and distance become double and unit of time
becomes half then magnitude of force in new unit system will be ...... N.
(A) 1.6 (B) 16 (C) 160 (D) 1600
(95) Energy of a particle is 10J. If the unit of mass becomes four times, unit of acceleration becomes
double, unit of length becomes half, then energy of particle in new system is ......
(A) 4J (B) 40J (C) 400J (D) 4kJ
(96) Unit of power 100erg min1, unit of time is 1 h, unit of force is 60 dyne then unit of lenght is ...... cm.
(A) 1 (B) 10 (C) 100 (D) 1000
(97) Dimensional formula of force is Ma Lb Tc then 3a + 5b 2c = ......
(A) 10 (B) 1.2 (C) 4 (D) 12
(98) Dimensional formula of Electric power is Ma Lb TcAd then, 5a + 2b + c d = ......
(A) 4 (B) 6 (C) 8 (D) 10
(99) Dimensional formula of angular momentum is Ma Lb Tc and dimensional formula of density is
Mx Ly Tz then ax + by cz = ......
(A) 5 (B) 5 (C) 25 (D) 25
(100) When 10 N force is act on a particle momentum obtained is 1 SI, frequency of oscillation for a
particle is ......
(A) 1 Hz (B) 10 Hz (C) 100 Hz (D) 1 KHz
(101) Momentum (p), Area (A), time (T) are taken as fundamental quantities, dimension of energy is ......
(A) p1 A1 T1 (B) p2 A1 T1 (C) p2 A 2 T1 (D) p1 A 2 T1

–1 1
A + Bt 2
(102) A body is moving along the x-axis, equation of velocity is given by v(t) = 1+ Ct
. Dimensional
formula of A, B and C are ...... .

(A) L1 T1, L1 T3, T1 (B) L1 T1, L1 T2, T1
(C) L1 T2, L1 T1, T1 (D) L1 T1, L1 T2, L1 T1
(103) Momentum (p) is given by equation p = mv . Dimension of c and p are ...... .

2
1– v
c2
(A) L1 T2, M1 L1 T2 (B) M1 L1T1, L1 T1

(C) L1 T1, M1 L1 T1 (D) M1 L1T2, L1 T2
Dt + Et 2
(104) Force is defined as F = 1+ Asin 2 Z t
, then units of A and D are ...... .
(A) unitless, Ns1 (B) unitless, Ns (C) m, Ns1 (D) m, Ns

(105) 100 g mass, 10 cm distance, 0.1s time are taken as units in new system. Unit of work = ...... in
new system.
(A) 0.01 J (B) 0.1 J (C) 1 J (D) 10 J
14
(106) Energy E = Gxcyhz. Where G = universal constand of gravitation, c = velocity of light and
h = planks constant then value of x, y, z are ...... .
(A) 12 , –1 , 2 (B) –1 , , 1 (C) –1 , , 1 (D) 12 , –1 , 2

–5 3 5 –3
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
(107) If energy (E), velocity (V), and time (T) are taken as fundamental physical quantities. Then,
dimensional formula of surface tension is ......
(A) E1 V2 T2 (B) E1 V1 T2 (C) E1 V2 T1 (D) E2 V1 T3
(108) Dimensional formula of permitivity of vacuum is ......
(A) M1 L3 T4A2 (B) M1 L3 T2A2 (C) M1 L3 T4A2 (D) M1 L3 T2A2
(109) If the dimension of a physical quantity is La MbTc, then this physical quantity is ......
(A) Acceleration, If a = 1, b = 1, c = 2 (B) Pressure, If a = 1, b = 1, c = 2
(C) Force, If a = 1, b = 0, c = 2 (D) velocity, If a = 1, b = 0, c = 1
(110) Dimensional formula for the ratio of linear momentum and angular momentum is ......
(A) M° L° T° (B) M° L1 T° (C) M° L1 T° (D) M° L1 T1
(111) A physical quantity is given by Z = MxLyTz. If percentage error in measurement of M, L and T
are a, b and c respectively then maximum percentage error in the measurement of Z is ......
(A) x + b + c (B) ax + by + cz (C) ax + by cz (D) x + b c

a a
y z y z
(112) 76 cm height of Hg = ...... Nm2.

Density of Mercury (Hg), r = 13.6 g cm3.
(A) 1.013 × 105 (B) 1.01 × 105 (C) 76 × 102 (D) 7.6 × 105
Ans : 73 (B), 74 (B), 75 (A), 76 (C), 77 (D), 78 (D), 79 (B), 80 (D), 81 (D), 82 (A), 83 (B),
84 (C), 85 (C), 86 (B), 87 (D), 88 (C), 89 (A), 90 (C), 91 (B), 92 (A), 93 (B), 94 (C),
95 (B), 96 (C), 97 (D), 98 (B), 99 (A), 100 (B), 101 (D), 102 (A), 103 (C), 104 (A),
105 (B), 106 (C), 107 (A), 108 (A), 109 (B), 110 (B), 111 (B), 112 (A)
Questions depents on experimental skills :

Least-count of Vernier calliperse :
Value of one division on main scale (S)
L.C. =
Total no. of divisions on vernier scale
Least count (L.C.) = Value of one division on main scale (1 MSD) - value of one division on vernier
scale (1 VSD)
Suppose 1 MSD = a unit
If nth division of vernier matches with mth division of main scale.
1 VSD = m
n
× a unit

\ Least count (L.C.) = a n a = 1– n a unit
m m

15
Least count of micrometer screw :
Pitch (p)
Least count (L.C.) = Total divisions on circular Scale
Where pitch (p)= distance of one division on main scale.

= Distance travelled in complete one rotation of circular scale.
(113) In vernier calliperse measurement of one division on main scale is x cm. nth division of vernier
scale matches with (n1)th division. Then minimum measurement of vernier calliperse is ...... cm.
§ n –1 ·
(A) n–1 (B) ¨ n ¸ x (C) n– 1 (D) n
x nx x
© ¹
(114) Micrometer screw with pitch 0.5 mm and 50 divisions on circular scale is used to measure
diameter of a sphere. Then least count of micrometer screw is ......
(A) 0.1 cm (B) 0.01 cm (C) 0.001 cm (D) 0.05 cm
(115) 30th division of vernier scale matches with 29th division of main scale in spectrometer.
If value of one division on main scale is 0.5° then minimum measurement (L.C.) = ...... .
(A) One minute (B) Half minute (C) 1° (D) 0.5°
(116) Diameter of a wire is measured with micrometer of least count 0.01 mm. Reading of main scale
is 0 mm and reading of circular scale are 48 divisions then diameter of a wire is ...... .
(A) 0.48 cm (B) 0.048 cm (C) 0.24 cm (D) 0.0048 cm
Ans. : 113 (D), 114 (C), 115 (A), 116 (B)
Assertion - Reason type Question :
Instruction : Read assertion and reason carefully, select proper option from given below.
(a) Both assertion and reason are true and reason explains the assertion.
(b) Both assertion and reason are true but reason does not explain the assertion.
(c) Assertion is true but reason is false.
(d) Assertion is false and reason is true.
(117) Assertion : Light year and wavelength both represent distance.
Reason : Both having dimension of time.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(118) Assertion : The distance of stars, which are farthar away than 100 light year can not measured
with the method of parallex removal.
Reason : Angle of parallex removal can not be measured accurately.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(119) Assertion : Dimension of Surface tension and Surface energy are equal.
Reason : Their SI units are equal.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
16
(120) Assertion : y = A sin (wt kx) and (wt kx) is dimensionless.
Reason : Dimension of k is M°L1T°
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(121) Assertion : In all measurement, last significant digit is more in accurate.

Reason : d = 0.9 m, d = 0.90 m and d = 0.900 m the d = 0.900 m is more accurate.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
Match the columns :
(122) Match the physical quantity in column-1 with SI unit in Column-2.

Column-1 Column-2
(1) Work (a) Jm1 (A) 1 (c), 2 (d), 3 (b), 4 (a)
(2) Power (b) Ns (B) 1 (b), 2 (c), 3 (a), 4 (d)
(3) momentum (c) kwh (C) 1 (d), 2 (b), 3 (c), 4 (a)
(4) Force (d) Nms1 (D) 1 (c), 2 (d), 3 (a), 4 (b)
(123) Column-1 Column-2

(1) Stefans Constant (a) JK1mol1 (A) 1 (d), 2 (b), 3 (c), 4 (a)
(2) Universal gas constant (b) Fm1 (B) 1 (a), 2 (d), 3 (b), 4 (c)
(3) Electric permitivity (c) Hm1 (C) 1 (d), 2 (a), 3 (b), 4 (c)
(4) magnetic permeability (d) Wm2k4 (D) 1 (a), 2 (d), 3 (c), 4 (b)
(124) Match the measurement in column-1 with significant digits in column-2.

Column-1 Column-2
(1) 33.015 (a) 3 (A) 1 (b), 2 (a), 3 (d), 4 (c)
(2) 0.054 (b) 4 (B) 1 (d), 2 (c), 3 (b), 4 (a)
(3) 0.003530 (c) 2 (C) 1 (d), 2 (a), 3 (c), 4 (a)
(4) 1.75×104 (d) 5 (D) 1 (b), 2 (c), 3 (d), 4 (a)
Ans. : 117 (B), 118 (A), 119 (C), 120 (C), 121 (B), 122 (A), 123 (C), 124 (B)
17
2 Kinematics
Vector
Equal Parallel Opposite Antiparallel Aparallel
vectors vectors vectors vectors vectors
Magnitude Equal Unequal Equal Unequal Equal or Unequal
Direction Equal Equal Opposite Opposite any
Angle between q = 0° q = 0° q = 180° or q = 180° or q ¹ 0°, q ¹ 180°
two vectors p rad p rad 0 < q < 360°
When a vector is multiply by any value or scaler, then direction remain as it is but magnitude
becomes scaler times.
Addition or Subtraction of vectors
Method of triangle
Method of parallelogram and
Algebraic or analytical Method
It is resultant vector of addition of vector and vector B , then

R A
o
|R | = A 2 B2 2ABcos T .
and R makes an angle a with vector A , then

Bsin T R
tan a =
A Bcos T
= y
A+
Rx B B
=
Magnitude of unit vector is one unit, it is expressed as n . R
Unit vector in direction of A ,

q a
o
n A = Vector A
=
A
o magnitude of vector
|A |
Unit vectors in three dimensions (i.e. cartesian co-ordinate system) X-axis ® i , Y-axis ® j ,
Z-axis ® k Y R
Y
Resolution of a vector Ax
P P
Az
A
Ay Ay Ay
O

A Y
Ax Az M
Ax
X
O Ax Ay Q
X
In two dimension In three dimension
A = Ax i + Ay j and A = Ax i + Ay j + Az k

o o
|A| A x 2 A y2 |A| Ax 2 A y2 Az 2
18
Angular resolution of a vector (In two dimensions) Y
A = A cosq i + A sinq j

A vectors makes an angle q with x-axis in two dimensions, then Q
S
§ Ay ·

A sinq
\ q = tan1 ¨ ¸
Ay A
tanq =
Ax © Ax ¹ R q
A cosq
Subtraction of vectors : P
To make subtraction, add an opposite vector of which will
be subtract, in given vector. O X
N A cosq M

A

B
A =

R = A + ( B)

–B
R = A B

If R = A B then

o Bsin T
|R | = A 2 B2 – 2ABcos T and an angle of R with A is a then, tan a = A Bcos T

Multiplication of vectors
Scaler product Vector Product

(dot product) (cross product)
o o o o
A B = | A | | B | cos q Au B = | A | | B | sin q n

o o
A B = The product of the magnitude of first Where n is unit vector in the direction
vector with the projection of second vector on obtained by right handed screw rule.
the first vector
o o oo o o o o
A B = B A A u B = – Bu A
§ o o· § o o·
u ¨ Au C ¸
o o o
A u ( B C) = ¨ ¸ +
o o o o o o o
© ¹
A ( B C) A B A C
© ¹
A B
If A and B are parallel then, If A and B are parallel or anti parallel

o o § o o · , then o o
A B = | A | | B | ¨A &B¸ Au B = 0

© ¹
§ o o·
If A and B are antiparallel, then If A and B are perpendicular ¨ A A B ¸

© ¹
o o
A B = | A | | B | then, o o = | A | | B | n

Au B
19
i j k
o o
If A and B are perpendicular Au B =
Ax Ay Az
Bx By Bz
o o
then A B = 0
o o
A B = AxBx + AyBy + AzBz Area of the triangle formed by A and B ,

1
D= |A×B|
2
ª º
« A x Bx A y B y A z Bz » Sin D Sin E Sin J
q = cos « » = =

1

C a
«¬ ( A x A y A z ) ( Bx By Bz ) »¼
2 2 2 2 2 2 B
A B C
b g

A
(1) Magnitude of A and B are 10 unit and 20 unit respectively. If the angle between this two vectors is

30°, the magnitude of resultant (R) is ...... unit and angle with vector A is ...... ( 3 = 1.7).

(A) 30 unit, 30° (B) 10 unit, 30° (C) 29 unit, 20° 19' (D) 39 unit, 30° 30'
(2) A force act on a substance having mass m is F = 5 i 4 j + 2 k N. An angle of this force

with X-axis is ......
§ 1 · § 5· § 3 ·
(A) Cos1 ¨ ¸
©3 5 ¹
(B) Cos1 ¨¨ 3 ¸¸
© ¹
(C) Cos1 ¨
© 5¹
¸ (D) Cos1 3 5
o o
(3) | A × B | is greater by 73 % than A B for given A and B . An angle between

A and B is ......

(A) 0° (B) 30° (C) 60° (D) 90°
(4) If the addition vector R of A and B makes an angle a with A and b with B . Then ......

(A) Always a < b (B) If A < B, a < b

(C) If A = B, a < b (D) If A > B, a < b

(5) An angle between A = 3 i 4 j 2 k and B = 8 i + 3 j + 6 k is ......
(A) 90° (B) 60° (C) 180° (D) 0°

(6) If the vectors A = 5 i + 7 j 3 k and B = 2 i + m j + 6 k are mutually perpendicular,
then m = ......
(A) 1 (B) 4 (C) 3 (D) 4
JG JG
(7) If A = 2 i j + 3 k and B = i + 2 j k then unit vector in the direction of A u B is ......
1
(A) (3 i + j +2 k ) (B) i j + k
14
1 1
(C) ( i + j + k ) (D) ( i + j + k )
3 3
20

(8) Area of triangle formed by A = 4 i + 3 j k and B = i + 2 j + k is ...... unit.

(A) 10 3 (B) (C) (D) 5 3

5 3 3
2 2
(9) | A × B |2 + | A × B |2 = ......

(A) zero (B) AB (C) AB (D) A2B2
(10) If | A + B | = | A | = | B |, then the angle between A and B is ...... .

(A) 0° (B) 30° (C) 90° (D) 120°
(11) The unit vector, which is perpendicular to A and B both is ...... .

o o o o o o o o
AB Au B Au B A B
(A) (B) (C) (D)
AB ABsin T ABcos T ABsin T
(12) If 2
3
i + 1 j + m k is unit vector, then m =
3
...... .
(A) (B) 13 (C) 1 (D)
2 1
3 3
o o
(13) If | A | = 4, | B | = 2.5, A B = 8 and an angle between A and B is acute angle then

o o
| A u B | = ....... .
(A) 6 (B) 10 (C) 3.2 (D) 2

(14) Aproximate area of parallelogram fromed by A = 2 i 3 j k and B = 4 i + 3 k is ...... unit.

(A) 5 (B) 11 (C) 18 (D) 15

(15) The component of A = 3 i 2 j + k in the direction of B = i + j is ...... .

(A) 1 (B) (C) (D)

1
2 2 14
Ans : 1 (C), 2 (B), 3 (C), 4 (D), 5 (A), 6 (B), 7 (D), 8 (B), 9 (D), 10 (D), 11 (B), 12 (A),
13 (A), 14 (C), 15 (C)
Mechanics
A branch of physics dealing with properties of a moving body, causes of motion, results due to
motion etc. is known as mechanics.
Mechanics devides in two branches.
Kinematics : A branch of mechanics dealing with motion without considering its causes is
known as kinematics.
Dynamics : A branch of mechanics describing motion along with its causes and properties
of moving body is called dynamics.
Concept of a particle and frame of reference :
A point like object having mass can be considered as a particle.
If the distance between two object is very large as compared to their dimensions, these objects
can be treated as particle.
21
All the particles of a solid body performing linear motion cover the same distance in the same
time. Hence, the motion of such a body can be described in terms of the motion of any of its
constituent particles.
Particle is relative concept.
Motion is also a relative concept.
Motion is described according to a place and a situation of an observer.
A place and a situation from where an observer takes his observation is called frame of reference.
Frame of reference is arbitrary.
Frame of reference will be inertial or non-inertial.
Position, Path length and Displacement :
To describe a motion and position of particle, we can choose three mutually perpeducular axis
name them X, Y and Z.
If all the three co-ordinates of a particle remain unchanged with time, the particle is considered
at rest with respect to time in this frame. If one or more co-ordinates of a particle changes
with time, we say that particle is in motion with respect to this frame.
Path length Displacement
The total distance travelled by a particle in The change in position of a particle in some
some time interval is called the path length time interval is called displacement.
or total distance.
Path length depends on path. Displacement does not depends on path. Its
depends only on initial and final position.
Path length is always positive. Displacement may be positive, negative or zero.
Path length is scaler quantity. Displacement is vector quantity.
In a normal condition, ratio of path length to displacement is one or more than one.
(16) In a joggers park, a man complete two rotation on a circular path of radius 30 m. Then
difference of path length and displacement is ...... m in given motion.
(A) 120 p (B) 60 p (C) zero (D) 30 p
(17) A person travelled a distance of 40 m along a straight line, then he travelled 30 m in right side.
So, the ratio of total distance to displacement is ......
(A) 1 (B) 1.33 (C) 0.75 (D) 1.4
(18) An ant experienced 60 cm displacement on a cicular path of 60 cm radius. Then total distance
travelled by it is ...... cm.
S
(A) (B) 20 p (C) 60 p (D) 120 p
3
Ans. : 16 (A), 17 (D), 18 (B)
Average speed and average velocity :
With help of average speed, we know how fast the position of object is changing.
The ratio of total distance travelled (i.e. path length) to the time interval during which the
motion has been taken place is known as average speed. Thus, distance travelled by object in
unit time is known as average speed.
22
Total travelled distance Path length
average speed = <v> = v = =
time interval time interval
Average velocity is the ratio of displacement to the time interval, in which the displacement
occurs.Thus, the displacement covered by object in unit time is known as average velocity.
displacement
average velocity =
time interval
Unit of average speed and average velocity is ms1.

Average speed is scaler while average velocity is vector physical quantity.
(19) A vehicle travels different distances with different speeds in the same direction. The average
speed of the vehicle is ......
v1 v2 v3 .....
(A) v1+ v2+ v3 + .... (B) t t t ....
1 2 3
d1 d2 d3 d1 d 2 d3 ....
(C) t + t + t + ..... (D)
1 2 3 d1 d 2 d3
....
v1 v2 v3
(20) A cyclist travelled third part of total distance with a speed of 12 kmh1 and remaining distance
with a speed of 18 kmh1. so, average speed of his is ...... kmh1.
(A) 15 (B) 12 (C) 18 (D) 15.43
(21) A person wallking in a straight line, covers 13 part of the distance to be travelled with a speed of
v1 and remaining distance with speed v2. So, avrage speed of his is ......
3v1 v2 3v1 v2 2v1 v2 2v1 v2
(A) v 2v (B) 2v v (C) v 2v (D) 2v v
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
(22) A car covered 120 km straight line disance in 2 hour, then it terned left and travelled 50 km
distance in 1 hour. So average speed and average velocity during this is ...... and ......
respectively.
(A) 40 kmh1, 50 kmh1 (B) 56.67 kmh1, 43.33 kmh1
(C) 43.33 kmh1, 56.67 kmh1 (D) 50 kmh1, 40 kmh1
(23) A length of second arm of a clock is 10 cm. This second arm is moves to 9 from 3. Average
speed and average velocity of this second arm is ...... cms1 and ...... cms1 respectively.
(A) 3.33, 3.33 (B) 1.05, 0.6666 (C) 1.111, 3.00 (D) 1.666, 3.33
Ans. : 19 (D), 20 (D), 21 (B), 22 (B), 23 (B)

Instantaneous velocity and Instantaneous speed :
Instantaneous velocity is obtained by time derivative of position.
Instantaneous velocity is vector physics quantity and its direction is in direction of tangent
of path.
23
Magnitude of instantaneous velocity is instantaneous speed.
In a graph of x ® t, instantaneous speed is slope of tangent at given point of path.
(24) A motion of object is expressed by x(t) = 2t2 3t + 4 m. Average speed of object for initial 3 s
and instantaneous speed at t = 3 s is ...... and ...... respectively.
(A) 3 ms1, 9 ms1 (B) 9 ms1, 9 ms1
(C) 4.5 ms1, 3 ms1 (D) 4.5 ms1, 4.5 ms1

(25) An equation of motion for a particle is given by v = 2t + 3 ms1. So, distance travelled by particle
in initial four second is ......
(A) 11 m (B) 3 m (C) 19 m (D) 28 m

(26) An object is moving on a circular path with velocity v at a given instant. When it completes half
rotation change in its velocity will be ......

(A) zero (B) v (C) 2 v (D) 2 v

(27) Motion of an object in a straight line is given by x = 5t2 6t + 2.2 m. The position of the object
when its velocity is zero is given by ...... m.
(A) 0.6 (B) 0 (C) 0.4 (D) 1.0
Ans. : 24 (A), 25 (D), 26 (C), 27 (C)
Acceleration :
The time rate of change of velocity of moving body is called acceleration.
change in velocity
Average acceleration =
time interval
a =<a>=
' v
't
o
o
Instantaneous acceleration a = d v = time derivative of velocity = v

dt
o o
d2 x
= = Second derivative of position with respect to time = x

dt 2
(28) A motion of particle is given by x(t) = 4t2 + 4t 3 m. So, instantaneous acceleration of particle
for 4th second will be ...... ms2.
(A) zero (B) 8 (C) 4 (D) 16
(29) For a moving particle, the relation between time and position is given by t = 4x2 + 3x. Where t is in
second and x is in meter. So, acceleration for this particle a = ...... . (as a function of velocity).
(A) 12v (B) 8v2 (C) 8v3 (D) 12v2
(30) For moving particle, If x = At2 + Bt + C then equation for velocity ...... and quation for
acceleration ...... .
(A) 2At + B, 2A (B) 2t + B, 2B (C) At + B, 2A (D) At2, Bt
24
(31) The velocity of a particle becomes 9 i + 2 j ms1 from (4 i 3 j ) ms1 in 5 second. Then
average acceleration is ...... ms2.
(A) i + j (B) 13 i 5 j (C) 5 i 5 j (D) i j
(32) An acceleration of moving particle is a = 4t ms2. So, velocity at third second will be ...... ms1.
(A) 12 (B) 18 (C) 36 (D) zero
Ans. : 28 (B), 29 (C), 30 (A), 31 (A), 32 (B)
Kinetic equations for uniformly acceleration motion :
At t = 0 position of particle x0 = 0 then,
at t = t velocity of particle is v = v0 + at.
displacement of particle is x = v0t + 12 at2
§ v v0 ·
x = ¨ 2 ¸t
© ¹
v 2 v02
x=
2a
In general, at t = 0, position of particle x = x0 then
v = v0 + at
x x0 = v0t + 12 at2
§ v v0 ·
x x0 = ¨ 2 ¸ t
© ¹
v 2 v02
x x0 =
2a
A distance travelled in nth second by a perticle, which moves with constant acceleration and v0 as
initial velocity.
dnth = v0 + 2 (2n 1)

a
(33) A car which stands at traffic signal, starts its motion with acceleration 5 ms2. Then velocity of
car after 4 s and distance travelled by car during this 4 s will be ...... and ...... respectively.
(A) 40 ms1, 20 m (B) 20 ms1, 20 m (C) 40 ms1, 40 m (D) 20 ms1, 40 m
(34) The ratio of the distances travelled in the fifth and the third second by a particle moving start
from rest over a straight path with constant acceleration 8 ms2 is ......
(A) 5
3
(B) 9
5
(C) 10
3
(D) 5
9
(35) An object starts its constant accelerated motion with 1 ms1 initial velocity and it covered same
distance in third second as it covered in initial two seconds. Then constant acceleration of object
during this motion is ...... ms2.
(A) 1 (B) 5 (C) 2 (D) 3
(36) The velocity of an object moving with constant acceleration is 45 ms1 at the end of 10 s and
becomes 53 ms1 at the end of 12 second. Then the distance travelles by object in 15 second will
be ...... m.
(A) 65 (B) 82.5 (C) 110 (D) 525
25
(37) The object srarts from stationary, moves with constant acceleration 4 ms2 for 10 s then it moves with
constant velocity for 50 s and finally it stops with 2 ms2 deceleration. Total distance coverd by object
will be ......
(A) 1200 m (B) 1300 m (C) 2000 m (D) 2600 m
(38) In a constant acceleration motion, an object losing 23 v0 velocity in time t. Where v0 is initial
velocity. So time required to velocity becomes zero will be ...... .
(A) t (B) 2t (C) 2 (D) 3

3t 2t
(39) Speeds of on object moving with constant acceleration at point A and B are u and v
respectively. Then the speed of object at midpoint of A and B is ...... .
v2 u 2 vu v2 u 2 v2 u 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 2 2 2
(40) An object starts its motion with 2 ms1 velocity and acceleration given by a = 6t2 2t + 3 ms2.
So, velocity of object at t = 3 s is ...... ms1.
(A) 20 (B) 56 (C) 48 (D) 51
Ans. : 33 (D), 34 (B), 35 (C), 36 (D), 37 (D), 38 (C), 39 (A), 40 (B)
Kinetic equations for freely falling body :
For freely falling body v0 = 0 and a = g.

upward direction ® Positive y-axis ® Positive.
downward direction ® negative y-axis ® negative.
For freely falling body,

v = gt 2gy = v2
y = 12 gt2 y = 12 vt
(41) Two different substances are allowed to free falling from towers of height h1 and h2. Time taken
by them to reach on ground are t1 and t2 respetively. So t = ......

t1
2
h12
(A) h (B) (C) (D)
h1 h1 h2
2 h2 h2 2 h1
(42) An object is allowed to fall freely from a tower of 80 m height. Distance covered by it in last
second before touching ground is ...... m. (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 4 (B) 45 (C) 35 (D) 10
(43) A freely falling body passed a building of height 25 m in last second. Then from ...... m height
that body will be allowed to free fall. (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 125 (B) 100 (C) 85 (D) 45
26
(44) The time taken to reach on ground by a freely falling object from height h1 and h2 are t1 and t2
respectively then t = ...... .

t2
1
h 22
(A) h (B) (C) (D)
h2 h2 h1
1 h1 h12 h2
(45) An object is thrown from a tower of height h in vertically upward direction with speed v. So time
taken by object to touch a ground is ......
ª 2 hg º
(A) 1+ (B) g 1+ 2 (C) g 1– 2 (D) g «1+ 1+ 2 »
2g h v hg v 2 hg v
v2 v v «¬ v ¼»
(46) A stone is dropped from a balloon, starts its motion with 4 ms2 in vertically upward direction
after 5 s. So, minimum height from ground obtain by this stone is ...... m. (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 55 (B) 70 (C) 90 (D) 105
(47) An object is thrown from a tower of height H in vertically upward direction with velocity v0,
when it touch the ground its velocity becomes 2v0. then H = ...... .
3 v02 3 v02 v 02
(A) 2 g (B) (C) 2 g (D) 2 g
v0
g
(48) An object is allowed to fall freely from a tower of hight 150 m, exactly at the same time another
object is thrown from the bottom of the tower in vertically upward direction with velocity of
30 ms1. So, two object will be meet after ...... time.
(A) 10 s (B) 45 s (C) 5 s (D) 12 s
(49) A ball is allowed to fall freely from 10 m height from a surface. The ball reaches at 5 m height
after colliding with surface. If time of contact for ball and surface is 0.05 s then average
acceleration during contact is ...... . (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 241.4 ms2 (B) 965.2 ms2 (C) 4828 ms2 (D) 482.8 ms2
Ans. : 41 (B), 42 (C), 43 (D), 44 (B), 45 (D), 46 (B), 47 (A), 48 (C), 49 (D)
Relative velocity :
velocity of P with respect to A =vPA, velocity of P with respect to B = vPB, velocity of B with
respect to A = vBA.
According to this vPA = vPB + vBA (B will be eliminated.)
Thus, velocity of P with respect to A is obtained by addition of velocity of P with respect to B and
velocity of B with respect to A.
Above matter can be expressed as below :
vBA = vPA vPB
= vAP (vBP)
= vBP vAP (P will be eliminated) vBA = vB vA
Thus relative velocity vBA of moving body B with respect to moving body A will be obtained by
subtraction of vBP (velocity of moving body B with respect to any stationary object or point P) and
vAP (velocity of moving body A with respect to any stationary object or point P.)
Stationary object means reference object or point will be taken any object or point.
27
(50) A truck passes through a traffic signal with a constant speed 15 ms1 while at same instant, a car
start its motion with constant acceleration 4 ms2 in the direction of trucks motion. So, relative
velocity of car with respect to truck after 6 sec is ...... .
(A) 9 ms1 (B) 9 ms1 (C) 39 ms1 (D) 39 ms1
(51) Car A is moving on a road with constant speed 54 kmh1. Now car B and car C are moving with
72 kmh1 in mutually opposite direction on the same road. At any cretain time (instant), distance
of car B and car C from car A is 1.4 km, driver of car B think to overtake car A. So,
acceleration of car B will be ...... .
(A) 1 ms2
Car B Car A Car C
(B) 1.5 ms2
(C) 2 ms2
(D) 1 ms2
(52) The rain is falling verticully downward with speed of 12 kmh1. A man running with 5 kmh1 on a
straight way. velocity of rain experience by man will be ...... .
(A) 7 kmh1 (B) 13 kmh1 (C) 17 kmh1 (D) 119 kmh
1
(53) The speed of boat is 5 kmh1 in still water. It crosses a river of width 1.0 km along the shortest
possible path in 20 min. Then, speed of river will be ...... kmh1.
(A) 1 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5
(54) A stationary man observes that the rain is falling vertically downward. When he starts running
with a velocity of 10 kmh1, he observes that the rain is falling at an angle 30° with the vertical
direction. The actual velocity of rain is ...... .
(A) 10 3 kmh1 (B) kmh1 (C) 5 3 kmh1 (D) 15 kmh1

10
3
Ans : 50 (A), 51 (B), 52 (B), 53 (C), 54 (A)
Relative displacement :
At t = 0, relative positions of particle A and B with respect to reference point (origin) are xA0 and
xB0 and relative velocities of particles A and B with respect to reference point are vA and vB. So,
relative displacement of particle B with respect to particle A at t = t will be,
xB xA = (xB0 xA0) + (vB vA) t
xBA vBA
¿
°
¾
°
½
¿
°
¾
°
½

Position of particle B with relative velocity of particle B

respect to particle A at t = 0 with respect to particle A.
(55) At t = 0, car A and car B are at 50 m and 130 m away from origin respectively. Both car starts
their motion in same direction with constant velocities 15 ms1 and 7 ms1 respectively. When and
where they overtake each other ?
(A) 10 s, 200 m (B) 15 s, 170 m (C) 8 s, 180 m (D) 12 s, 150 m
28
(56) When particles A and B move uniformly towards each other, they get 16 m closer in 2 second
and when they move uniformly in same direction with original speeds they get 16 m closer in 8
second. So, the speeds of these particles will be ...... and ...... .
(A) 5 ms1 and 3 ms1 (B) 8 ms1 and 0.5 ms1
(C) 4 ms1 and 4 ms1 (D) 32 ms1 and 2 ms1
Ans. : 55 (A), 56 (A)
Motion in one, two and three dimensions :
Motion in one motion in two motion in three
dimension dimension dimension
Position x r = xi + y j r = xi + y j + zk

o o o o
displacement Dx = x x0 ' r = r r0 ' r = r r0

= (x x0) i + (y y0) j = (x x0) i + (y y0) j

+(z z ) k0
o
o o
o
'x
average speed <v> = ' t | v | = |' r | | v | = |' r |
't 't
o o
Instantaneous v = dt v = dt v = dt
dx dr dr
velocity
'v o
o o
o
average <a> = ' t 'v 'v
a ! = 't a ! = 't
acceleration
d2x
o o d2
Instantaneous a = dt = 2 = dv = d 2r a = dt ( v ) = dt 2 ( r )
dv 2 d
dt a dt
acceleration
dt

Kinematic v = v0 + at v = v0 + a t v = v0 + a t

equations of x = v0t + 12 at2 d = v0 t + 2 a t d = v t + 12 a t2

2
1
§o o·
0
§o o·
§ v v0 · ¨ v v0 ¸ ¨ v v0 ¸
uniformly accel- x = ¨ 2 ¸t d = ¨ 2 ¸t = ¨ 2 ¸t
© ¹

¨ ¸ ¨ ¸
d
© ¹ © ¹
ereted motion
2ax = v2 v02 2 a . d = v2 v02 2 a . d = v2 v02

Dircetion of instantaneous velocity is in a direction of tangent drawn at given point of path.
Instantaneous velocity in two dimensions is v = vx i + vy j , then an angle made by instantaneous

vy
velocity with x-axis is obtained by equation. tan q = v
x
Velocity is vector physical quantity, hence it can change in three ways :
(1) Magnitude of velocity will change. (In a direction of velocity)
(2) Direction of velocity will change. (In a perpendicular direction to velocity)
(3) Magnitude and direction both will change. (In direction and perpendicular direction of velocity)
Acceleration is result of change in velocity, hence it results three different ways.
If only magnitude of velocity changes then acceleration is parallel to velocity. It known as a||.
29
If only direction of velocity changes then acceleration is perpendicular to velocity. It known as a^.
If magnitude and direction of velocity both changes then acceleration will be parallel and
perpendicular to velocity. so,
o o o o
a = a & + aA Here a and a A are mutually perpendicular to each other.

&
o
\|a|= a&2 aA 2
During uniform circular motion, only direction of velocity changes. The direction of acceleration is
perpendicular to the direction of velocity, it means in the direction of centre of circular path. Thats
why this acceleration is called Radial acceleration or Centripetal acceleration (ar or ac.)
ar = ac = v
2
r
(57) The position vector of a moving particle depends on time according to r = at2 i + (bt 3) j m,

then magnitude of velocity and magnitude of acceleration at time t will be ...... and ......
respectively.
(A) at2 + bt 3, at2 (B) 2at + b, 2a (C) 4D 2 t 2 + E2 , 2a (D) 2at + b 3, 2at
(58) Ships A and B are standing 20 km far from each other on a line joining north south. Ship A
moves with 10 kmh1 in west direction and ship B moves with 10 kmh1 in north direction. Then
minimum distance between these two ships will be ...... km obtain after ...... minute.
(A) 10 2 , 60 (B) 20 2 , 60 (C) , 15 (D) , 15

10 20
2 2
(59) A particle starts its motion from the origin with velocity 3 j ms1 and moves in xy plane with

uniform acceleration 2 i + j ms2. When the value of x co-ordinate is 25 m, then the value of
y co-ordinate will be ...... m.
(A) 25 (B) 54 (C) 27.5 (D) 55
Ans. : 57 (C), 58 (A), 59 (C)
Projectile motion
When an object is thrown in gravitational field of earth it moves with constant horizontal velocity and
only gravitational acceleration. Such two dimensional motion is called a Projectile motion.
For projectile motion,
Horizontal direction Vertical direction
v0x = v0cos q0 = constant v0y = v0 sinq0
ax = 0 ay = g
Position at time t, x = (v0cosq0)t Position at time t, y = (v0sin q0)t 1 gt2
2
velocity at time t, vx = v0 cosq0 velocity at time t, vy = v0 sin q0 gt
Position of projectile at time t, r = (v0 cosq0)t i + [(v0 sinq0)t 1 gt2] j

2
velocity of projectile at time t, v = v0 cosq0 i + (v0 sinq0 gt) j

30
Equation of trajectory of a Projectile, y = (tanq0)x x2
g

2(v0 cos T0 )2
v 0 2 sin 2 T 0
The maximum height (H) reached by the projectile, H =
2g
v0 sin T 0
Time taken to achieve maximum height by the Projectile, tm = g
2 v0 sin T 0
Time of flight for Projectile, tF = 2tm = g
2 v0 2 sin T 0 cos T 0 v0 2 sin 2 T 0

Range of a projectile (Distance travelled in horizontal direction) : R = =
g g
2
Maximum Range Rmax = 0g (For given v0, q Should be 45° for maximum Range.)
v

Relation between range and maximum height for projectile tan q0 = 4RH
For q and 90° q, ranges covered by projectiles are equal for given v0.
The ranges covered by projectile at 45° + a and 45° a are equal.
(60) Two objects are projected with the same velocity at different angles with the horizontal and if the
range is same for both of them. It t1 and t2 are their time of flights then t1. t2 = ......
(A) 2 Rg (B) 2 Hg (C) (D) 2 g

2R R
g
(61) An object is projected at angle of 30° with the horizontal, with kinetic energy K. Its kinetic
energy at maximum height is ......
(A) 0 (B) 4 (C) (D)

3K K 3K
2 2
(62) For a projectile motion y(t) = 12t 5t2 and x(t) = 5t. Where x and y are in meter and t in
second. So initial velocity ......
(A) 6 ms1 (B) 12 ms1 (C) 5 ms1 (D) 13 ms1
(63) Bullets are fired with the same initial velocity v in different direction on a plane surface. These
bullets would fall on the maximum area of ...... on this surface.
Sv 2 S 2v 2 Sv 4 Sv 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
g g2 g2 g2
(64) In a projectile motion, if the maximum height H is one-forth of the range (R), then angle of
projections with horizontal is ......
(A) zero (B) 30° (C) 45° (D) 60°
Ans. : 60 (C), 61 (B), 62 (D), 63 (C), 64 (C)
31
Graphs :
Graph is always y ® x.
Shape of graph can be decided by power of y and x in a equation express in terms of y.
If both have a power 1-1 then graph is straight line, otherwise different shape for different
power. (generally they are considered as a parabolic).
For a straight line,
Co-efficient of x (with sign) gives a slope of graph when equation is expressed in terms of Y.
To obtain a segment on Y-axis, put x-co-ordinate zero and get the value of y.
To obtain a segment on X-axis, put y-co-ordinate zero and get the value of x.
If graph is strait line, then equation of line will be y = mx + c.
Where m = slope of line and c = segment on y axis.
From a graph, a physical quantity which is obtained by product of x and y-axis will be the area
under the curve and x-axis.
From a graph, a ratio of y to x is obtained by a slope of curve at a point.
Distance ® time velocity ® time Important-point

graph graph
Uniform distance (d) velocity (v) (1) d = 0 at t = 0, in graph of

motion displacement ® time.
(motion with (2) Slope of graph of displacement ® time
v = constant
d = vt
constant = velocity = constant
velocity) 0
(3) Graph of velocity ® time is parallel
0 time (t) time (t)
to time x-axis, so slope = 0
it means acceleration = 0
Constant distance (d) velocity (v) (1) Graph of displacement ® time is
acceleration Parabolic
motion v = at (2) Slope of velocity ® time graph
(i) initial velocity = acceleration = constant
1 2
d= at
2
and initial 0 (3) Initial velocity and initial position Q is
0 time (t)
time (t)
position is zero zero, So graph starts from origin.
distance (d)
velocity (v) (1) Here initial position is zero, so graph
(ii) Initial of displacement ® time starts
d = v0t + at
1 2
velocity ¹ 0 2 v = v0 + at from origin.
Initial v0 (2) Initial velocity is not zero, so graph
position = 0 time (t) of velocity ® time does not start from origin
0 time (t)
(3) Slope of velocity ® time graph
= acceleration = constant.
32
distance (d) velocity (1) Initial position and Initial velocity are
(v)
(iii) Initial at non zero so, graphs do not pass
t 2
+
velocity ¹ 0 1 a v0 through origin.
t+ 2 =
v
Initial +0 v v0
(2) Slope of velocity ® time
0
r0 r
=
d
position ¹ 0 0 time (t)
0
time (t) = acceleration = constant
constant dece- distance (d) velocity (v)
lerated motion (1) Slope of graph velocity ® time is
(i) Till final 0 v0 constant but negative
=
v
velocity (2) Final velocity becomes zero, So
becomes zero 0 t0 motion will be posible till t = t0.
0
time (t)
t = t0 time (t)
distance (d) velocity (v)

(i) It final (1) Slope of graph velocity ® time is
velocity v0
constant but negative.
becomes (2) Final velocity not become zero,
negative So motion will continue after t = t0
0 t0 time (t)
0 t0 time (t)
(65) Figure shows a graph of velocity ® time for any particle. It is clear from graph that ...... on
particle in part B.
velocity (v) (A) Force act in direction of motion.
(B) Force act in opposite direction of motion.
(C) Force will be zero
D
B (D) nothing is clear about force.
A C
0 ® time (t)
(66) A graph of displacement ® time makes 30° angle with time axis. After 2s it makes 60° angle
with time angle. So, average acceleration during this motion is ......
1
(A) 3 (B) 1 (C) 2 3 (D)
3
(67) Figure shows a velocity ® time graph for a upward going lift. So, at ...... m height lift becomes
stationary.
velocity (v) ms1 (A) 12

(B) 32
(C) 44
(D) 24
4
0 3 8
time (t) s
Ans. : 65 (C), 66 (D), 67 (B)
33
(68) Assertion : Speed will be changed without changing velocity of object.
Reason : When velocity of object is zero then acceleration of it may not be zero.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(69) Assertion : An object becomes stationary for a moment while the direction of motion will
changed.
Reason : At given instant, If velocity of object is zero then acceleration of object is also zero.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(70) Assertion : The v ® t graph perpendicular to time axis is not possible in practice.
Reason : Infinite acceleration can not be realized in practice.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(71) Assertion : Magnitude of average velocity is equal to average speed if velocity is constant.
Reason : If velocity is constant, then there is no change in the direction of motion.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(72) Assertion : Particle A is moving northwards and partide B eastwards with same speed. Then,
velocity of A with respect to B is in southeast direction.
Reason : Relative velocity between them is zero as their speeds are same.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(73) Assertion : In the v ® t diagram shown in figure,
average velocity between the interval t = 0 and v
t = t1 is independent of t1. vm
Reason : Average velocity for given interval is 2 .

vm
(A) a (B) b
(C) c (D) d
t
Match the columns : t=0 t = t1
(74) Find the appropriate option from column 2 for column-1, when motion is described by
d = 3 + 8t 4t2.
column-1 column-2
(a) Initial acceleration (p) 16 unit (A) a ® s, b ® r, c ® q, d ® p
(b) velocity at end of 3 s (q) 3 unit (B) a ® s, b ® p, c ® q, d ® r
(c) distance travelled in 2 s (r) 7 unit (C) a ® q, b ® r, c ® s, d ® p
(d) displacement at 1 s (s) 8 unit (D) a ® q, b ® r, c ® p, d ® s
Ans. : 68 (A), 69 (C), 70 (A), 71 (A), 72 (C), 73 (A), 74 (B)

34
3 Laws of Motion
Force is required to starts the motion of static body, to change in motion and to stop the body.
Acoording to external factor force is divided into two parts :
If external factor applies force remaining If external factor applies force without
in contact with a body such force is contact of a body then it is called field force.
called contact force. e.g. Gravitational force
e.g. Frictional force electrical force
magnetic force.
According to Galileo
(i) Static position and position with uniform motion both are equal, because no force is required
for that.
(ii) Body it self can not change the position of motion. This is called "Property of Inertia".
(iii) Mass of a body is measurement of Inertia.
Three types of Inertia
Inertia of Staticness Inertia due to motion Inertia due to direction
Due to this body maintain Due to this body maintain Due to this body maintain
its steady position its state of motion. its direction of motion.
e.g. e.g. e.g.
(1) A person pushed in back (1) A person pushed in (1) When a car suddenly
ward direction when forward direction when takes a turn passenger
stationary bus suddenly break is applied in pushed outword.
starts. moving bus.
(2) If bullet fires on the (2) A player of long jump (2) When a stone tied
glass of window it runs before taking with a string and
makes a hole but when jump. rotates circularly, if
stone throws on the string breaks stone
glass it breaks whole moves towards the
glass. direction of tangent.
(3) When pillow hit by
stick dust particle goes
down ward
Newton's First law of motion
ÒÒUnless external force acting on a body steady body remains steady and body in motion moving with
constant velocity.ÓÓ
35
So,
(i) First law is actual law of inertia given by Galileo.
(ii) First law gives the definition of force but does not explain about its value.
(iii) Acceleration in a body produced by force. So, S F = 0 then a = 0 and v = constant

First law depends on frame of reference

Two types of frame of references
Inertial frame of reference Non-inertial frame of reference
It follows Newton's First law. It does not follow Newton's first law so it
So, F = 0 then a = 0 is not essential that F = 0 then a = 0

In such a frame of reference, for a solution

of problem regarding to motion, Acceleration
of body is taken in opposition direction of
motion, which is equal to acceleration of
frame of reference, called pseudo acceleration
and corresponding force is called pseudo force.
(1) In a bus, going from Ahmedabad to Baroda when suddenly break applies, passenger pushed in
forward direction because...
(A) Some one pushed passenger from backside.
(B) Passenger affraid and starts to run forward.
(C) Due to Inertial upper part of his body is moving with speed of bus and his legs sticks to the
bus.
(D) Due to inertia upper part of his body remains stationary and his legs pushed in backward.
(2) A passenger seating in upper seat of a train moving with velocity of 54 kmh1 throws a pen in
vertical direction on a passenger seating exactly in lower seat, them this pen...
(A) Falls on head of passenger seating lower.
(B) Falls on front side of passenger seating lower.
(C) Falls on back side of passenger seating lower.
(D) Where pen fall, can not be said.
(3) As Shown in figure a bucket filled 10 litre water hanged with the help of string from point P
(i) If a string suddenly pulled from point R P
(ii) If a string pulled slowly from point R... Q
(A) In first case PQ part of string and in second case SR part of String breaks.
(B) In frist case SR part of String and in second case PQ part of string breaks.
(C) In both the cases PQ part breaks. S
(D) In both the cases SR part breaks. R
36
(4) According to Aristotal concept, to stop the cycle slowly which is moving with constant velocity on
the road...
(A) Force should be applied slowly in the opposite direction of cycle's motion.
(B) It is essential to decrease the force with slow rate in the opposite direction of cycle's motion.
(C) There is no need to apply the force.
(D) The force should be applied perpendicular to the direction of cycle's motion.
(5) Inertia of body is measured with the help of which physical quantity ?
(A) Mass (B) Force (C) Momentum (D) Acceleration
(6) For the graph of speed time, for a substance having mass 22 kg moving in the absence of
external force which one is suitable ?
v
(A) v (B)
t t
v
(C) v (D)
t t
(7) A person sitting on a running horse falls in fornt direction when horse suddenly stops, because.
(A) It is intertia of motion of a person. (B) It is inertia of direction of a person.
(C) It is inertia of motion of a horse. (D) It is inertia of direction of a horse.
Ans. : 1 (C), 2 (A), 3 (B), 4 (C), 5 (A), 6(D), 7 (A)
Newton's second law of motion

ÒÒThe time rate of momentum of a body is directly proportional to resultant external force and it is in
the direction of external force.ÓÓ
Resultant external force µ Time rate of change of momentum.
o
dp
So,

F µ
dt
o
dp
\F =k

dt
37
Unit of F is defined in such a way, so that value of proportionality constant k = 1.

o
.... (1)
p
\F = d

dt

but, p =mv

d
\F = (m v )

dt
o
.... (2)
dv
\F =m + v
dm
dt dt
eqution (2) is more general form. In practise it is taken as special cases

If m is constant If ( v ) is constant,
F = m a ... (3) F = v ... (4)

dm
dt
e.g. In case of Rocket, For conveyor belt...

Newton's second law
(i) gives measurement of force and defined force only quantitively.
(ii) In eqn - (3) F = 0 then a = 0. (i.e. v = constant) which matches with Newton's first law.

(iii) Acceleration of a particle at any moment a at any point is decided by force F acting on that

point, at that moment.

(iv) Force depends on time - rate of change of momentum not on momentum.
(v) When more than one force are acting on a body, F Shows resultant external force and a
shows acceleration of centre of mass.
(vi) For a graph of p ® t, slope at any point gives value of force at that time.
Slope = tan q = Force acting on a particle at time t p
SI unit of force = newton (N)
CGS unit is dyne
gravitational unit of force : kg wt (Kilogram weight) or kgf (Kilogram force)
1 kgf = 9.8 N
t
q
Cases of variable mass : t
Rocket's motion :
In case of Rocket, mass of the system does not remain constant, it varies.
In a rocket, during the combustion of fuel, gas is ejects from nozzel, which applies force on a
rocket according to Newton's third law.
38
Thrust acting on a rocket at any moment,
F = v dm mg where v = velocity of a gas with respect to rocket.
dt
dm = Rate of change of mass of rocket due to combustion of fuel.

dt
by neglecting the effect of acceleration due to gravity, F = v dm

dt
Speed of rocket at time t is Where m0 is a mass of rocket at t = 0

§m ·
vR = v ln ¨ 0 ¸ gt m is a mass of rocket at time t
© m ¹
by neglecting the effect of acceleration due to gravity,

§m ·
vR = v ln ¨ 0 ¸
© m ¹
Burnt out Speed (vb) Ñ When all the fuel of rocket combusted (burnt), the final speed attains by
rocket, is called burnt out Speed (vb).
m0
vb = v ln ma Where ma = mass of frame of rocket without Fuel.
(8) A block of mass 1500 g is moving with speed of 30 ms1. 12 N Force is acting in the direction of
motion and 5 N force is acting in the perpendicular direction for 3 s. The speed of a block after
3 s is ...... ms1.
(A) 56 (B) 0.56 (C) 0.056 (D) 560
(9) A substance of mass 5 kg is moving in Y direction, Force F = kt2 is acting in the direction of
motion. Where k = 15 s2. The distance travelled by substance in first two sec is ...... m and
speed after two sec is ...... ms1.
(A) 3, 6 (B) 6, 3 (C) 8, 4 p (D) 4, 8
(10) The graph of momentum à time is as shown in figure, for
a substance. The ratio of force acting on it at t = 3 s and 20
during the first three sec is ......
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 3 : 2
(C) 2 : 3 (D) 1 : 2 0 1 2 3 t
(11) A block of mass 60 g tied with the help of string of mass 30 g and length 30 cm as shown in
Figure. If force acting at point P is 1800 dyne, then tension produced at a distance of 10 cm
form point P is ...... N.
60 g P
(A) 1600 (B) 16 (C) 0.16 (D) 0.016
39
(12) A body of mass 30 kg is moving with velocity 20 ms1 in north direction, making an angle of 30°
with east, the force of 150 N is acting on it in south direction. Find the magnitude and direction
of velocily after 5 s.
(A) 45 ms1, at an angle of tan1 with east

5
3
(B) 45 ms1, at an angle of 60° with west toward north

(C) 22.9 ms1, angle of 41° with South.
(D) 22.9 ms1, at an angle of 41° with east towords north.
(13)
5 kg
90° kg 45
°
5
(a) (b)
As shown in Figure (a) block of mass 5 kg is hanged to spring balance on a stand attached to a
two perpendicular wooden slabs. When an angle decreases to half of initial as shown in
figure (b) change in the observation of spring balance is ......
(A) 50 N (B) Zero (C) 25 N (D) 14.65 N
(14) A body of mass 10 g is moving in one dimension, its momentum changes according to time as
relation p = a + bt2 where a = 3 Ns1 and b = 2 Ns2. Find the instanteneous force at t = 3 s and
average force in t = 3 s ?
(A) 0, 12 N (B) 6 N, 12 N (C) 12 N, 6 N (D) 0, 6 N
(15) A child releases freely a ball of 150 g from the 20 m high tower, other child standing on the earth
hits it with a bat. Hence this ball, reach again to first child, If the contact between bat and ball is
0.1 s, then the force acting on a bat by ball is ......
(A) Zero (B) 20 N (C) 30 N (D) 60 N
(16) The graph of force acting on a body versus time is given as F
shown in Figure. If mass and initial velocity of a body is 1 kg 30
25
and 30 ms1 respectively. What is the velocity of a body at t = 4 s. 20
15
(A) 70 (B) 30
10
(C) 40 (D) 100 5
0 1 2 3 4 5 t
Ans. : 8 (A), 9 (D), 10 (B), 11 (D), 12 (C), 13 (D), 14 (C), 15 (D), 16 (D)
Impulsive force :
When a force acting on a substance for very small duration then it is called impulsive force.
This force changes with time.
It changes in a small duration, so difficult to measure. In such a case we measure total effect
during the whole period, so it is called impulse or impulse of force.
40
o
'P
F =

't

\ F . Dt = D p

Where F . Dt = impulse of force which is equal to change of momentum.

Area enclosed by graph of F ® t Shows impulse of force.

Newtons third law :
Action and Reaction are always equal and mutually in opposite direction.
According to Newtons third law,
(i) Forces always produced in pair.
(ii) In a pair any one is considered as action and other as reaction.
(iii) Action and reaction are equal and in opposite direction but they are acting on a different
body so their resultant force is not zero.
(iv) Action and reaction produced at the same instant.
(v) When we are discussing motion of some substance, we have to consider the force acting
on it by others, not acting on others by it.
(17) A ball of mass 100 g collides with a vertical wall at an angle of 45° reflects perpendicularly with
its original direction of motion. In this collision ball losses 50 % of its velocity, the change in
momentum of ball is ...... Ns. Initial velocity of ball is 20 ms1.
(A) 5 (B) Zero (C) 5 (D) 3
(18) A substance is moving with a velocity of 16 ms1 under the influence of resistive force. After
4 s its velocity becomes 4 ms1. If the mass of substance is 2 kg the average resistive force
acting on it is ......N.
(A) 12 (B) 8 (C) 6 (D) 4
(19) A Swimmer of mass 60 kg jumps from height of 5 m in swimming pool. When it comes in
contact with the surface of water, its velocity becomes zero in 0.4 s. The average resistive force
is ...... N.
(A) 1000 (B) 1500 (C) 2000 (D) 2500
(20) A passenger in a airport applies force of 50 N at an angle of 60° with the horizontal on a
trollybag of mass 40 kg. If the surface of airport is frictionless find the acceleration of trollybag.
(A) 1.25 ms2 (B) 25 3 ms2 (C) 0.625 ms2 (D) 25 ms2
(21) Force acting on a body is given by F = (1200 4 × 105t) N. After starting the motion to it moves
with constant velocity, how much impulse of force is acting on it ?
(A) Zero (B) 0.9 Ns (C) 1.8 Ns (D) 3.6 Ns
41
(22) A servant of fire-brigade spraying water at the rate of 30 cm3s1 from the pipe of 1 cm
diameter to control the fire. what is the force of reaction acting on him ?
(A) 30 N (B) 3 N (C) 0.3 N (D) 0.03 N
(23) Sand is thrown at the rate of 4 kgs1 on a belt moving horizontal in a automatic machine. How
much force is required so that belt is moving with constant velocity of 5 ms1 ?
(A) 0 (B) 5 N (C) 20 N (D) 100 N
(24) A Rocket arranged vertically having total mass with fuel is 10,000 kg and gas ejected with
1
velocity of 108 × 102 kmh1 from it. If the rate of combustion is 50 kgs what is its initial
acceleration ?
(A) 0 (B) 10 ms2 (C) 15 ms2 (D) 20 ms2
(25) An object is falling with constant rate on a upper part of conveyor belt. The force required to
move it with constant speed of 3 ms1 is equal to the force needed to move a car of mass 50 kg
with an acceleration of 0.3 ms2. Find the rate of falling an object on conveyor belt ?
(A) 5 kg s1 (B) 4 kg s1 (C) 3 kg s1 (D) 2 kg s1
(26) A goods train full of coals moving on a railway track, due to opening of a door of one wagon
coals falling outside with the rate of Dm in time Dt. To maintain the constant velocity of train as
v, how much motion resistive force should be applied ?
(A) Dm 't 'v (B) Dv ''mt 'm

(C) v 't (D) v Dm
(27) Mass of Rocket and its fuel 2000 kg and 18,000 kg respectively. Speed of gas ejected with
respect to surface is 7×103 ms1 and speed of rocket with respect to surface is 6×103 ms1. Find
the maximum speed of rocket ?
(A) 10 kms1 (B) 9.8 kms1 (C) 2.3 kms1 (D) Zero
(28) Fuel of mass 14,000 kg is filled in a rocket of mass 21,000 kg. Combustion rate of 300 kg/s and
velocity of gas with respect to rocket is 1200 ms1, then find the resultant force acting on a
rocket.
(A) 24 ×104 N (B) 12 ×104 N (C) 6 ×104 N (D) 1 ×104 N
(29) Water fills at the rate of 0.3 kgs1 in wagons of goods train moving while raining. The force
acting on goods train by its engine is 30 N, then find the constant speed of goods train ?
(A) 120 ms1 (B) 100 ms1 (C) 60 ms1 (D) 30 ms1
(30) By pulling hairs one can not lift a whole body. why ?
(A) Due to fatigue.
(B) Feeling pain when one pulled hairs.
(C) due to oil hand slips.
(D) Actually while pulling the hair, applied force is internal force, whose resultant is zero.
(31) Newtons third law shows conservation of ......
(A) Force (B) Energy (C) mass (D) momentum
(32) A person of mass 50 kg is standing on a spring balance, now he suddenly jumps from the spring
balance, then observation of spring balance ......
(A) Increases (B) Decreases
(C) First increases then decreases to zero (D) becomes zero
42
(33) A bird of mass 400 g is kept on a spring-balance in a cage. Observation of spring balance is
25 N when bird is stationary, if it is flying in upwards with an acceleration of 2.5 ms2, the
instanteneous observation of spring balance is ...... .
(A) 24 N (B) 25 N (C) 26 N (D) 27 N
(34) What is the angle between the force of action on a bench by physics textbook kept on it and
force of reaction on a textbook by bench ?
(A) 0° (B) 90° (C) 180° (D) 360°
(35) Equal force of 8 N is acting on both the ends of a massless spring as shown in the figure, the
force of tension acting at any point on the spring is ......
8N 8N
(A) 4 N (B) 8 N (C) 12 N (D) 16 N
(36) When bullet fires from a gun, gun moves in backward direction. It supports Newlons which law
of motion ?
(A) First (B) Second
(C) Third (D) It is not related to Newtons laws.
(37) A carpenter is fitting a nail of mass 20 mg and length 6 cm on a wall with the help of 2 kg
hammer. While collides with nail speed of hammer is 8 ms1, nail enters half a way in the wall in
three equal strokes of hammer. Find the impulse of force on a nail in each stroke ?
(A) 16 Ns (B) 16 × 106 Ns (C) 16 × 103 Ns (D) 160 Ns
Ans. : 17 (A), 18 (C), 19 (B), 20 (C), 21 (C), 22 (D), 23 (C), 24 (C), 25 (A), 26 (C), 27 (C),
28 (D), 29 (B), 30 (D), 31 (D), 32 (C), 33 (C), 34 (C), 35 (B), 36 (C), 37 (A)
Momentum :
Product of mass (m) and velocity ( v ) is called momentum ( p ). p = m v

Momentum gives more information than velocity.

SI unit : kgms1 or Ns
Dimensional formula : M1L1T1

Relation of momentum with other physical quantity : kinetic energy K = = 12 p ¹ v
p2

2m
De-broglie wave length l = p , Where h = planks constant = 6.625 × 1034 Js

h

Law of Conservation of momentum :
Total momentum of isolated system remains constant.
If the resultant external force acting on a system F = 0 then,

(i) Total momentum of system p = Constant
(ii) Momentum of the system can individually change, but their vector addition (total momentum)
remains constant.
(iii) Resultant acceleration of the system a = 0

(iv) velocity of the system v = constant

(v) path of motion of a body does not change.

Law of conservation of momentum is fundamental and universal.
43
(38) A player of circus keeping a disc of mass 6 kg in horizontally static condition in air by firing
bullets of mass 30 g from gun. If he is firing 40 bullets per sec, the velocity of bullet when it
reach to the disc is ...... ms1.
(A) 0.18 (B) 50 (C) 1.8 (D) 5
(39) If the velocity of a body increases by 100 %, what is the percentage change in momentum ?
(A) 100 % (B) 200 % (C) 300 % (D) 400 %
(40) A steady substance of mass 9 kg divides into three fragments of equal masses. When it explodes,
velocities of two fragments are 3 i cms1 and 4 j cms1 respectively. If time interval of
explosion is 3×102 s, the velocity of the third fragment is ......
(A) 400 i + 300 j (B) 300 i + 400 j (C) 0.04 i + 0.03 j (D) 0.03 i + 0.04 j
(41) For a substance having constant momentum, probably which physical quantity remains constant ?
(A) Force (B) Velocity (C) Acceleration (D) All the above
(42) A person having rifle is standing on a stationary raft in a lake. Mass of the system (person + rifle
+ raft) is 100 kg. A person is 3 m away from the bank, can fire a bullet of mass 100 g with
velocity 10 ms1 from his rifle. If he having 100 bullet, what should he do to reach on a bank ?
(There is no friction acting between raft and water and person should not allow to steer or to take
help of any external force).
(A) bullets should be fired in the opposite direction of a bank.
d(m)
(B) bullets should be fired in the direction of a bank.
(C) bullets should be fired in the upward direction.
(D) A person can not reach to a bank, though he fired all the bullets. 4
(43) A substance of mass 12 kg is moving with constant 3
acceleration.The graph of distance versus time for it is as 2
shown in figure, then its momentum is ...... Ns. 1
(A) 48 (B) 24 0 t(s)
1 2 3 4
(C) 16 (D) 6
(44) A person is standing on a stationary raft of mass 60 kg in a lake, the mass of a person is 80 kg. If
person is moving in opposite direction of a bank with a velocity of 7 ms1 with respect to raft, After
2 sec, find the distance of a person from a bank ? Initially a person is 20 m away from bank,.
(A) 14 m (B) 17 m (C) 23 m (D) 26 m
(45) A bomb suddenly explodes into three fragments from static condition. The ratio of masses are
1:2:3 and velocities of first two fragments are 9 i ms1 and 6 j ms1 respectively, the velocity of
third fragment is ...... ms1 ?
(A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 8 (D) 12
Ans : 38 (B), 39 (A), 40 (D), 41 (B), 42 (A), 43 (C), 44 (D), 45 (B)
Equillibrium of concurrent forces
The line of action of concurrent forces passes through a single point.
When they are in equillibrium,
SF =0

\ S Fx = 0 ; S Fy = 0 ; S Fz = 0
44
o o o o
When two Forces are in equillibrium, F 1 + F 2 = 0 Þ F 1 = F 2
o o o
When three forces are in equillibrium, F 1 + F 2 + F 3 = 0
o o o
\ F1 + F 2 = F 3
When three vectors of forces are arranged head to tail as shown in figure
and formed regular triangle, then the relation is obtained as below :
F1 F2 F3
sin D = sin E
= sin J
o o o
(46) Three forces F 1 , F 2 and F 3 are in equillibrium. Which figure represent this situation ?
o
(A) (B)
o F3
o F1
F1
o
F3
o
o
F2 F2
o
o
(C) (D)
F1 F1
o
F3
o o
F3 F2
o
F2
(47) Resultant of two forces 3F and 2F is R. If first force doubles, resultant force doubles, then find
the angle between these two forces.
(A) 180° (B) 120° (C) 90° (D) 60°
(48) A substance of mass 5 3 kg is hanged with the help of 3m long string. If horizontal force of
50 N is applied to the mid point of string, then what is angle made by upper part of the string
with vertical direction in equillibrium position ?
(A) 30° (B) 45° (C) 60° (D) 90°
(49) Wooden block is kept on the slope of an angle q and given acceleration a. If block does not
slide on the slope then what is the value of a ? (The length and height of slope are 4m and 1m
respectively.) (g = 10 ms2)
(A) Zero (B) 4 ms2 (C) 20

ms2 (D) 5 ms2
3 4
Ans. : 46 (A), 47 (B), 48 (A), 49 (C)
45
Friction
When two bodies are in contact with each other, horizontal component to the surface of contact force
(R) is called frictional force or friction (f).
\ R= f 2 N 2 Where N = Normal force

Friction
¯
Is
No there any Yes
relative motion
between body
and surface ? Body
Sliding Rolling
is sliding or
Rolling ?
Kinetic friction
Static friction or sliding friction Rolling friction
¯ ¯ ¯
Static friction characteristics : Kinetic friction characteristics : Rolling friction characteristics :
(1) It is self-ad-justing force. (1) It opposes the relative (1) It is less than static and
As external force increases, motion of contact surface. kinetic friction.
it increases. (2) It does not depend on the
(2) It opposes the impending speed of a body.
motion (3) fk < fs (max)
¯ ¯ ¯
Value : Value : Value :
0 £ f £ msN fk = mkN fr = P r N
mk < ms mr = co-efficient of
¯ ¯ mk = co-efficient Rolling friction
Fext > (fs)max Fext £ (fs)max of kinetic friction
(fs)max = msN \ f = Fext
R f
ms = co-efficient of static friction
N
Angle of friction (q) Ñ a
The angle between contact force and Normal force
is called Angle of friction (a).
Work done against ffrictional force :
(1) Work done for a motion on horizontal plane :
W = m mg×d
q
(2) Work done to apply motion to a body in upward direction
on a slope of an angle q is : W = mg (sin q + m cos q ).d
(3) A substance sliding downward from the slope of an angle q, work done in this case :
W = mg (sin q m cos q ).d
46
(50) An explosive substance is kept between two blocks of 8 kg and 12 kg. When it suddenly
explodes, substance of mass 8 kg travels a distance of 9 m and become stationary.What is the
distance travellad by substance of mass 12 kg. Frictional force acting on both bodies are equal.
(A) 9 m (B) 6 m (C) 5 m (D) 4 m
(51) As shown in figure, force F is acting on a block of weight W. If the co-efficient of friction
between block and surface is ms, find the minimum value of F, so that block comes in to motion.
G
F
Ps W Ps W cos T Ps W cos T Ps W
(A) sin T P cos T (B) sin T cos T (C) cos T P sin T (D) cos T P sin T
s s s
(52) As shown in figure a box is kept on a table, connecting with block B.

Send is falling in the box at the rate of 200 gs1 and box is moving
with constant velocity of 2 ms1. Co-efficient of friction between box
and surface of table is 0.2 and mass of block B is 10 kg. After how A
much time box become stationary ? Mass of box is 5 kg.
(A) 100 s (B) 200 s B
(C) 225 s (D) 450 s
(53) Three blocks are arranged as shown in figure, block A and C are
tied with wall. Static friction between A and B is 0.25 and between A
F
B and C is 0.4. Find the minimum value of required force so that
block B performs horizontal motion. B 60°
(A) 37 N (B) 18.5 N [mA = 2 kg, mB = 1 kg
(C) 34 N (D) 10 N g = 10 ms2] C
(54) A block of mass 8 kg is kept on a horizontal surface. Static friction between block and surface is
0.25. When external force acting on a block are 5 N and 25 N, static friction are f1 and f2
respectively then f1 × f2 = ...... N2
(A) 4 (B) 0.25 (C) 100 (D) 20
(55) A player to play gymnasts pole moving with constant speed on a pole. The mass of player is
60 kg and co-efficient of friction is 0.2 between his palm and pole.What would be the horizontal
force acting on pole by him ? (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 600 N (B) 1800 N (C) 2400 N (D) 3000 N
(56) Force of 13.2 N is acting on a stationary block of mass 6 kg kept on a horizontal surface, block
travels a distance of 2 km and attains velocity of 64 ms1. Co-efficient of kinetic friction between
block and surface is ......
(A) 0.4 (B) 0.5 (C) 0.1176 (D) 0.7
47
(57) A car of mass 2000 kg is moving with constant speed 20 ms1. When break applies it becomes
stationary. If the frictional force between tyre of car and surface of the road is 8000 N, how
much distance is travelled by a car ?
(A) 50 m (B) 100 m (C) 150 m (D) 200 m
(58) Escalator-belt is moving with constant speed of 2 ms1. A passenger keeps his bag on it,
co-efficient of friction between bag and belt of escalator is 0.5. Find the distance travelled by bag
with respect to belt before it becomes steady on the belt. (g = 10 ms2)
(A) Zero (B) 1.2 m (C) 0.6 m (D) 0.4 m
(59) The time taken by block to sliding downward from the smooth surface of an angle 45° is n
times the time taken by block kept on same type of rough surface. Then what is the co-efficient
of frication between block and surface ?
§ ·2 § ·2
1 1
(A) 1 12 (B) 1 (C) ¨1 12 ¸ (D) ¨¨ 1 2 ¸

¸
n 1 n2 © n ¹ © 1 n ¹
(60) The ratio of required force for a block kept on a inclined track of inclination q, for the upward
motion and for the downward motion is 2. If the co-efficient of friction is 0.3, find the value of
an angle q ?
(A) tan1 (2) (B) tan1 (0.9) (C) tan1 (0.3) (D) tan1 (6)
(61) The force required to placed a substance of mass 102 kg in steady position on a plane making an
angle of 30° with the horizontal is 750 N. If the co-efficient of static friction and kinetic friction of
the surface are 0.4 and 0.3 respectively. Find the magnitude of frictional force ?
(A) 750 N (B) 500 N (C) 250 N (D) 0
(62) The length of friction less surface is 3 m and it is making an angle of 30° with the horizontal. A
body is moving on this inclined track from stationary position and reached at the bottom, after
that it is moving on a frictionless surface in horizontal direction. Co-efficient of friction of surface
is 0.25, then how much distance is travelled by body before it come to rest ?
(A) 8 m (B) 6 m (C) 4 m (D) 2 m
Ans. : 50 (D), 51 (D), 52 (C), 53 (C), 54 (C), 55 (D), 56 (C), 57 (A), 58 (D), 59 (A), 60 (B),
61 (C), 62 (B)
Dynamics of Uniform Circular motion :
Maximum safe speed on a path having inclination q, radius r, and co-efficient of friction ms is :
§ P tan T ·
vmax = rg ¨ s ¸
© 1 P s tan T ¹
Case - I : If path is horizontal, q = 0 vmax = rg P s
Case - II : In the absence of friction (when plane is taking turn in the air, by neglecting air
resistance)
\ Optimum speed v0 = rg tan T (\ ms = 0)
Case - III : When it is required to stop the vehicle on inclined track then, tan q £ ms
48
To obtain the maximum safe speed on horizontal road, vehicle should be inclined at an angle q
with vertical.
§ v2 ·
q = tan1 ¨ rg ¸
© ¹
For the coin kept on a horizontal disc and should not be thrown outside to it :
(remains on the verge of the disc) C
Ps g
r£ Where, r = Distance of the coin from the center.
Z2
w = angular speed of the disc.
For circular motion in vertical Direction :
Velocity of body at any point on the path of motion is, D B
q
v= v0 2 – 2 gh = v0 2 – 2 gl (1– cos T)
l
Where, h = height of the object from horizontal
l = length of the string
q = angle made by string with the downward. A
Velocity of body and Tension produced in the string T at different points on the path of motion.
Point Velocity Tension (T) minimum velocity Tmax Kinetic energy

required to start
the motion
A v0 + mg 6 mg mgl
mv02 5
5gl 2
l
v02 – 2 gl 2
1
B 2 mg 3 mg mgl
mv0 2 3
3gl 2
l
v02 – 4 gl 2
1
C 5mg 0 mgl
mv02 1
gl 2
l

1
D 2mg 3 mg mgl
mv02 3
v02 – 2 gl 2 3gl 2
l
Relation between angular velocity and linear velocity : v = rw
1 rotation = 2p radian
2S S rad
1 rotation/minute = =
60 30 s
(63) A cyclist is moving with speed of 10 ms1 on a circular path, centripetal force is acting on it is
20 N. If he doubles the speed, the required centripetal force is ...... N.
(A) 20 N (B) 40 N (C) 60 N (D) 80 N
(64) Two substances of mass m1 and m2 are moving on a circular path of equal radii. If these
substances complete 5 rotation and 10 rotation in 2 s respectively, the ratio of centripetal
force =
F1
......
F2
(A) m (B) 2 m (C) 4 m (D) 8m

m1 m1 m1 m1
2 2 2 2
49
(65) Radius of horizontal circular path is 3 m. A cyclist completes 30 rounds in 6 minutes on this path,
What would be the centripetal acceleration ? (p2 = 10.)
(A) 6 ms2 (B) 6 ms2 (C) 5 ms2 (D) 9 ms2

5
(66) Centre of horizonted circular track is origin. At a point on a circumference whose co-ordinate is
x = 4 m and velocity of a particle at that point is 10 j ms1. Find the acceleration of a particle at
a point, whose y - cordinate is 4 m.
(A) 25 i ms2 (B) 10 i ms2 (C) 25 j ms2 (D) 10 j ms2
(67) A particle is rotating on a circular path with velocity 0.2 ms1 in a cone shaped cap kept on the
surface. Height of cap is 10 cm and its edged portion is in upper side. What is the height of
particle from the surface ?
(A) 0 cm (B) 9.6 cm (C) 4 cm (D) 10 cm
(68) A body of mass m is moving with speed v on a circular tath of r radius then ......
(A) Magnitude of force changes, but acceleration remains constant. P
(B) Magnitude of force is constant, but acceleration changes.
(C) Magnitude of force and acceleration both changes.
1m
(D) Magnitude of force and acceleration both remains constant.
(69) A particle of mass 10g is moving from point P to point Q on a
semi - circle path as shown in Figure .
Find the centripetal force on it at point Q Q
(A) 10 N (B) 0.4 N (C) 6 N (D) 0.2 N

(70) A substance of mass m is moving on a circular path of radius r with momentum p, then
centripetal force acting on it is ...... .
pr p2 p2m
(A) pv (B) (C) (D)
m mr r
O A B C
(71) ¬r® ¬r® ¬r®
As shown in Figure, mass of 5 kg, 10 kg and 15 kg are tied to the points A, B and C
respectively. If it is moved circularly from point 0, what is the ratio of centripetal force acting
on a body at A, B and C ?
(A) 1 : 1 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 : 3 (C) 1 : 4 : 9 (D) 1 : 5 : 8
(72) A substance A freely falls from 20 m high tower, at the same instant another substance B is
moving on a circular path of radius 7 m. When B completes 10 rotations, A falls on the surface,
what is centripatal acceleration of a substance B ?
(A) 5 × 103 ms2 (B) 7 × 103 ms2 (C) 9 × 103 ms2 (D) 11 × 103 ms2
50
(73) A motor cyclist is moving with a speed of 36 kmh1 on a horizontal road, takes a turn on curved
path of 20 m radius, the speed decreased by him, so that he does not thrown out from the road
is ...... ? ( m = 0.18)
(A) 6 ms1 (B) 4 ms1 (C) 10 ms1 (D) 8 ms1
(74) A cyclist takes a turn with speed 6 ms1 on a horizontal, frictionless circular path of radius 9 m.
For safety of himself he should alligned the cycle at angle of ...... with vertical ?
(A) tan1 (2) (B) tan1 25 (C) tan1 52 (D) tan1 (6)
(75) A body of mass 100 g is tied at the end of 4 m long string and revolves with 5 revolution /
minute. What is the Tension produced in the string ? (p2 = 10)
25S
(A) 9 N (B) 19 N (C) 4
N (D) Zero
(76) A car of mass 1200 kg is moving on a circular path of radius 30 m. A car attains maximum safe
speed v1 when co-efficient of friction is 0.5. If this car moves on a inclined track with an angle
of inclination 45° having same radius and same co-efficient of friction, its maximum safe speed is
v2, then v = ...... .

v1
2
(A) 1 : 6 (B) 6 :1 (C) 5 :1 (D) 1 : 5

(77) A car of mass 500 kg is moving on a inclined curved surface of an angle 30° and co-efficient of
friction 0.4 with maximum safe speed 6.93 ms1. What would be the optimum speed v0 of this
car ?
(A) 2.66 ms1 (B) 6.93 ms1 (C) 1.77 ms1 (D) 8.3 ms1
(78) A car of 2000 kg mass is moving on a circular path of radius 270 m and inclination 16.7° is
taking turn. What is maximum safe speed of car, if the co - efficient of friction between tyre of
car and surface of the road is 0.5. (tan 16.7° = 0.3).
(A) 30 ms1 (B) 40 ms1 (C) 50 ms1 (D) 60 ms1
(79) A cyclist completes one revolution in 3.14 sec, on a circular path of circumference 62.8 m. The
cycle should be alligned at an angle of ...... with upward direction, by cyclist.
(A) tan1 (1) (B) tan1 (2) (C) tan1 (3) (D) tan1 (4)
(80) A particle performing uniform circular motion in a circular path of radius r in XY plane, whose
centre is at origin. Co-ordinates of particle at time t is p (r, q), where q = Angle with X-axis

then acceleration a of a particle is given by ......
G
(A) v i v j (B) – v sin T i v cos T j

2 2 2 2
r r r r
(C) – v cos T i v sin T j (D) – v cos T i – v sin T j

2 2 2 2
r r r r
51
(81) A student tied a stone of mass 200 g at the end of thread and rotates it circularly in vertical
plane. The ratio of minimum velocity of this stone at uppermost point and lowermost point of this
circular path is ...... .
(A) 1 : 5 (B) 5 : 1 (C) 1 : 3 (D) 3 :1
(82) A bucket filled with water and tied with thread revolves on a part of redius 4 m. If water doesnt fall
down from the uppermost point of the path. What would be periodic time of revolution of a bucket ?
(A) 2 s (B) 4 s (C) 6 s (D) 8 s
(83) An object of mass 3 kg is tied with 2 m long thread and hanged in a plane. An object is given a
velocity in horizontal direction such that thread makes an angle of 60° with the upward direction.
How much tension is produced in the thread at this position ?
(A) 60 N (B) 80 N (C) 100 N (D) 120 N
A B
(84) D 10 N force is acting on a sphere starting from point A to point B
as shown in figure. It moves from B to C and then after
20 m
moving on a circular path of radius r. Finally it stops at point D,
the radius r of circular loop is ...... m. (mass of sphere is 2 kg).
C
(A) 10 (B) 20 (C) 5 (D) 18
(85) P As shown in Figure, a particle (P) sticks on a sphere of
radius 24 m. Now, this sphere rolls in horizontal direction, at
p' how much height a particle P becomes free from the
h' 20°
O surface of a sphere ?
(A) 30 m (B) 40 m
(C) 20 m (D) 10 m
(86) A stone is tied at the end of 2 m long thread and given a motion with uniform velocity in vertical
upward plane, the ratio of minimum and maximum tension produced at that time is 25Ñ3. What is
the velocity of the stone ?
(A) 2 3 ms (B) 2 5 ms (C) 4 3 ms (D) 4 5 ms
1 1 1 1
(87) A particle of mass m falls from point A in a spherical m

A
surface of radius R as shown in figure. Which graph
represents the relation of ratio of centripetal force to normal R
force acting on a particle with q at any point. (q ¹ 0 or p)
(A) X (B) X
q q
X X
(C) (D)
q q
52
mN
N
(88) A parabolic glass is arranged as shown in Figure. Here x2 = 20y
q
and co-efficient of static friction of a glass is 0.5. An insect of

mass m can sticks steady in a glass upto how much height from
the surface of a table ?
4 cm
(A) 5.25 cm (B) 2.5 cm
(C) 1.25 cm (D) 0.625 cm
(89) A rope of mass 4 kg and length 10 m is pulled by a force of 50 N. Find the tension produced in
the rope at a distance 3 m from the point where force is acting ?
(A) 50 N (B) 35 N (C) 15 N (D) 0
(90) Three blocks are hanged with the help of string having negligible mass T1 T1
from a pulley which is massless and frictionless, as shown in the figure
4 kg
Find the tension T1 and T2 produced in the string and T = ......
T1
4 kg
T2
2
(A) 4 (B) 8 2 kg
(C) 3 (D) 32
(91) Three blocks are hanged on a pulley (friction less) with the help of massless
string as shown in the figure. Pulley it self is hanged from rigid support with the
help of string with negligible weight. Find the tension produced in the string and
acceleration of the blocks ? (g = 10 ms2) 7 kg
(A) 1.25 ms2, 12.5 N
(B) 3.75 ms2, 14.6 N 4 kg
(C) 4.25 ms2, 125 N 5 kg
(D) 1.25 ms , 78.75 N
2
(92) What is the acceleration of blocks and tension produced in the string in a
system as shown in the figure.
(A) 2 ms2, 64 N
(B) 2 ms2, 96 N 8 kg
(C) 0.5 ms , 64 N
2
12 kg
(D) 0.5 ms2, 96 N
(93) Two wooden blocks are hanged from pulley with the help of massless
string as shown in the figure. If they releases the block of mass 4 kg
travels a distance of 3 m, in the same time how much distance is
travelled by block of mass 1 kg.
(A) 3 m (B) 6 m 1 kg
(C) 9 m (D) 12 m
4 kg
53
(94) What should be the value of q so that system remains in
equillibrium, given in the figure.
q (A) 60° (B) 45°
(C) 30° (D) 0°
m 2m m
(95) As shown in the figure two labours are pulling a block of

mass m in upward direction by applying same force. If the
velocities of the string in downward direction, which is in the
hand of labours are equal v, what is the velocity of block ?
(A) v cos q (B) 2 v cos q
(C) v sec q (D) 2 v sec q m
(96) 4m ¬Pulley Two block of mass m and 4m are attached with the string and
passes through a pulley as shown in the figure. A block of mass
q m hanging from length l performs oscillations at angle q. What
should the minimum co-efficient of friction between block and
surface so that block of mass 4m does not slide ?
m
2 – cos T 1– cos T 3 – 2 cos T
(A) (B) (C) 2cos T (D)
2
3 2 2 4
(97) A mA = mB = 6 kg in the arrangement given in the figure and string

is massless, co-efficient of friction between B and surface is
B 0.5. What shold be the maximum force applied on a block A, So
F
that it does not slide on a block B ? (g = 10 ms2)
T7
(A) 36.72 N (B) 60 N
(C) 96 N (D) 103.78 N T5 T6
T3
T4
(98) If T7 = 60 N and T3 = 2T1, in the given figure. Find the value of T1. m3
(A) 10 N m4
(B) 120 N
(C) 40 N
(D) 160 N T1
T2
m1
T2
m2
54
(99) What is the ratio of acceleration in block A and B, in a A
5 kg
system as shown in the figure ?
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 5 : 2
(C) 2 : 5 (D) 5 : 8
8 kg B
(100) B
All the pulley and string are massless, surface is
8 kg frictionless arranged in the figure. What is the tension
produced in the string ?
(A) Zero (B) 12 N
A
12 kg (C) 24 N (D) 48 N
(101) All the pulley and string are massless, surface is
friction less and block A sliding downward from
the slope during equillibrium, what is the tension
A
m
produced in the string ?
(A) 23 mg sin q (B) 2 mg sin q
3
B
m
q (C) 12 mg sin q (D) 2 mg sin q
(102) Three blocks of mass 5 kg, 10 kg and 15 kg are tied with weightless string and kept on a
frictionless plane. If a body of mass 15 kg is pulled by force of 90 N then T = ......
T2
1
T2 T1 15 kg
10 kg 90 N
5 kg
(A) 3 (B) 13 (C) 2 (D) 12
(103) Four blocks are in contact with each other as shown in the figure. Relative velocity between m3
and m4 is zero. If the contact force between m1 and m2 is F1 and between m2 and m3 is F2 then
F1 = ...... N, and F2 = ...... N.
m4 = 2 kg
m3 = 3 kg m2 = 2 kg
m1 = 1 kg
80 N
(A) 50, 30 (B) 30, 50 (C) 70, 50 (D) 50, 70
55
(104) As shown in the figure, three blocks of mass m1 = 12 kg, m2 = 24 kg and m3 = 8 kg are in
contact with each other. Some force is applied to a point P, hence system moves with
acceleration 2 ms2 at that time the contact force at R is FR. When some force is applied to
Q system attains velocity of 12 ms1 in 3 s, and contact force at S is Fs. Then F = ......
FR
s
m2
m1
m3
P R S Q
(A) 2 : 3 (B) 4 : 9 (C) 3 : 2 (D) 9 : 4

(105) As shown in the figure pulley is frictionless and string is massless.
What is the acceleration of the system ? m
(A) Zero (B) 8.66 ms 2
m
(C) 5 ms2 (D) 3.66 ms2
30° 60°
(106) Two bodies of masses m1 and m2 are attached

with an identical pulley to a spring balance as
shown in the figure. What is the reading of
spring balance ?
(A) m m g (B) m m g
2m m
1 2 mm
1 2
1 2 1 2
m2 m1
(C) 12 (m1+ m2) g (D) (m1 + m2) g
F
(107) Two blocks are tied with the help of string and given a T1
acceleration of 3 ms2 in upward direction as shown in figure. If the
tension produced in the strings are T1 and T2 then T = ....... 6 kg

T1
2
(A) 3 : 2 (B) 2 : 3
T2
(C) 2 : 1 (D) 1 : 2
12 kg
56
(108) A sphere of mass 2 kg is kept in a cube as shown y
in the figure. A cube is given a motion with velocity
v = (5t i + 2t j ) ms . So that sphere remains stationary

1

with respect to cube. Find the magnitude of resultant force

acting on a cube by a Sphere ?
(A) 29 (B) 89 N
x
(C) 29 N (D) 26 N
(109) A An inclination making an angle of 30° with the
horizontal as shown in the figure. A slot of length
5 m is made in a plane as shown in the figure. A
frictionless cylinder is released in a slot to
°
30 perform motion. How much time is taken by it to
30° travel a distance AO ?
O x
(A) 1 s (B) 2 s (C) 3 s (D) 4 s
Ans. : 63 (D), 64 (C), 65 (A), 66 (C), 67 (B), 68 (B), 69 (B), 70 (C), 71 (C), 72 (B), 73 (B),
74 (C), 75 (B), 76 (A), 77 (C), 78 (B), 79 (D), 80 (D), 81 (A), 82 (B), 83 (A), 84 (D),
85 (B), 86 (D), 87 (C), 88 (A), 89 (B), 90 (C), 91 (D), 92 (B), 93 (A), 94 (B), 95 (C),
96 (D), 97 (B), 98 (A), 99 (C), 100 (D), 101 (C), 102 (B), 103 (C), 104 (B), 105 (D),
106 (D), 107 (A), 108 (D), 109 (B)
Experimental work :
Object : To study the relation between maximum static friction fs(max) and Normal reaction force (N),
and find out the Co-efficient of maximum static friction (ms) between block and horizontal
Surface.
Explaination : Suppose one wants to obtain co-efficient of maximum static friction for surface A kept
on a table in a arrangement as shown in the figure.
Suppose weight of pan = P0
As a weight in a pan increases slowly, block starts motion on a surface. At that time,
Force of the effort = weight of pan (P0) + weight in a pan (P')
\ P = P0 + P' ....... (1) Weight
and Normal reactional force, block ® ® pulley
N = weight of block (W0) + weight in a block (W)
\ N = W0 + W
and co-efficient of friction of the surface ®pan
Force of the effort (P)
m = Normal reactional force (N) = slope of the graph of P ® N
(110) In a experiment of static friction, the graph of force of the effort (P) versus Normal reactional
force (N) making an angle of 30° with the axis of normal reactionaly force. What would be the
co-efficient of friction of the surface ?
(A) 0.26 (B) 0.58 (C) 0.42 (D) 0.37
57
(111) The graph of force of the effort (P) versus normal reactionary force (N) for a experiment of
static friction done by a student for two surfaces A and B is as shown in the figure, then we can
say that,
(A) The work done against frictional force on a body of equal P
mass moves to a equal distance is more for surface A than
B
surface B.
(B) The work done against frictional force on a body of equal
mass moves to a equal distance is less for surface A than A
surface B.
(C) The work done against frictional force on a body of equal
mass moves to a equal distance is equal for both the
surfaces. N
(D) We can not predict about work from the graph.
(112) The readings (observations) taken by a student for two different surface in a Experiment of
static friction is given as below. Weight of pan and block are equal.
Obs. Weight kept for a displacent of body
No. in a wooden weight in pan for minimum weight (gm. wt)
block (W') gm. wt surface A for surface B
1. 150 10 12
2. 200 20 22
3. 250 30 32
4. 300 40 42
5. 350 50 52
(A) mA > mB (B) mA < mB (C) mA = mB (D) mA ³ mB
(113) The experiment done in a laboratatory for the study of co-efficient of static friction. Which graph
of force of the effort (P) versus normal reactionary force (N) is suitable ?
(A) P (B) P
N N
(C) P (D) P
N N
Ans. : 110 (B), 111 (B), 112 (B), 113 (C)

58
(114) Assertion : For a particle performing uniform circular motion, linear momentum constantly changes.
Reason : For a particle performing uniform circular motion, magnitude of velocity remains
constant but direction of velocity constantly changes.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(115) Assertion : The slope of graph of momentum versus velocity shows the mass of a body.
Reason : Kinetic energy of a body, K = 2 m
P2
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d

(116) Assertion : The frame attached with the earth is non-inertial frame of reference.
Reason : The frame of reference moving with acceleration is an example of non - inertial frame
of reference.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(117) Assertion : A body kept in a lift, which is moving with constant speed in downward direction.
Its weight observes less than the original weight.
Reason : According to Galilyo, static position and position of constant speed for a body are equal.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(118) Assertion : A player in cricket pulls his hand in backside while catching, because reaction
decreases on his hand.
Reason : While taking catch, as player pulls his hand in backside, the time of contact increases.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(119) Assertion : Frictional force is acting in the direction of motion by surface on both the wheels of
a cycle, when it is moving.
Reason : When two surfaces are in contact with each other, frictional force produced.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(120) Assertion : Ball - bearing is used between two moving parts of machine.
Reason : Frictional force is decreased by ball - bearing.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(121) Assertion : A cyclist bent his cycle in inner side while moving along the curved path.
Reason : By bending cycle mass of cyclist decreases.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(122) Assertion : Action and reaction are equal and in opposite direction according to Newtons third law.
Reason : Action ³ Reaction
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(123) Assertion : Effective mass of a freely falling body is zero.
Reason : Acceleration produced on a freely falling body by the earth is equal to g.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(124) Assertion : To attract iron nails by magnet, it should be in contact with magnet.
Reason : A substance is moving under the effect of field force. When force is applied, it is not
essential that this force is in contact with external factor.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
Ans. : 114 (A), 115 (B), 116 (A), 117 (D), 118 (A), 119 (D), 120 (A), 121 (C), 122 (C), 123 (C),
124 (D)
59
S F = 100 N
Match the columns :
(125) The arrangement of block and pulley is as shown in the
figure. Consider pulley and block massless and ignore
frictional forces.
R
Column - 1 Column - 2
(i) Tension near P (P) 2.5 ms2
(ii) Tension near R (Q) 50 N
(iii) Acceleration of a block (R) 25 N
of mass 2 kg
P
(iv) Acceleration of a block (S) 3.75 ms2
1 kg Q
of mass 4 kg
3 kg
(A) i ® P ii ® Q iii ® S iv ® P
(B) i ® S ii ® R iii ® Q iv ® R 2 kg
(C) i ® R ii ® Q iii ® P iv ® S
(D) i ® Q ii ® P iii ® R iv ® Q
(126) Match the columns, in the reference of arrangement as shown in the figure. 4 kg
Surface is friction less, and string is tension less.
Column - 1 Column - 2 N
18
(i) Acceleration of block having mass 1 kg (P) 4 SI
g
1k
(ii) Resultant force on a block having mass 2 kg (Q) 25 SI 2k
g
g
(iii) Normal force on a block having mass 3 kg (R) 2 SI N 3k
60 °
30
(iv) Normal reaction force between the (S) 15 3 SI
block having mass 2 kg and 1 kg
(A) i®R ii ® P iii ® S iv ® Q
(B) i®P ii ® R iii ® Q iv ® S
(C) i®R ii ® Q iii ® S iv ® P
(D) i®Q ii ® P iii ® Q iv ® R
Ans. : 125 (C), 126 (A)
Comprehension Type Questions :
A person of mass 60 kg is standing on a spring balance in a lift. Lift is connected with cable
rotar, to control the speed of lift theres an arrangement of break and accelerator in it. In this
conditions, select the proper answer in a questions given below. (g = 10 ms2)
(127) What is the observation of spring balance, when lift is moving with acceleration of 5 ms2 in
upward direction ?
(A) 300 N (B) 200 N (C) 100 N (D) Zero
(128) What is the acceleration experienced by a person when lift is moving in downward direction with
an acceleration 5 ms2.
(A) 5 ms2 (B) 10 ms2 (C) 15 ms2 (D) 20 ms2
(129) What is the observation of spring balance when cable of lift breaks ?
(A) Zero (B) 5 ms2 (C) 10 ms2 (D) 15 ms2
Ans. : 127 (A), 128 (C), 129 (A)

60
4 Work, Energy and Power
Work :
Work = Force × displacement in the direction of force
or
Work = effective component of displacement × force in direction displacement
Work done by Work done by

constant force variable force
Bo o
W = F × d = Fd cos q W= ³ F dr

0 £ q < 90° q = 90° 90°< q £ 180°

W=+ W=0 W=
o o
Area enclosed by graph of Foce ( F ) ® displacement ( r ) = work.
Work :
MKS Unit = joule
CGS Unit = erg
Dimensional formula = M1L2T2
1 joule = 107 erg
(1) A person pull trolly bag with 24 N force and displacement 10 m. If work done in this case is
120 J. Find the angle of trolly bag with vertical direction.
(A) 0° (B) 30° (C) 45° (D) 60°
(2) Two students kept their bag on a table at a height of 1 m. Mass of their bag are equal and time
to kept on a table for student - 1 is three times than student - 2. The ratio of work done by them
is ......
(A) 1:3 (B) 3:1 (C) 9:1 (D) 1:1
(3) A car of mass 2000 kg is moving with speed 108 kmh1, when brake applies suddenly it stops
after travelling a distance of 15 m. Find the work done on a wheel of a car.
(A) 900 KJ (B) 900 KJ (C) 300 KJ (D) 300 KJ
(4) In a cricket ground, player A throws a ball of 150 g in horizontal direction up to 15 m and player
B throws a ball of 300 g in vertical direction up to same distance. Find the ratio of work done on
a ball by gravitational forces in both the cases ?
(A) 1:2 (B) 2:1 (C) 1.1 (D) 0
61
(5) As shown in figure, two blocks of mass m1 and m2 m1
are given motion under the effect of gravitational m2
field. If the ratio of mass are m1 : m2 = 2:3. Find the
ratio of work done.
h
d
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 3
(C) 3 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
(6) Ramesh tied 1 kg stone at the end of 3 m long string and gives circular motion in a horizontal
plane. How much work is done on a stone by string and gravitational force ?
(A) 4 N, 0 N (B) 0 N, 4 N (C) 4 N, 4 N (D) 0 N, 0 N
(7) Two forces are acting on a 10 kg block as

shown in figure, so block attains velocity of
14.66 ms1 after travelling some distance. If
block performs motion only in horizontal direction
100 N
30° and kinetic friction of surface is 0.2. Find the
work done on a block by resultant force during
70 N
this motion.
(A) 96.6 J (B) 48.3 J (C) 73.3 J (D) 35 J

(8) Acceleration of 6 kg mass changes according to distance as a(x) = (9x2 + 6x 3) ms2. What is
the work done when body travels a distance of 3 m ?
(A) 33 J (B) 99 J (C) 198 J (D) 594 J
o o
(9) Force acting on a 2 kg mass in x-y plane changes according to F = {(3x2 + 2x) i + (6y2 + 2) j } N.

Find the work done on this body when it displaces from pt. P (0, 2) to Q (2, 0).
(A) 12 J (B) 8 J (C) +8 J (D) 12 J
(10) 2 0 2 3 4
D 0 A B C
Particle lying at origin 0 performs motion from 0 to A under the influence of force F = kx2 and
work done in this case is W1. When it travels from B to D work done is W2 then W = ...... .
W1
2
(A) 3 : 2 (B) 3 : 1 (C) 19 : 8 (D) 8 : 19
(11) Displacement of a body having mass 2 kg under variable force changes according to
§ 3 ·
S = ¨ 3 + 2 + 5 ¸ m. What is the work done on a body by this force in first two second ?
2
t t
© ¹
(A) 12 J (B) 18 J (C) 24 J (D) 36 J
(12) A chain of 3m length is kept on a table in such a way so that its 1 m part hanging downward
from the edge of table. The whole mass of chain is 9 kg. How much work is done to bring
hanging part completely on a table ?
(A) 270 J (B) 100 J (C) 30 J (D) 15 J
62
(13) A particle performs motion in two dimension under the influence of force F = (3x2 i + 4 j ) N.

What would be the work done to move a particle from point (2, 3) m to (3, 0) m ?
(A) 0 (B) +7 J

F
(C) 12 J (D) +19 J
È Ø È Ø
(14) The graph of Force É ® distance ÉÊ d ÙÚ
Ê F ÙÚ
for a particle moving along X- axis is as shown d
in figure. Find the work done, when particle
travels first 12 m distance.
(A) 26 J (B) 24 J (C) 40 J (D) 8 J
Ans : 1 (B), 2 (D), 3 (B), 4 (D), 5 (B), 6 (D), 7 (C), 8 (D), 9 (B), 10 (D), 11 (D), 12 (D), 13 (B), 14 (B)
Energy
The ability to do work
Kinetic energy Potential energy

The ability to do work due to its motion The ability to do work due to position or
is called kinetic energy configuration is called potential energy
Formula
K = 2 mv2 = = 2 pv Potential energy due Potential energy due to

1 p2 1
2m
W = Dk Þ Work energy theorem to position configuration
Gravitational potential Elastic potential energy

energy : U = mgh in the spring U = 2 kx2
1
h = height from the x = compression of the

reference surface of spring
Total energy the earth k = force constant of
(mechanical energy) : E = U + K the spring
Conservation of mechanical energy :
For isolated system under the effect of conservative force, E = U + K = constant
\ DE = DU + DK = 0
Different form of energy : (1) Mechanical energy (2) Internal energy (3) Heat energy
(4) Electrical energy (5) Chemical energy (6) Nuclear energy.
Energy - mass equivalence :
According to Einstein's theory of relativity, E = Dmc2
Dm = change in mass, E = Energy, c = velocity of light = 3 × 108 ms1
E = energy equivalent to Dm
63
MKS unit of energy = joule
CGS unit of energy = erg
Dimensional formula of energy = M1L2T2
Traditional unit of energy = calorie, 1 calorie, = 4.186 joule
Unit of energy in terms of power = 1 kWh = 3.6 × 106 J = 1 Unit
(15) A ball is thrown with velocity v in vertical direction. At the same time a block having same
mass is projected at an angle of 30°. Find the ratio of their potential energy at the points on
maximum height on their paths of motion.
(A) 1 : 1 (B) 2 : 1 (C) 4 : 1 (D) 8 : 1
(16) Two objects with mass 16 kg and 4 kg is moving with acceleration of 2 ms2 and 8 ms2
respectively from the steady state. After a respective time interval t1 and t2 their kinetic energy
equals to K J. Find the ratio .

t1
t2
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 1 : 2 (C) 1 : 4 (D) 4 : 1

(17) As shown in figure a sphere of simple pendulum
having mass m1 releases from position A, becomes steady 60° 1m
after a collision with a sphere having mass
m2 = 2m1 at mid position of its path of motion. Hence a sphere
of m2 mass attains kinetic energy of 4 J, then m2 = ...... A
m1
(A) 2 kg (B) 3.2 kg
(C) 6 .3 kg (D) 8.2 kg m2
(18) As shown in figure a sphere of mass 1 kg given a

A motion from steady position at point A, which rolls
down to point B. Energy loss of 0.5 J per 12 m
7m B length on the slope. Find the kinetic energy at

point B.
4m
(A) 40 J (B) 19 J
30° 30°
(C) 8 J (D) 0 J
C
(19) A stationary bomb of mass 20 kg suddenly explodes in two fragments in proportion of 1:4. If
kinetic energy of small fragment is 360 J, find the kinetic energy of larger fragment.
(A) 360 J (B) 180 J (C) 90 J (D) 0 J
(20) A body of mass 800 g freely falls from height of 50 m. When this body comes on the surface of
the earth, potential energy completely converts in to kinetic energy. Find the loss of potential
energy of a body.
(A) 0 J (B) 200 J (C) 300 J (D) 400 J
64
(21) An object is moving on a straight path, when its speed increases by 2 ms1, its kinetic energy
doubles. What is the original speed of an object ?
(A) 2 ms1 (B) 2 ± 8 ms1 (C) 8 ms1 (D) 2 ± 2 ms1
(22) 15 J energy is paid by a person to pull an object of mass 3 kg from depth h in empty well. 40 %
energy is wasted due to friction. When this object reach to the edge of well suddenly rope breaks and
object goes to bottom of well. if its velocity at bottom is 3 ms1, find the depth of well.
(A) 6 m (B) 2 m (C) 1 m (D) 0.45 m
(23) Two balls A and B freely falls from the same height. Ratio of their mass are 1:4, when potential
energy of A is three times than potential energy of B. Find the ratio of travelled distance
by them.
(A) 1:12 (B) 12:1 (C) 1:6 (D) 6:1
(24) An object of mass 2 kg freely falls from a height of 60 m collides with the surface of the earth
and reflect upto height 40 m. Loss of energy during this collision is how much part of its original
energy ?
(A) one third (B) Half (C) one fourth (D) one sixth
(25) In diatomic molecule, potential energy between two atoms is given by U(x) = . How
a b
x12 x6
much energy is required to separate these two atom from stable position ?
b2
(A) 2 a (B) b (C) b (D) b
2 2 2
6a 4a 12 a
(26) A rope of length L is tied with balloon. When a person tries to climb in a ballon with the help of
rope, it descends by distance d. If mass of ballon is M, then what is the ratio of change of
potential energy of a person and ballon ?
(A) d m
L M
(B)
L d
d Mm (C) L d m
d
M (D) L d m M
(27) The force required to pull the spring upto 6 cm is 120 N. What is the required work to pull a
spring another 6 cm ?
(A) 5 J (B) 8.4 J (C) 10.8 J (D) 12.4 J
(28) The ratio of stored potential energy of two spring pulled by same force having force constant
600 Nm1 and 1200 Nm1 is a and the ratio of stored potential energy when they pulled to same
length is b then a . b = ...... .
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
(29) A sphere of mass 0.1 kg is moving with velocity of 10 ms1 collides with a spring which is at a
distance 2 m from the initial point, which compresses the spring and becomes steady. Find the
compression of the spring. [Force constant of spring is 6 Nm1 and co-efficient of friction
between sphere and surface is 0.2]
(A) 1 m (B) 2 m (C) 3 m (D) 4 m
(30) When a spring pulled by 2 mm, 36 J energy stored in it. Find the work done to pull a spring
further 2 mm length.
(A) 36 J (B) 72 J (C) 108 J (D) 144 J
65
(31) A spring is arranged vertical, whose end is connected with horizontal surface. A block of mass
m falls on a spring from height h so, spring compresses to distance d. If the force constant
of spring is k, what is the total work done ?
(A) mg (h + d) + 12 kd2 (B) mg (h + d) 12 kd2
(C) mg (h d) 12 kd2 (D) mg (h d) + 12 kd2

(32) A block of mass 2 kg is moving with velocity of 4 ms1 collides with a spring and compresses it.
Find the compression of the spring if friction force is 16 N and force constant of the spring is
10 kNm1.
(A) 8.5 cm (B) 2.5 cm (C) 5.5 cm (D) 11.0 cm
(33) The graph of potential energy ® distance is as shown in figure. Which graph of
Force ® distance is suitable ?
(A) F(x) (B) F(x)
U (x)
P P
x x
(C) F(x) (D) F(x) P
0 P x P
x x
(34) An elastic spring is arranged along the x-axis as shown in figure. The graph of
F ® x is as shown in figure. find the work done to bring end of spring from x = A to x = C.
F(N)
50
40
30
20
10
x(m)
0 1 2 3 4 5
x = 1 x = 0 1 2 3 4 5
A C
(A) 40 J (B) 80 J (C) 120 J (D) 160 J
66
(35) A spring is in its normal condition as shown in
figure. What should be the minimum mass of A
so that B is on the verge to loose a contact with
surface ?
A
(A) M
2
(B) M
(C) 2 M (D) 3 M
B
M
Ans. : 15 (C), 16 (A), 17 (B), 18 (B), 19 (C), 20 (D), 21 (B), 22 (D), 23 (B), 24 (A), 25 (C), 26 (B), 27
(C), 28 (A), 29 (A), 30 (D), 31 (B), 32 (C), 33 (C), 34 (B), 35 (A)
Power :
Time - rate to do work is called power.
'W
<P> = 't (average power)
'W
Instantaneous power P = 't = F . v

Different units of power :

(i) Js1 (ii) watt (W) (iii) horse power (hp), 1 hp @ 746 W
Dimensional of power = M1L2T3
(36) The force F is acting on a car having mass m and moving on a horizontal road in such a way
so that its velocity changes from v2 to v1 when it travelled a distance d. If produced power by
engine of car (P) is constant then v2 = ......

1 1 1 1
(A) Pd v 2 2 (B) Pd v 2 3 (C) 3Pd v 3 2 (D) 3Pd v 3 3
2m 1 2m 1 m 1
m 1
(37) Water is falling on turbine of A. C. generator from 80 m height with the rate of 20 kgs1. 20 %
energy from the total energy is converted into electrical energy then what is the electrical
energy ?
(A) 3.2 kW (B) 2.4 kW (C) 4.2 kW (D) 6.8 kW
(38) Water tank of size 3m × 3m × 1m is kept on a terrace of 10 m high building. How much time is
taken to fill the water in this tank with the help of motor of power 10 kW and efficiency 40 % ?
(A) 6.23 min (B) 3.75 min (C) 4.24 min (D) 8.52 min
(39) What is the power of a body of mass 3 kg projected at an angle of 30° with the horizontal, with
velocity of 40 ms1 ?
(A) 75 W (B) 200 W (C) 300 W (D) 400 W
(40) When a rail of mass 12 × 10 kg pulled by engine, its velocity increases from 3 ms1 to 5 ms1 in
6
two minutes What is the power of engine ?

(A) 200 kW (B) 400 kW (C) 600 kW (D) 800 kW
(41) Vehicle of mass 2000 kg and 3000 kg taken time 8 s and 6 s respectively to travel on a slope.
The rario of their power of engine is ......
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 : 3 (C) 3 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
67
(42) Force acting on a body of mass m is (2 i 3 j + 4 k ) N and displacement in t s is
3t2 i + 4t j + 6t3 k . Power of body at t = 2 s, is ......
(A) 324 W (B) 300 W (C) Zero (D) 200 W
(43) A soldier fires bullets of mass 20 g with speed 360 kmh at the rate of 180 bullet/min. What is
1
power of machine-gun ?
(A) 600 W (B) 400 W (C) 200 W (D) 100 W
(44) Heart of an animal pushes 1 cc blood in 1 sec with pressure of 23,000 Nm2. Find the essential
power.
(A) 0 (B) 0.32 W (C) 0.023 W (D) 0.042 W
(45) An electric motor of 0.5 hp moving with speed of 600 rpm. If the efficiency of motor is 70 %,
what is the work done by motor during one rotation ?
(A) 3.46 J (B) 5.12 J (C) 4.19 J (D) 2.6 J
Ans. : 36 (D), 37 (A), 38 (B), 39 (C), 40 (D), 41 (A), 42 (B), 43 (A), 44 (C), 45 (D)
Collision :
During the collision, if momentum, total energy and kinetic energy is conserved then it is called
elastic collision.
During the collision, If momentum and total energy is conserved but kinetic energy is not
conserved then it is called inelastic collision.
Collision in one dimension
An object of mass m1 is moving with velocity v1 along + x axis and collides with an object of
mass m2 moving with velocity v2 in the same direction.
After collision velocities of mass m1 and m2 are v'1 and v'2 respectively
(1 e) m2 (1 e) m1
v'1 = m m v1 + m m v2 and v'2 = m m v2 + m m v1
m1 – em2 m2 – em1
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Where e = restitution co-efficient = v – v

v '2 – v '1
1 2
For, complete elastic collision, e = 1

Complete inelastic collision, e = 0
and For other cases, 0 < e < 1
For complete elastic collision (e = 1)
v'1 = m m v1 + m m v2 and v'2 = m m v2 + m m v1

m1 – m2 2 m2 m2 – m1 2 m1
\
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Two objects with mass m1 and m2 moving with velocity v1 and v2 respectively suffers perfect
elastic collision. If their velocities after collision are v'1 and v'2 respectively.
v'1 = m m v1 + m m v2 v'2 = m m v2 + m m v1
m1 – m2 2 m2 m2 – m1 2 m1
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
m1 >> m2 v'1 = v1 v'2 = v2 + 2v1

m1 << m2 v'1 = v1 + 2v2 v'2 = v2
m1 = m2 v'1 = v2 v'2 = v1
68
Inelastic collision :
A body of mass m1 is moving with velocity v1 collides with other body of mass m2 moving with
velocity v2. If the collision is total inelastic then combined velocity after collision,
m1v1 m2 v2
v= m1 m2
A body of mass m moving with velocity v collides inelastically with stationary body of mass m then
after collision,
velocity of first body, v'1 = 2 (1 e)

v
-
velocity of second body, v'2 = 2 (1 + e)

v
-
§ m1 m2 ·
Decrease of energy during collision, DK = 12 ¨ m m ¸ (1 e2) (v1 v2)2
© 1 2 ¹
-
- Body falls from height h collides on the surface, height achieved by body after n - collision is,
hn = e2n h
§ 1 e2 ·
- Distance travelled by body before it becomes steady, d = h ¨¨ ¸
¸
© 1– e ¹
2
§ 1 e ·
time taken by body to become stationary, t = ¨ 1– e ¸
2h
© ¹
- g
(46) Three stationary spheres of mass 3 kg, 6 kg and 3 kg are kept on a horizontal frictionless
surface. At t = 0 time sphere A moving with velocity 9 ms1 collides elastically with sphere B.
Then after perfect inelastic collision occurs between B and C. What is the velocity of sphere C
after collision ?
B
A C
(A) 9 ms1 (B) 4 ms1 (C) 1 ms1 (D) Zero

(47) Two spheres of mass m1 and m2 (m2 = 2m1) moving in opposite direction collides with each other.
They become stationary after collision. If velocity of sphere having mass m1 is 12 ms1, then
what is the velocity of a sphere having mass m2 ?
(A) 12 ms1 (B) 9 ms1 (C) 6 ms1 (D) 3 ms1
(48) A bomb projected at an angle of 60° with velocity of 200 ms1 explodes in to three equal fragments,
at maximum height. First fragment is moving with a speed of 100 ms1 in vertical upword direction,
second fragment moving with the same speed in downward direction. If the total mass of bomb is
3 kg, find the kinetic energy of the third fragment.
(A) 300 J (B) 15 kJ (C) 30 kJ (D) 45 kJ
(49) Nucleus of 92U238 is moving with a speed v, emits a - particle which is moving with speed 3v
in the same direction. What is the velocity of remaining nucleus ?
(A) 238 (B) 117 v (C) 117 v (D) Zero

4v 113 119
69
(50) A sphere of mass 8 kg moving in east direction with velocity 8 ms1 collides with strong and a big
wall. Calculate the velocity and kinetic energy of a sphere after collision. Consider collision as a
perfect elastic.
(A) 8 ms1, 256 J (B) 4 ms1, 128 J (C) 0, 256 J (D) 0, 256 J
(51) Two block P and Q having same mass m is moving with velocities 3 ms1 and 5 ms1
respectively on a frictionless horizontal surface collides elastically. What is the ratio of their
momentum after collision ?
(A) 3 : 5 (B) 5 : 3 (C) 9 : 25 (D) 25 : 9
(52) Ramesh throws a ball from 16.8 m high tower in downward direction, after collision with surface
it reflects back upto 4.2 m height. Find the percentage decrement in a velocity of ball.
(A) 100 % (B) 75 % (C) 50 % (D) 25 %
(53) A bomb explodes in two fragments of equal mass after release from a helicopter which is steady
at a certain height, one of the fragment attains horizontal velocity of 15 ms1. After how much
time the vectors connected two fragment with initial point becomes perpendicular ? (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 15 s (B) 9 s (C) 6 s (D) 3 s
(54) A ball freely falls from 30 m height. If elastic co-efficient during collision is e, then upto how
much hight ball would be reflect after second collision ?
(A) 15 e m (B) 60 e m (C) 30 e m (D) 30 e4 m
(55) An object with mass m thrown in upward direction with a velocity 200 ms1 After 4 sec object
divides into two fragments having ratio of mass 1:3. If smaller fragment is moving with a
velocity 400 ms1 in upward direction. Find the velocity of larger fragment.
(A) 200 ms1 (B) 100 ms1 (C) 80 ms1 (D) 0
(56) A ball thrown in downward direction from a height 15 m, collides with the surface and losses
50 % energy, reflects back to height of 10 m, then what is its initial speed ?
(A) 5 ms1 (B) 10 ms1 (C) 80 ms1 (D) 00 ms1
(57) An object falls from height h on the horizontal surface, suffers frequent collision and frequent
reflection. If co-efficient of restitution is e, then find the travelled distance by object before it
becomes steady.
§ 1 e2 · § 1– e2 · § 1– e2 · § 1 e2 ·
(A) h ¨¨ 2¸
¸ (B) h ¨¨ ¸
2¸ (C) 2 ¨¨ ¸
2¸ (D) 2 ¨¨ ¸
2¸
h h
© 1– e ¹ © 1 e ¹ © 1 e ¹ © 1– e ¹
(58) A body of mass 4 kg, moving with velocity 12 ms1 collides with a body of mass 6 kg and stick
to it. Find the decrease in its kinetic energy.
(A) Zero (B) 288 J (C) 172.8 J (D) 144 J
Ans. : 46 (B), 47 (C), 48 (D), 49 (B), 50 (A), 51 (B), 52 (C), 53 (D), 54 (D), 55 (C), 56 (D), 57 (A), 58 (C)
70
(59) Assertion : For a body only mass or only energy should not be conserved but mass - energy
combinely conserved.
Reason : According to Einsteins equation E = Dmc2
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(60) Assertion : When momentum of lighter and heavy body are same, their kinetic energies are
always equal.
Reason : Kinetic energy does not depend on mass of body.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(61) Assertion : Roads on the mountain are curved instead of Straight.
Reason : Slope on the mountains are more so possibility of sliding vehicle is more.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(62) Assertion : If a spring is extended or compressed for equal length, equal potential energy is
stored in both the cases.
Reason : Potential energy of the spring is directly proportional to force constant.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(63) Assertion : Power of machine-gun P = nK where n = no. of bullets fired per second and
K = Kinetic energy of bullet.
work done by machine-gun
Reason : Power of machine-gun P = time
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(64) Assertion : Work done by damping force is zero, for a body moving under the effect of damping
force.
Reason : Work depends on an angle between force and displacement.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(65) Assertion : If velocity of a sphere moving in horizontal direction becomes double, its kinetic
energy becomes four times.
Reason : Kinetic energy is directly proportional to square of velocity.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(66) Assertion : The graph of potential energy stored in the spring ® restoring force is straight line.
Reason : Potential energy stored in the spring is given by U = kx2, where x = compression or
1
2
expansion of a spring.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(67) Assertion : During the elastic collision of two body total momentum and total kinetic energy
conserved.
Reason : During the collision, if two body sticks with each other, called elastic collision.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(68) Assertion : The work done to come upto bottom for a body having mass m on the sloped
friction less surface making an angle q and the work done for the same body to move
downward from the same height are always equal.
Reason : In both the cases gravitational forces are equal.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
Ans. : 59 (A), 60 (D), 61 (A), 62 (B), 63 (A), 64 (D), 65 (A), 66 (D), 67 (C), 68 (B)
71
Match the columns :
(69) Match the column - 1 with column - 2 :
Column-1 Column-2
(i) Perfect elastic collision (P) losses some kinetic energy
(ii) Perfect inelastic collision (Q) 0 < e < 1
(iii) Partial elastic collision (R) e = 1
(iv) Partial inelastic collision (S) e = 0
(A) i ® Q ii ® R, Q iii ® P, S iv ® Q, S
(B) i ® R ii ® P, S iii ® R, Q iv ® P, R
(C) i ® P ii ® R, S iii ® P, Q iv ® S, Q
(D) i ® R ii ® S iii ® P, Q iv ® P, Q
(70) Match the columms :
Column-1 Column-2
(i) Kinetic energy of a body never be a negative (P) Kinetic energy increases by 100 %
(ii) For uniform circular motion (Q) Kinetic energy increases
(iii) When a bomb explodes from tank (R) Kinetic energy remains constant
(iv) Momentum of a body increases by 50 % (S) Statement is true.
(A) i®P ii ® R iii ® S iv ® Q
(B) i®S ii ® R iii ® Q iv ® P
(C) i®S ii ® R iii ® P iv ® Q
(D) i®R ii ® Q iii ® P iv ® S
Ans. : 69 (D), 70 (B)
The relation between potential energy, kinetic energy and total energy is given as below :
U = mgh, K = 12 mv2, E = U + K and D E = D U + D K = 0
(71) When a body of mass 2 kg freely falls from a tower, what is its kinetic energy at t = 5 s ?
(A) 5000 J (B) 2500 J (C) 2000 J (D) Zero
(72) What is the momentum of a body at that time in above question ?
(A) 100 NS (B) 2500 NS (C) 300 NS (D) Zero
(73) What is the potential energy at that time in above question if total energy is 5000 J ?
(A) 100 J (B) 2500 J (C) 5000 J (D) Zero
(74) What is the change of total energy of a body at a given time ?
(A) 1000 J (B) 2500 J (C) 5000 J (D) Zero
Ans. : 71 (B), 72 (A), 73 (B), 74 (D)
72
5 Rotational Motion
Centre of mass:
A point at which all the mass of the system can be considered as concentrated.
Centre of mass is defined for study of extended objects as a particle.
The centre of mass should be either inside or outside the body.
It shows the average position of the mass of the component of the object.
In symmetrical bodies the centre of mass coincides with the geometrical centre, while the centre of
mass of irregular shape bodies is towards the heavy mass distribution.
For two particles system
M r cm = m1 r1 + m2 r2

where M = m1 + m2
In component form,
M xcm = m1x1 + m2x2 ; M ycm = m1y1 + m2y2
If centre of mass is at origin then
o o
m1 r1 + m2 r2 = 0
m1
\ r2 r
m2 1
Here the sign of r1 and r2 are opposite. It shows that the mass m1 and m2 are on both the sides of

the centre of mass.
m1 > m2 Þ r1 < r2. It means that the centre of mass towards the heavy mass.
If two particles having same mass then,
o
o o
r1 + r2
r cm =
2
x1 x 2 y1 y 2
\ x cm ; ycm
2 2
For n- particles system,
o
¦ mi ri
n
o
M r cm =
i 1
¦ mi xi ; ¦ mi yi ; Mzcm = ¦
n n n
Mxcm = Mycm = mi zi
i 1 i 1 i 1
For a rigid body,
³ r dm ;Mxcm = ³ x dm ; Mycm = ³ y dm ; Mzcm = ³ z dm

o o
M r cm =
73
(1) Three particles each of mass 3 kg are placed at three corners of an equilateral triangle as shown
in figure. The centre of mass with respect to particle 1 is ...... m.
y (A) ( 0.5, 1.33 ) m
3
(B) ( 1.33, 0.5 ) m
1.5 m (C) ( 12, 4.5 ) m
(D) ( 4.5, 12 ) m
x
1 2m 2
(2) Two particles of mass 50 g and 100 g have positions 3 i + 4 j + 5 k cm and 6 i 2 k + 4 j

cm with respect to origin. The distance of the centre of mass from the origin is ...... .
(A) 15 cm (B) 10 cm (C) 5 cm (D) 15 cm

y
(3) Find the centre of mass with respect to
origin of a E shape having 2 cm 10
thickness and uniform density distribution. cm
(A) ( 2.6, 2.4 ) cm
(B) ( 2.4, 1.6 ) cm 5
(C) ( 2.4, 5 ) cm
(D) ( 1.4, 2.6 ) cm
O 2 4 6 cm x
(4) Find the centre of mass with respect to a particle of 1g mass of four particles parallelogram
shaped system. ( The length of each side is a ).
2g 3g (A) ( 3a , 0.95a)
4
(B) ( 2 , 4 )
a 3a
a
a
(C) ( 4 , 2 )
3a a
60°
1g 4g
(D) (0.95a, 3a
)
4
(5) A Tshaped object with dimensions shown in the figure,is lying

on a smooth floor. At which point from the surface a force is l
applied so that the object has only the translation motion ?
(Thickness of rod is negligible).
2l
(A) l (B) 23 l
(C) 43 l (D) any where.
74
(6) Y Four bricks each of length L and mass m are
arranged as shown, from the wall. The distance
of the centre of mass of the system from the
L wall is...... .
2
(A) 7 L (B) 8 L
8 7
(C) 12 L (D) 16 L
L 11 15
X
2
L L
L y
4 2
(7) A circular plate of uniform thickness has a diameter of 60
cm. A circular portion of radius 20 cm is removed from O' x
O
one edge of the plate. Then the centre of mass of the
remaining portion with respect to origin is ...... cm
(A) ( 0, 4 ) (B) ( 8, 0) (C) ( 0, 8 ) (D) ( 8, 0)
(8) The particles of 10 g, 20 g, 30 g and 40 g are placed at 2, 6, 8 and 11 hour sysmbols respectively of a
weightless dial of clock having radius 8 cm. Find the co - ordinates of centre of mass of this system.
y (A) ( 1.84, 0.136 ) cm
m4
m1 (B) ( 1.36, 0.184 ) cm
60° 30°
x (C) ( 1.36, 0.184 ) cm
m3 (D) ( 1.49, 0.184 ) cm
m2
(9) Mass density of a rod of length L changes with respect to distance x from one end is according to
equation l = b x, where b = constant. Then the distance of centre of mass from x = 0 is ...... .
(A) L2 (B) L3 (C) 23L (D) 2
3L
(10) The centre of mass of a half portion of a thin ring of mass 2M and
radius R having uniform mass density with respect to its centre is ...... . y
(A) 2SR (B) R

2S
R
S
(C) R (D) R
S x
(11) The centre of mass of cone with a uniform mass density with radius R and height h with respect to its
top is ...... .
(A) 43 h (B) 23 h (C) 4 h (D) 13 h
3
(12) Two spheres of mass M and 4M having radius R and 3R respectively. The distance between
their centres is 10 R. If they are move due to gravitational force then before collision the
distance travelled by the bigger sphere is ...... .
(A) 2 R (B) 8 R (C) 4.8 R y (D) 1.2 R
(13) Locate the centre of mass of a right angle
triangle of uniform mass density.
§x y· §x y· y
(A) ¨ 2 , 2 ¸ (B) ¨ 3 , 3 ¸
© ¹ © ¹
§x y· §x y· x
(C) ¨ 2 , 3 ¸ (D) ¨ 3 , 2 ¸ x
© ¹ © ¹ O
75
(14) The length of a rod is 2 m. Its linear mass density change by equation l = 3 + x, then the centre
of mass of the rod with respect to x = 0 is ...... .
(A) 12 m (B) 12 m (C) 12 m (D) 1 m

13 15
13
(15) The centre of mass of a half portion of a disc of mass m and radius R having uniform mass
density with respect to its centre is ...... .
(A) 4 (B) 4SR (C) 45SR (D) 43SR

3R
Ans. : 1 (B), 2 (A), 3 (C), 4 (D), 5 (C), 6 (B), 7 (C), 8 (D), 9 (C), 10 (A), 11 (c), 12 (D), 13 (B), 14
(A), 15 (D)
Motion of centre of mass :
o
¦ mi vi
n
M v cm =

i 1
o
¦ mi ai
n o
= = F net = Resultant external force.

M a cm
Linear momentum of the system :
i 1
o
P = M v cm
§o · o
d ¨ v cm ¸
¦
o o n
F ext = dt = M dt = M a cm = mi ai
JG
© ¹
d P
i 1
¦ Fi
n o
o
o i 1
= F ext =
¦ mi
n
a cm
M
i 1
Centre of mass behave like a partical of mass M and move due to external force applied on it.
o
Conservation of linear momentum : Ifõ
o
F ext = 0 then dt = 0
d p

o o
\ M a cm = 0
JG
\ P = constant \ a cm = 0
o o
M d ( v cm ) = 0 \ v cm = constant.
dt
The particles of system having individual change in momentum but the total momentum of system
remains constant.
(16) Two particle of mass 2 kg and 4 kg move on a linear path in opposite direction with velocity
2 ms1 and 3 ms1, then the velocity of centre of mass of system is ...... .
(A) 3 ms1 in the direction of first object (B) 43 ms1 in the direction of first object
8
(C) 43 ms1 in the direction of second object (D) 3 ms1 in the direction of second object
8
76
(17) The distances of two object of masses m1 and m2 from the centre of mass of the system are r1
and r2. Due to their gravitational forces the acceleration produced in the object m2 is ...... .
m1 G m1 G m1 G m1 G
(A) ( r r )2 (B) r 2 (C) ( r – r )2 (D) ( r r )2
1 2 2 1 2 1 2
(18) A gun of mass M put on a friction less horizontal surface. A bullet of mass m is fired from it, the
distance travel by the gun when the distance travelled by the bullet is x ...... .
§ mM · § · § m· § M–m·
(A) ¨ m ¸ x (B) ¨ m M ¸ x (C) ¨ M ¸ x (D) ¨ m ¸ x
m
© ¹ © ¹ © ¹ © ¹
(19) A stone of mass 90 kg tied with a mass less thread of length 10 m and on the other hand a person
of mass 60 kg pull this stone. If the surface is frictionless, at which distance the stone and person
can meet to eachother ?
(A) At 4m distance from the person (B) At 4m distance from the stone
(C) At 5m distance from the person (D) Can not meet
(20) A freely falling object A suddenly breaks into two fragments. The mass of first fragment is 4 M
3
and the other is M4

and they are freely fall. After breaking the centre of mass of object A is ...... .
(A) shifted towards heavy fragment.
(B) shifted towards lighter fragment.
(C) move on original path.
(D) shifted in which direction depands on at what height the fragment are made .
(21) When a object thrown upward it explodes in to two part at a point P of certain height . The mass
of bigger piece is four times more than the smaller piece .When the position of small piece is on
the right side of point P is 12 cm, the position of big piece from point P is ...... .
(A) 3 cm on right side (B) 3 cm on left side (C) 4 cm right side (D) 4 cm on left side
(22) The four forces are applied on a object of 2.6 kg as shown in figure. Find out the magnitude of
accelaration of the centre of mass of object . Y
6N
(A) 2 ms2 (B) 3 ms2 4N
7N 30°
(C) 4 ms2 (D) 3.5 ms2 30
°
X
O
(23) The particles of mass m, 2m, 3m.... nm are placed on a line and 30°
their position from x = 0 is x, 2x, 3x, .... nx, then find out the
2N
position of centre of mass from x = 0.
(2 n 1) (2 n 1) (2 n 1)
(A) (2n + 1)x (B) x (C) x (D) x
2 3 4
(24) What is the displacement of big block (incline ) when small block move and
reach at the bottom of incline ? The mass of big block is 10 times more than the
small block. All the surfaces are friction less.
(A) 0.1 m (B) 0.2 m
(C) 0.01 m (D) 0.02 m 1.1 m
77
(25) A object of mass m moves on X-axis with velocity 5 ms1 collides with a stationary object of
mass double then it. Due to this the big object explodes in to two pieces of same mass and the
small object is comes in to rest . If one piece move on Y-axis with velocity 3 ms1 than the
velocity of second piece is ...... .
(A) 24 ms
1
(B) 4 ms1 (C) 34 ms
1
(D) 2 ms1
(26) A simple pendulum made of a wooden block of mass 500 g .A bullet of

mass 50 g fired from downward side of the block it comes into rest
after entering in to the block. If the displacement of block is 1.1 m M
vertically then the speed of bullet ...... . (g = 10 ms2 ) v
m
(A) 50 2 ms1 (B) 51 2 ms1 (C) 51.6 ms1 (D) 50 ms1
(27) Two square plates of length d and a circular plate of

diameter d place as shown in figure . If the mass distribution
of all three plates are same than the position of the centre of
mass of the system with respect to centre of first plate is
...... .
(A) < d (B) > d (C) = d (D) = 1.5 d

(28) Two spheres of mass 5 kg and 10 kg having same radius placed on a horizontal surface. A
sphere of 5 kg mass moves away up to 8 cm from the second sphere. Then how much
displacement of heavy sphere is required so that the centre of mass of the system is shifted 1 cm
towards the centre of lighter sphere.
(A) 2.5 cm towards lighter sphere (B) 5.5 cm towards lighter sphere
(C) 5.5 cm away from lighter sphere (D) 2.5 cm away from lighter sphere
(29) At the two ends A and B of a stationary boat of mass 50 kg and length 5 m , two person of
mass 40 kg and 60 kg are sit. If they meet at the centre of boat for discussion then the
displacement of boad ...... . ( neglect the firiction of water )
(A) 0.5 m, towards A (B) 0.3 m, towards A (C) 0.3 m, towards B (D) 0
(30) A symmetric rectangular box of mass M and length L is placed stationary m
on a frictionless surface. on the bottom of this rectangular a slot is given at
the centre. As shown is figure a sphere of mass m is fix at a rolling comes
in to the rest in the slot then what is the displacement of box ? L
M m 2 (M m)
(A) M m (B) L (C) L (D) 2(M m)
mL mL
m m
(31) A person with a bag is fall down from a tower of height 100 m. The mass of person and bag is
50 kg and 20 kg respectively. If the person wants to landing in to a lake situated at 0.5 m
distance from the bottom of tower, for which velocity the bag can thrown in opposite to the lake
when he come at 20 m downward from the top of tower. (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 0.5 ms1 (B) 0.25 ms1 (C) 1 ms1 (D) 0.1 ms1
Ans. : 16 (C), 17 (D), 18 (C), 19 (B), 20 (C), 21 (B), 22 (B), 23 (C), 24 (A), 25 (C), 26 (C),
27 (C), 28 (D), 29 (B), 30 (D), 31 (A)
78
Rotational Motion
Angular displacement :
linear displacement
Q Angular displacement =
radius
q = r
d
q P
O r

\ linear displacement d = T × r
Angular displacement is a vector quantity and its direction can be find out by using right hand
screw rule.
It is axial vector, so its direction is along the rotational axis.
Its unit is radian and revolution.
1 revolution = 2p rad = 360°
In case of the fixed rotational axis the angular displacement is different.
Angular Velocity :
o
If the angular displacement is 'T in time interval Dt then,
angular displacement
average angular velocity =
time
o o
'T T T
\ Z ! = 't = 2 1
't
o o
dT
Instantaneous angular velocity Z = dt
Unit : rad s1
direction can be find out according to right hand rule.
o
Z is also axial vector so its direction is along the rotational axis.
o o o
Relation with linear velocity : v = Z × r
The magnitude of angular velocity is called angular speed.
w = 2 S = 2pf
T
Angular acceleration :
o
The change in angular velocity is D Z in time interval Dt then
o o
Average angular acceleration D ! = 'Z
't
o o
o
dZ d2 T
Instantaneous angular acceleration D = =
dt dt 2
Unit : rads2
Direction : In the direction of change in angular velocity.
79
Relation with linear acceleration :
o o o o o
a = D × r + Z × v
o o
The direction of D × r is found to be along the tangent to the circular path. Hence it is called
the tangential component aT of the linear acceleration. It is responsible for to change only the
direction of motion.
o o o o
The direction of Z × v is found to be the radial direction towards the centre. Hence Z × v is
called the radial component ar. It is responsible for to change only the magnitude of motion.
o o o
ar = Z × v G
aT
ar = wv (q = 90°)
v2 o
ar = r
q
a
o
= w2r
o
ar
o o
a = aT + ar O
o
|a| = aT 2 ar 2
= D 2 r 2 Z2v 2
= r D 2 Z4
o
o
If a makes an angle q with at then,
Z2
tan q = a = D
at
r
If a = constant then
§ Z Z0 · Z Z0
(1) q = ¨ ¸t (2) a = (3) w = w0 + at
© 2 ¹ t
(4) q = w0t + 1 at2 (5) 2aq = w2 w02 (6) qnth = w0 + 1 a (2n 1)
2 2
(32) The radius of front and back wheels of a bicycle is r1 and r2 respectively, where r1 = 2r2. If the
velocity of the points of both the wheels in contact with ground is v1 and v2 respectively than ......
(A) v1 = 2v2 (B) v2 = 2v1 (C) v1 > v2 (D) v2 = v1
(33) A particle moves with constant tangential component of acceleration on a circular path of radius
10 m. After 2.5 rotation the velocity of particle is 50 ms1 tengential acceleration is ...... .
S
(A) 25 ms2 (B) 25 rad s2 (C) 2500 p2 ms2 (D) 2500 p2 rad s2
(34) The radius of a wheel is 2 m and its one point is in contact with ground. When the wheel
complete half rotation the linear displacement of the particle is ...... .
(A) 1 m (B) 2 4 S 2 (C) 2 2 S2 (D) 4 4 S 2

(35) Initial angular speed of a particle is 2 rad s1 and constant angular acceleration is 3 rad s2, then
after 4 s its angular displacement is ...... rad.
(A) 10 (B) 32 (C) 14 (D) 18
80
(36) As shown in figure a disc is rolling without slipping on a horizontal surface. B is
the centre of it and AB = BC. If the velocity of particles A, B and C are vA, vB C
w
B
and vC respectively then ...... . A
(A) vC < vB < vA (B) vC = vA = 2vB
(C) vC > vB > vA (D) vC < vB > vA
(37) A fan initially at rest get the angular speed of 500 rpm in 4 s with constant angular
acceleration.Then the time required to get 250 rpm speed from rest position is ...... .
(A) 3 s (B) 2.5 s (C) 2 s (D) 1.8 s
(38) A wheel intially at rest get 3 rad angular displacement in 1st s with constant angular
acceleration, then the angular displacement in 2st s is ...... .
(A) 12 rad (B) 15 rad (C) 9 rad (D) 6 rad
(39) A wheel acquires angular displacement of 50 rotation in 4 sec, then after 5sec its angular speed
is ...... rad s1.
(A) 40 p (B) 50 p (C) 30 p (D) 50
(40) A wheel intially at rest moves with constant angular acceleration 3 rad, s2 after this it moves
with constant angular speed for 8 s and then in 8 s it come into the rest with constant angular
retardation. Then total angular displacement of wheel is ...... rad
(A) 384 (B) 284 (C) 256 (D) 356
(41) A wheel rotating with 5 rad s2 angular acceleration along its axis. After 2 s of motion the magnitude
of radial and tangential componant of a particle at a distance 2 cm from the axis is ...... and ......
cms2.
(A) 50, 5 (B) 25, 10 (C) 25, 5 (D) 50, 10
Ans. : 32 (D), 33 (A), 34 (B), 35 (B), 36 (C), 37 (C), 38 (C), 39 (B), 40 (A), 41 (D)
Moment of Inertia
A characteristic of a object which oppose the change of motion of object either at rest or move with
constant circular motion
For a particle I = mr2
where r = perpendicular distance of particle from the axis
¦ mi ri 2
n
For a system of particle (ununiform distribution) I =
i 1
For a system of particle (uniform distribution) I = ³ r 2 dm
SI unit is kg m2 and dimensional formula is M1L2T0

It depends on the selection of axis and the distribution of mass about it.
Moment of intertia is a tensor physical quantity.
Inertia of object is constant while moment of inertia is different.
Radius of Gyration :
The perpendicular distance from the axis of a particle at which the total mass of the object is
concentric
The rms perpendicular distances of particles from the axis.
81
r12 r22 ..... rn2
For the system of particles k =
n
Moment of inertia I = Mk2

Radius of gyration does not depends upon the mass of object but depend upon the volume of it.
Theorem of parallel axis :
I = Ic + Md2
I = Moment of inertia of the body about any axis
Ic = Moment of inertia of the body through its center about any axis.
M = Total mass of the substance.
d = Perpendicular distance between the two axis.
Theorem of perpendicular axis :
If we take X and Y axis in the plane of a planar body then,
Iz = Ix + Iy
Special note :
(1) For a symmetric two-dimensional object moment of inertia of any axis passing from its
centre of mass and parallel to its plane is same. So, in this case it is not necessary that
two axis are perpendicular to each other.
(2) The intersection point of two perpendicular axis is not always the center of mass of the
object, it may be the point outside the object.
The moment of inertia with respect to the axis perpendicular to the joining line of two particles is
I = m1r12 + m2r22
According to the definition of centre of mass, m1r1 = m2r2 and r1+ r2 = r then,
r1 = m2 r and r2 = m1r m1 c.m. m2

m1 m2 m1 m2 r1 r2
r
§ mm ·
\ I = ¨ 1 2 ¸ r2
© m1 m2 ¹
\ I = mr2 and m = m m
m1m2
1 2
= Reduced mass
m < m1 and m < m2
Torque :
Torque is the moment of force with respect to a given reference point
Torque acting on the particle is
o o o
W = r× F
t = r F sin q
o o
where q = angle between r and F
82
o
r = position vector
r sin q = perpendicular distance of line of action of force = inertia = lever arm
o
according to the right hand screw rule the direction of torques ( W ) is perpendicular to the plane
o o
formed by r and F
SI unit : Nm or J
CGS unit : dyne cm
For a system of particles, R
o l1 l2
o o o
W = W1 + W2 + .... + W n
For equilibrium of rod F1 F2
o o
W1 + W2 = 0
\ F1l1 F2l2 = 0
F1l1 = F2l2
o o o o
F = m a resembles with the equation W = I D
Couple :
Two forces of equal magnitude and opposite directions which are not colinear form a couple.
Moment of couple = magnitude of any one of the two force × perpendicular distance between
the two forces.
In a torque applied on a object one force is external while the other force are external.
In couple both the force are external.
Angular Momentum :
o o o
Angular momentum of a particle is l = r × P
l = r psin q
o o
where q = angle between r and p
p = mv = linear momentum of particle
Angular momentum is axis vector. Its direction can be find out by using right hand screw rule.
Unit : J s or erg s
Angular momentum of a particle = Linear momentum × Perpendicular distance of the vector of
linear momentum = moment of linear momentum
o o
For circular motion r ^ p so L = rp = mvr = mwr2. = Iw
Also, d L = I dt = I a = t
dZ
dt
If large amount of torque applied for small time interval then Angular impulse of torque is
³ dt = W av Dt = D L = change in angular momentum.

o
J = ³ W av dt = W av
o o
t2
o o
t1
Law of conservation of angular momentum :

o o
W = dL
dt
83
If resultant torque is zero
o o
d L = 0 Þ L = constant
dt
o o o
\ L 1 + L 2 + ..... + L n = constant
L = Iw = constant
\ w µ 1 from this it is clear that
I
when a planet come near to the sun its moment of inertia is decrease. So angular speed is
increase (I µ r2)
If the radius of planet suddenly increase by x time then its periodic time
T µ I Þ T µ R2
So,T2 = x2T1
The work due to torque W = t q
T2
for variable torque W = ³ WdT
T1
Rotational kinetic energy KR = 12 Iw2 = 12 Lw = L

2
2I
Power P = tw = I µ w = Iw d Z
dt
o o
P = W . Z (In vector form)
(42) The object of mass 3kg, 5kg, 6kg, and 2 kg are placed at the vertices A, A B
B, C and D of a square length 1 m. Then moment of inertia with respect to

axis perpendicular to its plane and passing through it centre is ...... .
O
(A) 6 kg m2 (B) 8 kg m2
(C) 4 kg m2 (D) 16 kg m2 D C
(43) In above example, find the moment of inertia with respect to AD axis of square.
(A) 11 kg m2 (B) 13 kg m2 (C) 16 kg m2 (D) 8 kg m2
(44) In above example, the moment of inertia with respect to axis BD is ...... .
(A) 16 kg m2 (B) 8 kg m2 (C) 4.5 kg m2 (D) 9 kg m2
(45) The mass of a disc is 10 kg and radius is 0.2 m. It moves with 200 rpm angular speed along the
axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane. To let it in stationary position in 15
sec the tangential force required on the circumfrance is ...... .
(A) 0.5 p N (B) 0.4 p N (C) 0.2 p N (D) 0.44 p N
(46) A disc of mass 5 kg and radius 0.4 m rotates along its axis with 30 rpm. To incerase its angular
momentum 20 % in 5 s required torque is ...... Nm.
(A) 2.6 p (B) 0.16 p (C) 1.6 p (D) 0.016 p
84
(47) When 1500 J energy given to a object its angular speed increase by 1000 rpm to 2500 rpm then
the moment of inertia of a object is ...... kg m2
(A) 0.052 (B) 0.52 (C) 52 (D) 0.026
(48) Two disc rotating about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane. The
mass of bigger disc is 2 kg and radius is 0.2 m and angular speed 50 rad s1 while for smaller
disc the mass, radius and angular speed is 4 kg, 0.15 m and 250 rads1 respectively. The axis of
both the disc is coinside when the smaller disc get in connect to bigger disc, then the angular
speed of a system of two disc is ...... rads1.
(A) 200 (B) 140 (C) 153 (D) 105
(49) A particle start to move with constant velocity from the point (10, 10) cm and move parallel to
y-axis in negative direction, then its angular momentum with respect to orgin is ...... .
(A) zero (B) constant
(C) increase (D) intially increase and then decrease
(50) The inner and outer radius of a hollow cylinder is a and b respectively. The moment of inertia
of it with respect to its axis is ...... (density of material is r, length of cylinder is L)
§ a4 b4 · § b2 – a 2 · § b4 – a 4 ·
(A) 2pLr (a + b )
2 2
(B) 2pLr ¨¨ ¸
¸ (C) 2pLr ¨¨ 2 ¸
¸ (D) 2pLr ¨¨ 4 ¸
¸
©
4
¹ © ¹ © ¹
(51) If the sixth portion of a disc of mass M and radius R of uniform density distribution cut then its
moment of inertia with respect to the axis passing through the centre of original disc and
perpendiculr to the plane is ...... .
(A) 12 MR2 (B) 4 MR2 (C) 3 MR2 (D) 1 MR2
1 1
6
(52) A circle made of a wire of length l and uniform linear density l, then its moment of inertia with
respect to axis parallel to its plane and passing tangentially is ...... .
8 S 3Ol 2 3Ol 3 Ol 3
2
(A) 3 Ol 3 (B) 8S2 (C) (D)
8S 2 8S 2
(53) The mass of a semicircular ring of radius R is M. The moment of inertia with respect to axis
passing through the centre of original of ring and perpendicular to its plane is ...... .
(B) MR
MR 2 2 MR 2
(A) 2 (C) 4 (D) non of the above
(54) A square made of four rods of length l and mass m. The moment of inertia with respect to the
axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to the plane is ...... .
(A) 4 ml2 (B) 3 ml2 (C) 1 ml2 (D) 3 ml2
1 2
3 6
(55) The moment of inertia of a square plate of length l and mass m with respect to axis passing through any
one corner and perpendicular to its plane is ...... .
(A) 4 ml2 (B) 3 ml2 (C) 1 ml2 (D) 2 ml2
1
3 6 3
(56) If the moment of inertia of a triangle plate of uniform density with A
respect to sides AB, BC and CA is I1, I2 and I3 respectively then, 4 cm

(A) I2 < I1 (B) I1 + I2 = I3
(C) I2 > I1 (D) I3 is maximum
B 3 cm C
85
(57) Y From a circular disc of radius R and mass 4M, a small disc
of radius 4 is removed from the disc. The moment of inertia
R R
4
of the remaining disc about an axis perpendicular to the plane
O X of the disc and passing through O is ...... .
R
(A) 2.43 MR2 (B) 1.23 MR2
(C) 1.4 MR2 (D) 1.43 MR2
(58) The moment of inertia of thin uniform rod of
length l and mass m about an axis pp'
shown in figure is ...... . P'
ml 2 sin 2 T ml 2 sin 2 T
(A) (B) O q
8 12 A B
(C) ml cos T (D) ml cos T

2 2 2 2
P
8 12
(59) A thin wire of uniform density is having length 4l and mass m is bent to form a rectangle ABCD.
Here side AB is four times the side BC. Then moment of inertia about an axis passing through
AD is ...... .
(A) 0.3 ml2 (B) 0.5 ml2 (C) 0.4 ml2 (D) 0.2 ml2
(60) A solid metallic sphere is rotating about an axis passing through its diameter. Suddenly its volume
is increased by 6 %, then the change in its angular speed will be ...... .
(A) 2 % (B) +2 % (C) 4 % (D) +4 %
(61) The moment of inertia of a disc of radius 1.5m is 150 kg m . The disc can rotate frictionless
2.
about vertical axis. A man of mass 60 kg is standing on its edge. Now man walks with speed of
2 ms1 on its edge, then angular speed of a disc will be...... .
(A) 1 rad s1 (B) S rad s1 (C) S2 rad s1 (D) 1.2 rad s1
1.2
(62) A hollow sphere is placed on a rough horizontal surface. On appling force F on it in horizontal
direction it rolls down without slipping on the surface. Then its angular acceleration is ...... .
F
(A) 5 MR (B) 5 MR
6 6 F
R
(C) MR (D) 5 MR
3F 3 F
P
(63) A uniform rod of mass m and length l is suspended by means of two right
inextensible strings as shown in figure. If one string is cut out then the tension in
the other string is ......
l (A) 4
mg
(B) 2 mg (C) mg (D) 2
mg
(64) If a ball of mass m and radius r is hitted at the height h from its centre, G
§ hv0 ·
h J
velocity gained by it is v0.. Then angular speed obtained by it is ...... ¨ ¸
© r2 ¹
r
(A) 5 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D) 45

2 5 5
86
(65) A weightless rod AB of length 2l is placed vertically on a frictionless horizontal surface. Two
sphere of mass m are attached to two ends of rod AB. impulse of force J is applied parallel to the
surface at the point A and also perpendicular to rod AB, then velocity of end A is ...... .
(A) m (B) 2m (C) 0 (D) m
J J 2J
(66) As shown in the figure find the moment of inertia about x x' axis
of a system of two rods of mass m each and length l each placed x'
perpendicular to each other.
ml 2 ml 2
(A) (B) O
6 2
ml 2 x
(C) ml (D)
2
12 6 2
(67) Four dises of radius R are cut from a thin square plate of side 4R and mass M. The moment of
inertia of the remaing portion about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its
plane is ...... .
5S
(A) 8 MR2 (B) 3 MR2
8
8 5S MR
(C) 3 8 2
3 8
(D) 8 5S MR2
4R
(68) Two sphere A and B connected to two ends of a 1 m long thin rod and applied difference inpulse of
force at the same time. The instantaneous velocities gained by them are shown in the figure. Then
the angular speed of sphere B with respect to A will be ...... .
(A) 8 3 rad s1

8ms 1
8
(B) 3 rad s1 v
60° 30°
(C) 4 3 rad s1

4
(D) 3 rad s
1 A 1m B
(69) A turn table of radius r is rotating about vertical axis passing through its centre. A bullet of mass
m is fired in an opposite direction of turn tables motion from the gun attatched at its edge in the
direction tangent to the edge of table. If the speed of bullet is v, then increase in angular speed of
turn table is ...... . (I0 = moment of inertia of a system of turn table + gun )
(A) (B) (C) I (D) v

mvr 2 mvr mvr
I0 mr 2 I0 mr 2 0 2r
B
(70) A rod of uniform density is having mass M and length L. It is placed vertical on a v0
C
smooth horizontal surface. A particle of mass m moving with velocity v0 collides at m x
point C of the rod and becomes stationary. What should be the height of this point from
the centre of the rod so that the end A of the rod remain stationary ? A
(A) L3 (B) (C) L6 (D) L4

2L
O 5
(71) A right triangle plate ABC of mass M is free to rotate in the vertical plane
A l B about a fixed horizontal axis through A. It is support by a string such that
l the side AB is horizontal. The reaction at the support A is ...... .
C
Mg 2M g
(A) (B) (C) Mg (D) 2 Mg
3
3 3
87
(72) A disc of radius r is formed from a solid sphere of mass M and radius R. If the moment of
inertia of the disc about an axis passing through its edge and perpendicular to its plane is equal to
the moment of inertia of the sphere about its diameter, then r = ......
7
(A) R (B) R (C) R4 (D) 15 R
2 4
15 15
(73) The moment of inertia of a wheel about an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its
plane is 2.5 kgm2. It is rotating about this axis with angular speed of 90 rpm. Then the torque
required to stop rotating it in 0.5 min is ...... Nm
S S S
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) p (D) 3
y p'
(74) The moment of inertia about an axis passing through X axis of a A B
square plate of uniform density is I. Then moment of inertia about q
X
an axis PP' making an angle q with Y-axis will be ...... . x
(A) 2I (B) I cos2 q

(C) I (D) I sin2 q D
p
C
(75) Two spheres of mass 2 kg and 3 kg are attatched to two ends of a rod of negligible mass. Length
of rod is 2m.The rod is rotating with uniform angular speed about an axis perpendicular to its
length. What should be the position of axis of rotation so that minimum work is required to be done
to rotate it?
(A) 1.2 m away from 2 kg (B) 1.2 m away from 3 kg
(C) 0.8 m away from 2 kg (D) 0.6 m away from 3 kg 1
2
(76) A square plate is shown in the figure. The moment of inertia about an
axis passing through plane of plate from 1, 2, 3 and 4 are I1, I2, I3 and
I4 respectively. which of the following is not the moment of inertia about 0
3
an axis passing through its centre and perpendicular to its plane ?
(A) I1 + I2 (B) I1 + I3
(C) I2 + I4 (D) All of the above. 4
(77) A ring of mass M has radius R. It is rotating with uniform angular speed w about its axis. If
two particles each of mass m are placed at diametrically opposite points, then its angular speed
2
will be ...... .
M m M m
(A) (B) (C) (D)
M 2M
w w w w
M M m 2 M m M
(78) A ring of mass M and radius R rolls down on a horizontal surface
w with angular speed w. The angular momentum of ring with respect to
A point A is .......
(A) MR2w (B) 12 MR2w (C) 2MR2w (D) 2 MR2w

3
(79) A disc of uniform density has mass M and radius R. It is placed in a XY

plane in such a way that its centre coincides with origin. If its moment of y y
inertia about an axis passing through point (2R, O) is equal to that about
an axis passing through the point (y, O) then, y = ...... .
2R
R
(A) R (B) R
17 15
4 2 O x
(C) R (D) R
17 17
2 2
88
(80) l A cube shaped block of mass m and side l is moving with
v velocity v on a frictionless horizontal surface. It collides with
P buldged part at point P and then after it rolls. Then its angular
speed after the collision will be ...... .
(A) 4 l (B) 2 l (C) 4 v (D) 4 l

3 v 3 v 3 l 5 v
Ans. : 42 (B), 43 (A), 44 (C), 45 (D), 46 (B), 47 (A), 48 (C), 49 (B), 50 (D), 51 (A), 52 (C), 53 (B),
54 (A), 55 (D), 56 (C), 57 (D), 58 (B), 59 (A), 60 (C), 61 (D), 62 (B), 63 (A), 64 (B), 65 (A),
66 (C), 67 (D), 68 (B), 69 (A), 70 (C), 71 (B), 72 (D), 73 (B), 74 (C), 75 (A), 76 (D), 77 (B),
78 (C), 79 (D), 80 (A)
If the body is slipping
The friction between the body and the surface is zero
Translatory kinetic energy, KT = 12 mv2
If the body rotates about fixed axis of rotation, then rotatory kinetic energy KR = 12 Iw2
§ k2 ·
= 12 (mk2) 2 = 12 mv2 ¨ 2 ¸
v2
R ©R ¹
§ k2 ·
\ KR = ¨ ¸ (KT)
© R2 ¹
If the body performes rotational motion and its axis of rotation performes linear motion, the body
is said to be rolling body. Friction between the body and surface, F ¹ 0
ª º
Net kinetic energy KNet = KT + KR = 12 mv2 + 12 Iw2 = 12 mv2 «¬1 R 2 »¼
2
k
If the object rolls across a surface in such a way that there is no relative motion of object and
surface at the point of contact, the motion is called rolling without slipping, even in the presence
of friction.
The works done against friction = energy lost = 0
Net kinetic energy, KNet = 12 mv2 + 12 Iw2
= 12 m R2w2 + 12 Iw2
= 12 [I + mR2]w2
KNet = 12 Ipw2
where I = moment of inertia of rolling body about its centre.
I P = moment of inertia of rolling body about point of contact P.
In case of rolling without slipping, all points of a rigid body have same angular speed but
different linear speed.
v v 2v
v=0 v v
v
v v v 2v
v=0 v
pure translation pure rotation pure rolling
89
Rolling without slipping on an inclined plane.
Potential energy at height h = Total kinetic energy at the bottom at an inclined plane.
ª k2 º B
mgh = 12 mv2 «1 2 »
¬ R ¼
ª º2 h
1
« » d
Linear velocity at the bottom of an inclined plane. v = « 2 gh »
« k2 »
«1 2
q
»
¬ R ¼
A C
g sin T
constant acceleration in motion, a =
1 k
2
R2
Decrease in acceleration due to friction,
a' = g sin q a
g sin T
=
1 R
2
k2
Frictional force = F = ma'
Time taken to reach the bottom of an inclined plane,
ª § ·º 2
1
t = 1 « 2h ¨1 k 2 ¸»
2
sin T ¬ g © R ¹¼
k2
Here the factor is a measure of moment of inertia of a body and its value is constant for
R2
given shape of the body and it does not depend on the mass and radius of a body.
The values of velocity, linear acceleration and time of descent ( for a given inclined plane ) is same for
bodies of small or large dimensions, for lighter or havier bodies of equal shape.
k2
The substance, which has more moment of inertia the ratio , will be more, so magnitude of
R2
velocity and acceleration will be decreased while value of time will be increased.
For a solid and hollow body of same shape, Isolid < Ihollow. Hence the velocity and acceleration of
a solid body are larger and time of descent is lesser. It means solid body will reach the bottom
first with greater velocity.
If given body rolls down on an inclined plane of different angle of inclination.
v µ q°, aµq t µ q1
The necessary condition for a body rolling without slipping is
§ k2 ·
¨ ¸ tan q
m³ ¨ k2 + R 2 ¸
© ¹
When a body of mass m is tied to one end of a string which is wound around the solid
body[cylinder, pulley, disc], when the mass is released,it falls vertically downwards, then
90
Downward acceleration
a =
g
§ 2 ·
1 M¨ k ¸
m © R2 ¹
M = mass of a rigid body (rotating body)

k = Radius of gyration of a rotating body h
Tension in string T
ª º m
T = mg « »
I
¬« I m R ¼»
2
I = moment of inertia of a rotating body. mg

Velocity of a body after travelling a distance h in downward direction,
v =
2 gh
§ 2 ·
1 M¨ k ¸
m © R2 ¹
Time taken to travel a distance h,

2h ª M § k 2 ·º
t = g «1 m ¨ 2 ¸ »
¬ © R ¹¼
2mgh 2 gh
Angular speed of a rotating body, w = I mR 2 = R M (k 2 )
2
m
when a body allows to oscillate about an axis passing from any point except centre of the body
of uniform shape, it is called the compound pendulum.
l2 k 2
Its time period is given by, T = 2 p where L =
L
g l
l = distance between the point of suspension to centre of mass of a body,
k = radius of gyration of a body.
(81) A solid sphere, a hollow sphere and a ring are released from an inclined plane (frictionless) of
height h, which object will reach the bottom first ?
(A) ring (B) solid sphere
(C) hollow sphere. (D) All of them reach the bottom at the same time.
(82) A hollow sphere of mass M and radius R rolls on a horizontal plane without slipping with
the velocity v. Now, it the surface rolls up vertically, the maximum height the body would attain
will be ...... .
2 2
v2 2
(A) 5 (B) 6 (C) 10 (D) 7
6 v 5 v 7 10 v
g g g g
(83) A small object of uniform density rolls up a curved surface with an initial velocity v. It reaches up
3v 2
to a maximum height of 4 g with respect to the initial position. The object is ...... .
(A) Ring (B) hollow sphere (C) Disc (D) hollow cylinder
91
(84) A solid cylinder rolls down an frictionless inclined plane. If angle of inclination with horizontal is q
and the co-efficient of friction between the body and surface is m, then
(A) Frictional force equal to mmg cos q
(B) Frictional force will become resistive force.
(C) Frictional force opposes the linear motion and helps to relational motion.
(D) Frictional force increases as q decreases.
(85) A small sphere of radius r is kept in a hemispherical bowl of radius R. It A
is released from point A. The angular speed of the sphere when it R
reaches at the bottom will be ......
B
§ ·2 § ·2 § ·2 § g ·2
1 1 1 1
(A) ¨ 5 (B) ¨ 7 (C) ¨ 2 (D) ¨ 10
r ¸¹ r ¸¹ r ¸¹ r ¸¹
g g g
© 7 R © 10 R © 5 R © 7 R
(86) A hollow sphere of radius r rolls down without slipping on inclined plane of height h. A loop of
radius R is formed at the end of an inclined plane. What should be the minimum height of inclined
plane to be kept so the hollow sphere can complete the rotation in a loop ?
(A) 2.7 R
(B) 1.7 R
h
(C) 3 R2
R (D) 2.3 R
(87) As shown in the figure two inclined planes are A C
same in all aspects. In which the AB part is
rough and the BC part is smooth. The kinetic
energy of the body at the bottom of inclined B B
h
h
plane is
(A) more in (i) (B) more in (ii)
C
q q
A
(C) equal in both (i) (ii) (D) information is incomplate (i) (ii)
(88) A solid sphere and a solid cylinder have equal mass. They rolled down on inclined planes of height
h1 and h2 respectively. To have equal velocities for the two objects at the bottom of the inclined
planes the ratio of heights h1 : h2 should be = ......
(A) 14 (B) 5 (C) 14 (D) 7

15 7 5
A
15
(89) A solid sphere rolls down without slipping on an inclined plane of
height 2h. The surface AB is rough and the suface BC is smooth.
The ratio of linear kinetic energy to rotational kinetic energy of
2h B
sphere at a point C is ...... .
(A) 4 (B) 6
(C) 16 (D) 14 q
C
(90) A horizontal turn table is rotating with constant angular speed w. A light coin is placed at distance
r from the centre of the turn table. Then for which of the following condition, the coin will keep
rotating with the turn table ? (co-efficient of static friction is m)
Z2 Pg Pg
(A) r = mgw2 (B) r < Pg (C) r ³ (D) r £
Z 2
Z2
Ans. : 81 (D), 82 (B), 83 (C), 84 (C), 85 (D), 86 (A), 87 (A), 88 (C), 89 (B), 90 (D)
92
(91) Assertion : A particle is moving on a straight line with a uniform velocity, its angular momentum
is always zero.
o o o
Reason : The angular momentum of a particle is given by the formula l = r × p
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(92) Assertion : A hollow cylinder of metal and a solid cylinder of wood having equal mass and
dimensions rolled down simultaneously without slipping on an inclined plane. Then the hollow cylinder
will reach the bottom first.
Reason : According to law of conservation of kinetic energy, the kinetic energy of both the
cylinders is unequal at the bottom of the inclined plane.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(93) Assertion : Inertia and moment of inertia are same quantities.
Reason : Inertia represents the capacity of a body to oppose its state of motion or rest.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(94) Assertion : A ladder is more apt to slip, when you are high up on it, then when you just begin to climb.
Reason : At the high up on a ladder, the torque is large and on climbing up the torque is small.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(95) Assertion : When there is no torque is acting on a body with respect to its centre of mass, its
speed remains constant.
Reason : The total linear momentum of an isolated system remains constant.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(96) Assretion : If a wheel moves down on frictionless inclined, then it can slips only, cannot rolling.
Reason : For rolling the work against the frictional force is zero.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(97) Assertion : A hollow cylinder is more stronger than a solid cylinder used as shaft in motor.
Reason : The value of torque is more for hollow cylinder as compared to solid cylinder for a
given value of angular displacement.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(98) Assertion : The linear speed for all the particles of a rolling body is same.
Reason : The rotational motion does not affect the linear momentum of a rigid body.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(99) Assertion : If the earth contracts to half than its initial value (keeping mass constant) the length
of the day decrease.
Reason : As the radius of the earth changes, the moment of inertia also changes.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(100) Assertion : The value of radius of gyration is constant for a given body.
Reason : Radius of gyration means the rms distance of particles from axis of rotation.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
93
(101) A circular platform is free to rotate in horizontal plane is rotating with angular velocity w0. When a
child standing on a edge of turn table moves along a chord of the platform and reaches the other end
of a turn table.The angular velocity of the platform w will vary with time t as ......
w w w
w
(A) w0 (B) w0 (C) (D) w

w0
0
t O t O t t
(102) The graph between log L and log P is. (L is angular momentum, P = linear momentum)
log L log L
(A) (B)
log P log P
log L
log L
(C) (D)
log P log P
Ans. : 91 (D), 92 (D), 93 (D), 94 (A), 95 (D), 96 (B), 97 (A), 98 (D), 99 (A), 100 (D), 101 (B), 102 (D)
Match the columns :
(103) A object of mass 0.5 kg is projected in the direction making an angle of 45° with horizontal with
initial velocity of 10 2 ms1. When it moves in the horizontal direction only, then ...... .
column-1 column-2 (A) i ® R ii ® P iii ® Q
with respect to point of
projection (P) 25 SI (B) i ® S ii ® P iii ® R
(i) Torque acting
on the body (Q) 50 SI (C) i ® Q ii ® P iii ® R
(ii) Angular momentum
of the body (R) 0.4 SI (D) i ® P ii ® Q iii ® S
(iii) Angular velocity of the body (S) None of these
(104) A disc rolls down without slipping on a horizontal surface.

The velocity of its centre of mass is v. If the velocity of O
A q
point A on its edge is vA and angle between OP and OA
is q as shown in the figure, then P
94
column-1 column-2
(i) q = 60° (P) vA = 2 v (A) i®P ii ® Q iii ® S iv ® R
(ii) q = 90° (Q) vA = v (B) i®S ii ® P iii ® Q iv ® R
(iii) q = 120° (R) vA = 2v (C) i®R ii ® Q iii ® P iv ® S
(iv) q = 180° (S) vA = 3 v (D) i®Q ii ® P iii ® S iv ® R
(105) If the resultant force acting on a rigid body is zero, then
column-1 column-2
(i) Linear velocity of centre of mass (P) P = 0
(ii) Angular velocity of the body (Q) Q = constant
(iii) The angular velocity
about an axis passing
from its centre of mass. (R) R = variable
(iv) The angular velocity

about an axis passing
from any point other
than centre of mass.
(A) i ® Q ii ® R iii ® R iv ® R (B) i ® R ii ® Q iii ® P iv ® R

(C) i ® Q ii ® R iii ® P iv ® R (D) i ® R ii ® R iii ® R iv ® R
Ans. : 103 (C), 104 (D), 105 (A)
95
7 Properties of solid and liquid
Elasticity : The inherent property of a body due to which, body trines to restore the normal shape or
to oppose the change in shape is known as elasticity.
Perfect elastic body : It a body can completely regains its original stape after removal of the
deforming force, it is called a perfect elastic body.
In practice it is impossible to have a perfect elastic body.
The object which can be considerd as the nearest to perfect elastic body is quartz.
Non elastic body : (plastic body) : If a body remains in the deformed state and does not even
partially regain its original shape after removal of deforming force, it is called a perfect non elastic
body. e.g. Wax
Rigid Body : If the relative positions of the particles of the body remain invarient even resultant
force acts on it, the body is called rigid.
Stress : The restoring force arising per unit cross sectional area of a deformed body is called stress.
F Force (F)
Stress s = A
Area (A)
unit : Nm2
Dimenssional formula : M1L1T2
Types of Stress :
(1) Longitudinal Stress (sl) Ñ The stress due to which the length of the body changes is called
longitudinal stress.
Types of longitudinal stress :
Tensile Stress : The stress which
causes increase in the length of the
body is called tensile stress.
Compressive stress : If due to the
application of external forces length of
the rod decreases, the resulting stress
is called compressive stress.
(2) Volume Stress or Hydraulic Stress (sV) : The stress produces due to the forces which are
perpendicular to the entire surface of the body is called volume stress. Application of such forces
cause change in the volume of the body.
(3) Shearing Stress or Tengential Stress (ss) : If the force acting on a body is tangential to a
surface of the body it causes shearing strain in the body is called shearing stress.
Note : In the normal position of the body the intermolecular distance r = r0. When external force
acts on it,
If the body is compressed (r < r0) ® intermolecular forces are repulsive
If the body expand (r > r0) ® intermolecular forces are attractive.
The Difference between pressure and stress :
Pressure Stress
Vector Tensor
The whole body is acted upon by forces, The forces should not be perpendicular
acting perpendicularly every where on the body. to the surface.
It is same on all surface. It can be different on diffrent surfaces.
It is also possible that there is stress on
one surface and there is no stress on
the other surface.
120
Thermal Stress : When both the ends of a rod is fixed in the rigid support and its temperature
is reduced, the stress induced in the rod is called thermal stress.
Thermal Stress s = Y a DT
Y = Young's modulus a = linear co-efficient of expansion DT = decrease in the temperature.
Strain : (e)
When an external force is applied on a body its length, volume or shape change is called
strain.
It is ratio of change in body when deforming force is applied to the original body.
Strain is unitless and dimensionless physical quantity.
Types of strain
(1) Longitudinal Strain (el) : The ratio of change in length of a body (Dl) when deforming
force is applied to the original length (l) is called longitudinal Strain.
'l
el =
l
Tensile Strain ® increase in length
Compressive Strain ® decrease in length
(2) Volume Strain (eV) : It is ratio of when a body is acted upon by the forces everywhere
on its surface in direction perpendicular to the sarface, the volume of the body change to
original volume.
9
ev =
V
(3) Shearing Strain (es) : A force tangential to a cross-section of a body produce the change
in shape, it is called shearing Strain.
es = h
x
Types Stress Strain
Force perpendicular to cross-section Change in length

Longitudinal sl = el =
cross- sectional area original length
'l
sl = el =
F
A l
Volume eV = Change in volume

Force perpendicular at every point of surface
sV = original volume
area of surface
'V
sV = = =P (Where P = Pressure) eV=
F PA
A A V
Tengential force
Shearing ss = es = = tan q
x
area h
x
=
Fs
A
h
q
Unit : Nm2 Unitless
121
(1) The length of a string is l1 when the tension force of 3 N is applied on the string. The length becomes
l2 when force becomes 4N. What would be the length to the string if the force is made 7 N.
(A) 4l2 5l1 (B) 7l2 l1 (C) 4l2 3l1 (D) 3l2 4l1
(2) One horizontal rod of length 1 m is rotating about an axis passing through its edge and
perpendicular to its plane. With what revolution per second it should be rotated so that it breaks ?
(breaking stress = 3×109 Nm2, density ot the material of the rod = 6000 kgm3.)
(A) 1000 rps (B) 318.2 rps (C) 159 rps (D) 259 rps
(3) A rod of length 2m, mass 1 kg and. Cross-sectional area 104 m2 is hanged vertically. 1 kg mass is
suspended at its lower end calculate the stress at the midpoint of the rod. (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 20 × 104 Nm2 (B) 105 Nm2 (C) Zero (D) 15×104 Nm2
(4) When a mass more than 27 kg is suspended from a wire, it breaks. Another wire is having radius
equal to one third of the first wire, which is made up of the same material. Calculate the maximum
mass which can be loaded using this wire.
(A) 9 kg (B) 3 kg (C) 27 kg (D) 81 kg
(5) Length of a metallic rod of mass m and cross-sectional area A is L. If mass M is suspended at
the lower end of this rod suspended vertically. Stress at the cross-section situated at 4 distance
L
from its upper end is ......
4A
§ 3m · g
(C) ¨ M ¸
g
(A) (B) M (D) (M + m)
Mg g
© 4 ¹A
m
A A
(6) A rod of length 100 cm and negligible weight is hanged using steel
wire and brass wire in such a way that it remains horizontal as 2m Brass
shown in the figure. Asteel = 0.2 cm2 and Abrass = 0.4 cm2. Both Steel
wire
steel and brass wires are of equal length. At what distance on the T1 Wire T2
rod a mass (W) must be suspended so that the tension produced in

steel wire is same as that in brass wire.
(A) m from steel wire (B) m from the brass wire

2 4
3 3
(C) 1 m from the steel wire (D) m from the brass wire
1
4
Ans. : 1 (C), 2 (C), 3 (D), 4 (B), 5 (C), 6 (A)
Hooke's Law and Elastic Moduli

For small deformations the stress and strain are directly proportional to each other.
sl µ el Þ sl = Yel
Vl
\Y= H =
FL
l A' L
VV
Bulk Modulus : B = H
V
Comperssibility K =
1
B
122
Modulus of rigidity (Shear Modulus)
Vs
h= H = =
F/ A Fh
s x/h Ax
(7) The density of sea-water on its surface is r. Find the density of water where the pressure is
a Pa. Where Pa = atomspheric pressure and a is a constant. The Bulk modulus of the water is B.
UB UB UB UB
(A) B D P (B) B – D P (C) B ( D – 1) P (D) B – ( D – 1) P
a a a a
(8) A solid sphere of radius R and made up from the meterial having bulk modulus B is placed in a
cylindrical container having cross-sectional area A and filled with some liquid. A piston of
cross-section A is kept floating on the surface of the liquid. Calculate the relative change in the
radius of the sphere when mass M is kept on the piston.
(A) (B) (C) (D) AB

Mg Mg Mg 3M g
3AB 2 AB AB
(9) A wire of length 0.5 m, redius 0.1 m rotates about an axis passing through its edge and
perpendicular to its plane with an angular speed of 400 rad s1. Calculate the increase in the length
of the spring. The density of the material of the wire is 104 kgm3. Youngs modulus
Y = 2 × 1011 Nm2.
(A) mm (B) mm (C) mm (D) 1 mm

1 1 1
6 3 2
(10) Find the tension force produced in the b

wire when a force F is applied as shown a
F
in the figure. (Y = 2 × 1011 Nm2)
Y
(A) (B)
F F
§ ab·
L
S b a
S¨
2 2 2
¸ Y
© 2 ¹
(C) (D) S ab Y
F F
§ a b ·
S¨ ¸Y
2 2
¨ ¸
© ¹
2
(11) A solid sphere of radius (r) made up from the material having bulk modulus (B), placed in a
cylindrical container filled with liquid. A piston having cross-sectional area (a) is placed in a
container. When a mass (m) is placed on the piston than find fractional increases in
'r
radius r ...... .
(A) B m g (B) 3 m g (C) (D)

a a mg mg
3 Ba Ba
(12) A twist of 0.1 unit per cm is produced in a wire of radius 3 cm. A hollow cylinder of having
internal radius 4 cm and outer radius is 5 cm is under the effect of same couple of force. Find
twist in hollow cylinder per cm.
(A) 0.1 unit (B) 0.455 unit (C) 0.91 unit (D) 1.82 unit
123
(13) l1 l2 l3 The Youngs modulus of three rods having cross-section area
and equal volume are Y 1, Y 2 and Y 3 respectively. Their
Y 1, a1 Y 2, a 2 Y 3, a 3 coefficent of linear expansion are a1, a2 and a3 respectively. A
compound rod made up of these 3 rods is fixed between two
walls as shown in the figure. It has been observed that the
length of the central rod (l2) remains the same even if the
temperature of the system increases. Calculate original l .

l1
3
l1 = length of the first rod l3 = length of the third rod.

§ Y2 D 2 Y1 D1 · Y3 § Y3 D 3 Y2 D 2 · Y1
(A) ¨ Y D Y D ¸ Y (B) ¨ Y D Y D ¸ Y
© 3 3 2 2 ¹ 1 © 2 2 1 1 ¹ 3
Y1 D1 Y3 D 3
(C) Y D (D) Y D
3 3 1 1
(14) A wooden board with uniform thickness moves on smooth surface under the influenes of constant
horizontal force (F0) its young modudus is Y. If area of cross section is A, its compressive strain in
direction of force is ...... . (Total length of wooden board = L)
(A) (B) (C) (D)

F0 2 F0 F0 3 F0
AY AY 2 AY 2 AY
(15) Young modulus of Steel, Aluminium and Tungsten wire having same length
and same area of cross-section are Y1 = 2×1011 Pa, Y2 = 0.7 × 1011 Pa 1 2 3
Y3 = 3.6 × 1011 Pa. They are suspended vertically us shown in figure
Effective Young modulus of this arrangement is ...... Pa.
LOAD
(A) 6.3 × 10 11
(B) 2.1 × 10 11
(C) 0.8 × 10 22
(D) 7.099
(16) An average distance between two molecules of an unknown metal is 3.2 × 1010 m. The constant
of intermolecular force between them is 6 Nm1. The Youngs modulus for this metal is ...... Nm2.
(A) 2.33 × 105 (B) 18.75 × 1010 (C) 0.1875 × 1010 (D) 1.875 × 1010
(17) Two rods of length L1 = 10 cm and L2 = 20 cm are fixed between

two walls as shown in figure. Their Young modulus are Y1 and Y2.
wall L1
Their coefficient of linear expansion are a 1 and a 2 . Wall
Where a1 : a2 = 3 : 4. Both rods are not bend even after heating. rod L2
Ratio of young modulus to obtain same value of thermal stress is

Y1 : Y2 = ...... . rod
(A) 1:1 (B) 3:4 (C) 4:3 (D) 4:9
(18) A ring of radius R2 is fixed on a wooden disc of radius R, in such a way that their centres remain
the same. The area of the cross-section of the ring is 100 cm2 and the Youngs modulus of the
meterial of the ring is 2 × 1011 Pa. Calculate the force required for the expansion of the ring.
(A) 4 × 109 N (B) 2 × 106 N (C) 2 × 1013 N (D) 1013 N
124
(19) A graph of stress ® strain for two different material A and
B is shown in the figure. If their Young modulus are A
Stress
YA
YA and YB. Find Y = ...... [tan 36° = 0.75, tan 18° = 0.3]
B B
36°
(A) (B)
2 2
18°
Strain
5 1
(C) 2 (D) 2
1 5
(20) The graph of mass ® elongation for four wires of diffrent length D
C
but same material is as shown in the figure. Which one of the
mass
followings represent the thickest wire ? B
(A) OD (B) OG A
(C) OB (D) OA
O elongation
Ans. : 7 (D), 8 (A), 9 (B), 10 (D), 11 (C), 12 (B), 13 (B), 14 (C), 15 (B), 16 (D), 17 (C), 18 (B),
19 (D), 20 (A)
Poissons ratio :
The ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain is known as poissons ratio.
' D/D
m= 'l / l
D = Diameter of cross-section
m < 0.5
For solid < m<

1 1
4 3
For rubber m is very close to 0.5
Elastic potential energy :
U=
A Y ( ' L2 ) A = area of cross-section, Y = Youngs modulus
L = original length, DL = change in length
2L
Energy per unit volume = ×Y × 'LL

1 2
2
= × Stress × Strain
U 1
\
V 2
Note :
for two wire If Y1 = Y2 and F1 = F2
' L2 L2 r12
\ DL µ ' L1 = L1 × r 2
L
r2
Þ
2
for two wire If Y1 = Y2 and L1 = L2
125
' L2 F2 r12
\ DL µ Þ 'L =
F
r2 1 F1 r22
Y, B and h decreases with the increase of temperature.

The restoring torque produce in a wire having twist q is,
SK r 4 T
t= l = length of the wire.
2l
(21) The potential energy of the molecule of air, U = M6 12 where M and N are constants. The
N
r r
potential energy in the equilibrium position ...... .
(A) 0 (B) N (C) M (D) MN

2 2 2
4M 4N 4
(22) The poissons ratio of an object is 0.1. The longitudinal strain of a rod made from this object is
103 . The percentage change it its volume is ...... .
(A) 0.008 % (B) 0.08 % (C) 0.8 % (D) 8 %
(23) The poissons ratio of an object is 0.5. The tensile strain is due to this force of 2 ×103. The
percentage change in the volume ...... .
(A) 2 % (B) 2.5 % (C) 5 % (D) 0 %
(24) The ratio of diameters of two wires of same length and same meterial is 2 : 3. Both are given
same tension then the ratio of their potential energy per unit volume is ...... .
(A) 2 : 3 (B) 81 : 16 (C) 9 : 4 (D) 16 : 81
(25) What would be the potential energy per unit volume of a wire having tensile strain 20 Nm2 ?
Y = 2 × 10" Pa
(A) 0.5 × 1011 Jm3 (B) 109 Jm3 (C) 109 Jm3 (D) 2 × 109 Jm3
Ans. : 21 (C), 22 (B), 23 (D), 24 (B), 25 (C)
Fluid pressure
fluid pressure P =
F
A
1 Pa = 1 Nm2
1 atm = 1.013 ×105 Pa
1 bar = 105 Pa
1 torr = 133.28 Pa = 1 mm-Hg
1 atm = 76 cm of Hg = 760 mm-Hg
Thrust on the Liquid :
The total force acting on the surface of the liquid by the liquid is called thrust of the liquid.
126
Pressure due to fluid column : Pa
P Pa = hrg (gauge pressure)
Total Pressure P = Pa + hrg P h
density
of the r
liquid
Pascals law : Pressure in an incomperssible fluid in equilibrium W = mg

F1
is the same everywhere, if the effect of gravity is neglected. m
Principle of Hydraulic press :
P=
F1
= 2
F a A
F2
a A
but 1 = A
F W
a
Where A >> a then F1 << W and F2 = W
Archimedes Principle :
When a body is partially or fully immersed in a liquid the buoyant force acting on it, is equal to
the weight of the liquid displaced by it and it acts in the upward direction at the centre of mass of the
displaced liquid.
[Fb = Vfrfg].
Law of floatation :
Weight of body W = weight of the liquid displaced by the part of body immersed.
Mg = mg (M = Mass of flowting body Vsrs,
Vsrsg = Vf rf g m = Mass of the desplaced liquid = Vfrf)
Us Vf
Uf = Vs
This relation is also true for accelerated fuel
Weight force W, Fb - buoyant force.
W > Fb, the body sinks in the liquid
W < Fb, the body floats on the Liquid surface.
W = Fb, the body can remain in equilibrium at any depth in liquid.
Note :
Body is sink in accelerated fluid at that point buoyant force will be upward direction is called

buoancy centre.
For the symmetrical solid body the centre of buoancy is its centre of gravity.
When the centre of gravity and centre at buoancy are on the same line, the solid would be in the
equilibrium.
For non-symmetrical body both the centres are not lying on the same line. As a result, the
resultant torque acts on the body and the body will perform rotational motion.
(26) Two objects having different mass are attached at both end of the balance. Where this balance
immersed in the water then it is in balanced position. If mass of one object is 36g and its density
is 9 g cm3. Find density of second object having mass 72 g.
(A) 3 gcm3 (B) 3 gcm3 (C) 1.8 gcm3 (D) 5 gcm3
4 2
(27) An object having density 4 kg m3 in a medium having density 1 kg m3 is in equilibqium with an
object having density 8 kg m3 and weight 10 N. Find actual mass of an object. (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 10 kg (B) 8 kg (C) 4 kg (D) 6 kg
7 3 7
127
(28) A cubical tank is completely filled with water is fixed on a trolly.
If this tank is acclerated with (a). then, P R
a
(i) Pressure at ...... point is maximum
Q S
(ii) Pressure at ...... point is minimum
(A) (i) Q (ii) R (B) (i) S (ii) R (C) (i) Q (ii) S (D) (i) Q (ii) P
(29) liquid
Height of mercury in both arm of manometer (U tube) is
glycerin h
20 cm same. Glycerin having density 1.3 gcm3 and height of 20 cm
is entered in one arm of a tube. Find the height of a liquid
having density 0.8 gcm3 entered in other arm of manometer
Hg
so that free end of both liquid in manometer remains same.
(rHg = 13.6 g cm3)
(A) 10 cm (B) 8 cm (C) 16 cm (D) 19.2 cm
(30) A wooden raft having mass 120 kg having density 600 kgm3 floats on surface of water. Find the
maximum mass placed on the raft so that it sinks in the water. (g = 10 ms2)
(A) 80 kg (B) 50 kg (C) 60 kg (D) 30 kg
D
(31) A semisphere bowl having density 3 × 104 kgm3 is float on d
the surface of liquid. Density of liquid is 1.8 × 103 kgm3. If
outer diameter of a bowl (D) is 1m. Find internal diameter
r
(d) of bowl.
(A) 0.94 m (B) 0.97 m s
(C) 0.98 m (D) 0.99 m
(32) A sphere of radius (r) is filled with dust of unknown substance as shown in figure and concrete
is filled in remaing part of the sphers of radius R. Specific density of concrete and unknown
substance are 2.5 and 0.5 respectively. When this sphere is placed in water then it is just sink
in water find the ratio of mass of concrete and unknown substance.
unknown substance (density = r2)
R
Water r Concrete (density = r1)
density = s

(A) (B) (C) (D) 3

3 5 1
5 3 3
(33) A cubical block floats on surface of liquid such that half of its volume is in the liquid if a
container accelerated in upward direction with accelaration , then ...... part of a block inside
g
4
the water.
(A) 2 (B) 8 (C) 3 (D) 4

1 3 2 3
128
(34) As shown in the figure, a liquid of density 2d filled up to height 2 and a liquid of density d filled
H
up to height . If a cylinder having crosss sectional area and length (L) (Where L < ) is
H A H
placed in the container as shown in figure. Find density of the cylinder (D). (atmospheric
2 5 2
pressure = P0).
(A) d d
5
4 A
H 5
L
2
(B) d
4
5
L
(C) d 4
2d
H
2
(D)
d
5 Frog
(35) A cubical block is partially immersed in water as shown
in the figure. A frog is placed on the surface of block.
l Depth of a block in side the water is l. If a frog jumped
to water than ......
h (A) l decreases and h increase
(B) l increases and h decrease
(C) l and h both increases
(D) l and h both decreases
(36) An oil having density 0.8 gcm3 is filled in upper part

of a mercury having density 13.6 gcm3 as shown
Oil
in figure. If a sphere remains in equilibrium such that
its half part in the liquid and half part in the mercury.
Density of material of a sphere is ......
mercury
(A) 3.3 (B) 6.4
(C) 7.2 (D) 12.8
(37) A rod having density (r) is kept in a huge tank filled

Q
with liquid having density (r0) then it remains
equilibrium at an angle q with bottom of container.
R If depth of liquid in a tank is L2 then ......
FB L
S U0 1 U0
(A) sin q = (B) sin q = .
1
2 U 2 U
W U0 U0
P q (C) sin q = (D) sin q =
U U
129
(38) Weight of an object in air is 250 g, in water is 200 g and in liquid is 150 g then ......
(A) density of liquid is one forth of the density of object (B) Object will floats on surface of wator
(C) density of an object is 5 gcm3 (D) density of liquid is 2 kg m3
(39) A rectangle block having mass (m) and area of cross-section A is totally immersed in liquid
having density (r). If it is slightly displaced from its equilibrium then it starts oscillation with
periodic time (T). Then ...... .
1
(A) T µ (B) T µ (C) T µ (D) T µ
1 1
A U m
U
Ans. : 26 (C), 27 (D), 28 (A), 29 (D), 30 (A), 31 (C), 32 (B), 33 (A), 34 (A), 35 (D), 36 (C),
37 (A), 38 (C), 39 (A)
Streamlines :
Streamlines can never intersect each other.
The tengent drawn at any point represent the direction of velocity of the fluid at that point.
Equation of continuity :
In fluid mechanics equation of continuity represents law of conservation of mass.
v2
A1v1 = A2v2
\ Av = constant v1 A2
\vµ
1
A
Bernoullis equation :
A1
Bernoullis equation for streamline flow which is steady, irrotational, incompressible and
non-viscous.
P1 + rv12 + rgy1 = P2 + rv22 + rgy2

1 1
2 2
P+ rv2 + rgy = constant

1
2
The first term is known as Pressure head

The second term is known as Velocity head and
A
The third term is called Elevation a
v1 ® v2®
Venturie meter :
r
It is used to measure the velocity of

A B throat
the fluid.
r = density of the fluid h
r0 = density of the liquid in the manometer
A = Area of the big cross-section
a = Area of throat r0
130
Velocity at big cross section
2 (U U 0 ) g h
v1 = a
U (A 2 – a 2 )
velocity at throat,
2 (U U0 ) g h
v2 = A
U (A 2 – a 2 )
Torricellis law :
The velocity of the liquid coming out of hole at a depth h from the sarface of the liquid is equal
to the terminal velocity of the freely falling particle from the same height.
2g h where,
v= §A · ( Q A2 << A1) A1 = Area of the free surface of the liquid
2
1– ¨ 2 ¸ » 2g h
© A1 ¹ A2 = Area of the hole
Note :
A person standing close to the moving train may pulled towards the train because the air which
is in contact with the train also move with large velocity. As a result pressure of the air
decreases. Due to the pressure difference the person may pulled towards the train.
Blowing off roots by wind storms.
During a tornado, when a high speed wind blows over a straw, it creates a low pressure. The
pressure below the roof is high. As a result, the roof is lifted up and is then blown off by the
wind.
(40) An incompressible liquid flows in the A

v2 = 2.5 ms1
horizontal plane, in Y shape joint of a
pipe. What would be the velocity of
the liquid at crossectional area 2.5 A,
as shown in the figure ? A
v1 = 6 ms1
(A) ms1 (B) 1.5 ms1
5
7 2.5 A
(C) ms1 (D) 2.25 ms1

7
5 v=
(41) A square hole of side L is sitauted at depth (y) from the top of water tank and a circular hole of
radius R is at depth (4y). When a tank is completely filled with water then the amount of a water
comes out per second in both holes. Radius R = ...... .
(A) L (B) 2 p L (C) 2S (D)

L L
2S
131
(42) Water flows in downward direction in a tabe as shown in figure. Internel A1
diameter at top is 12 × 103 m. Speed of water at bottom is 0.6 ms1.
Find internal diameter of that at a distance 2 × 101 m from the top. v1
(g = 10 m s2)
(A) 5 × 103 m (B) 7.5 × 103 m A2
v2
(C) 9.6 × 103 m (D) 6.4 × 103 m
(43) A liquid flows in a tube having length (l) and radius (r) under the plessure difference P, at a rate
of constant volume. (V = volume of liquid). Volume of liquid in a tube having redius 2r is joined
with this tube is ...... (Pressure at series connection both tube is P = constant)
(A) (B) (C) (D)
V V 16 V 17 V
16 17 17 16
(44) Streamline flow of water comes out from the tap, makes a coloum
with continously decrease in cross-sectional area. True explanation of
this statement is ...... .
(A) As the water is coming down its speed is increase so due to
decrease in pressure the atmospheric pressure decreases hence the Water
coloumn of water decreases.
(B) To achive terminal velocity, water comes out reduces its area of coloumn and balance
upward and downward force.
(C) Mass of water at any cross-section is same and water is incompressible. Thus rate of its
volume remains same volume V = Av = constant therefore area dereases due to increares in
speed.
(D) Water beam becomes nerrow due to surface
tension.
(45) A container filled with water is placed on
frictionless horizontal surface. Two holes having
same diameter are in opposite side. If height 10 cm
difference between the holes is 10 cm and area of
cross-section is 0.2 cm2 find the horizontal froce
required to keep container in equilibrium ...... .
r
(g = 1000 cms2)
(A) 2000 dyne (B) 105 dyne (C) 4000 dyne (D) 5 × 104 dyne
(46) A cylinder filled with liquid perform rotational motion about a vertical rotational axis passing
through its base. Liquid experience upward force near to the wall. If radius of a cylinder is
5 cm and angular speed is 1 rotation/sec. find the height difference of liquid at the centre and
at the wall. (g = 1000 cms2)
(A) 5 p2 (B) 0.05 p2 (C) 0.5 p (D) 10 p
132
(47) A cylinder filled with liquid performs motion about its axis then liquid experience upward force
near to the wall. If the height difference of liquid near the wall and at the centre is 2.0 cm
then ...... is correct. (r = 0.04 m , w = 2 rps, g = 10 ms2, p2 = 10)
(A) liquid comes out from the cylinder (B) a liquid does not cames out from the cylinder
(C) liquid just comes out time the cylirder (D) None of these.
(48) Two capillary having same radius and same length are kept on horizontal table. when same
pressure difference is applied at both end then rate of flows of fluid is x. If both tubes are joined
in series and same pressure difference is applied then rate of flow in this combination is ...... .
x
(A) (B) x (C) 2x (D) non of these
2
Ans. : 40 (C), 41 (D), 42 (D), 43 (B), 44 (C), 45 (C), 46 (B), 47 (B), 48 (A)
Viscosity :
Laminar flow : Different layers slide over each other with out getting mixed up in a steady flow,
such flow is known as laminar flow.
Viscous force :
F = h A dx
dv
So,
A = area of contact
\ F µ A dx
dv
= velocity gradient
dv
dx
hliquid > hgas h = Co-efficient of viscousity
hliquid ® decrases with increase
in temperature
® hgas increase with increase in temperature.
Stokels law : A resistive force on a small smooth, spherical, solid body of radius (r) moving with
velocity (v) through a viscous medium of large dimention having co-efficient of viscousity (h) is given by
F(v) = 6 phrv.
F(v) µ v
This force is velocity dependent force.
Terminal velocity (vt) : When weight (W) = buoyort fore (Fb) + viscous force (Fv), the resultant force
on the sphere is zero and sphere travels with constant velocity. This velocity is known as terminal
velocity (vt).
2
terminal velocity vt = 2 r g
9 K
(r r0) r = density of sphere, r0 = dencity of liquid
Poiseiulles law : Volume of the liquid passing through the tube in one second is
S P r4
V = 8K l
133
r
Velocity of a layer situated at distance (x) x
from the axis of tube is v = 4K l (r2 x2)

P
Where P = Pressure difference l

h = co-efficient of viscousity
Here, NR is dimension less.
Reynolds Number where r = density
v = velocity If, NR < 2000 Þ Streomline flow
UvD
NR = K h = co-efficient of vescousity 2000 < NR < 3000 Þ flow is unstable
D = diameter of a b tube NR > 3000 Þ flow is turbulent
(49) A square plate of length 0.1 m slides on other plate with speed 0.1 ms1. If viscous force is
0.002 N and co-efficient of viscosity is 0.01 poise. The thickness of a liquid layer between two
plates is ...... m.
(A) 0.1
v (B) 0.05
(C) 0.005
(D) 0.0005
v0 = 0
(50) A sphere of radius r and density r falls freely
from height 10 cm. Another sphere of same
material falls freely from height h. h cm
10 cm
Radius of other sphere is 2r. If both sphere
maintain their velocity in water then h = ......
(A) 80 cm (B) 40 cm Water
(C) 160 cm (D) Insufficient Information
(51) A small solid sphere acquires terminal velocity in viscous medium match the colour :
A B
(a) Buoyant force acts on sphere (i) Increares
(b) viscous force on sphere (ii) decreases
(c) Resultant force on the sphere (iii) constant
(d) acceleration of a sphere (iv) zero
(A) (a) ® (iii), (b) ® (i), (c) ® (ii), (d) ® (iv) (B) (a) ® (i), (b) ® (ii), (c) ® (iii), (d) ® (iv)
(C) (a) ® (ii), (b) ® (i), (c) ® (iii), (d) ® (iv) (D) (a) ® (iv), (b) ® (ii), (c) ® (iii), (d) ® (i)
134
(52) A small sphere of radius r moving with terminal velocity in liquid having viscous co-efficient h
the ...... is true.
Km g
(A) vr µ (B) vr µ mgrh (C) vr µ r K (D) vr µ
m gr mg
K r
Ans. : 49 (D), 50 (C), 51 (A), 52 (C)
Surface tension, surface energy and capillarity

Cohesive force : The inter molecular attractive force between the molecules of same substance is
called cohesive force.
Example :
(1) It is difficult to seperat two glass plate stic with water
(2) It is difficult to divided a mercury drop in many droplets.
Adhesive force :
The attractive force between the molecules of different substance is known as adhesive force.
(1) We can write on board
(2) Adhesive force between brick and cement.
Surface tension :
The force exerted by the molecule lying on one side of an
imaginary line of unit length, on the molecules lying on other
side of the line which is perpendicular to the line and parallel
to the surface is define as the surface tension (T) of a
liquid.
Surface of liquid has a tendency to contrac due to surface
tension.
Some interesting phenomencn based on surface tension :
Example :
Water droplets are spherical
When shaving brush or painting brush is dipped within the water hairs are well seperated, but
when the brush is taken out of the water, hairs get stick with each other.
some insects can walk on water sarface.
Surface energy :
The potential energy stored per unit area in free surface of liquid is known as surface energy
unit : J m2 or erg cm2
Surface tension :
T = 'A
W

Work done to increase the unit surface area is equal to the measure of surface tension.
135
Angle of contact :
Point of contact The angle between the tangent to the liquid
surface at the point of contact and solid
surface inside the liquid is called angle of
contact.
q
q q = angle of contact
Water drops and bubbles :

(1) A bubble in air.
Pressure differce = Pi P0.
\ Pi = pressure in side the bubble
P0 = pressure out side the bubble
Suppose the bubble is devided into two r
semi spheres as shown in the figure.
Here there are two free surface (inside and outside)
Force F = T × 2 (2pr) .............................. (1) (bubble has two free surface)
and force due to excess pressure is
F = (Pi P0) pr2 ............................ (2)
compare (1) and (2)
(Pi P0) = 4rT

(2) bubble inside the liquid
(Pi P0) = 2rT (It has one free surface)
(3) For water drop :
Pi P0 = 2rT (It has one free surface)
(4) bubble having charge

Radius of a bubble increase when charge deposite on its surface.
Initial pressure inside the bubble
P i = P0 + r
4T
1
P0
V2 P0
P0 + r
4T

4T
P0 + r
1 2 0
r2
2
r1
136
final pressure inside the bubble
V
Pi = P 0 + r 2
2
(s = surface charge density)
4T
2 0
If tempereture remains constant according to Boyles law

§ 4T · 4 § 4 T V2 · 4
¨ P0 r ¸ pr1 = ¨ P0 r – 2 ¸ pr23
3
© 1 ¹ 3 © 2 0 ¹ 3
radius (r2) can be calculated from alove equation.

Capillarity
The phenomenon of rise or fall of a liquid in a capillary held vertically in a liquid is called
capillarity.
Angle of contact q < 90°, meniscus concave, water wets the surface, water rise in capillary.
q < 90° q > 90°

q
(fig. A) (fig. B)
Angle of contact q > 90°, Meniscus convex, liquid (mercury) doesnot wet the surface liquid
falls in the capillary.
Equation of height :
Excess Pressure = Pressure due to liquid coloum.
= hrg
2T
R O
R
T = =Surface tension r
(but Cos q = )
r
R R = radius of meniscus q
h
\ h = RU g
2T r = radius of capillary
h = height of the liquid column
2 T cos T
\ h = r Ug r = density of liqnid
q = angle of contact
(1) q < 90° ® h is positive
liquid will rise up.
(2) q > 90° ® h is negative.
liquid will fall down
(3) If q, T, r is constant
hµ
1
r
137
(4) For two coaxial tubes having radius r1 and r2 (Inner tube is solid)
h = ( r r )Ug
2T
2 1
r1
r2
Cross-section of the tube
(53) n water droplets of radious (r) are unite to form a big drop of radious (R) then increase in
tempereture is ...... ( T = Surface tension, specific density of water = 1 unit)
(A)
2T
rJ
(B)
3T
J 1r R1 (C)
–3 T
rJ
(D)
3T
J 1r R1
(54) Radins of the arms of U-tabe are r1 and r2. The height difference of r1 r2
a liquid having density (r) filled in the tube is h. If angle of contact

q = o, then surface tension T = ...... . h
Ughr1 r2 Ugh ( r2 – r1 ) h1
(A) 2( r – r ) (B) 2 r1 r2
h2
2 1
2 ( r2 – r1 ) Ugh
(C) Ugh r r (D) 2( r – r )
1 2 2 1
(55) Surface energy of a liquid drop is u. If it divided in to 512 equal droplets, then total surface
energy of all droplets are ......
(A) u (B) 8u (C) 64 u (D) 512 u
(56) Two bubble of soap solution are combine and form a big bubble. If V = change in volume inside
the bubble, S = change in area then which of the following is true. (P0 = atmospheric pressure,
T = Surface tension.)
(A) 3P0V + 4ST = 0
a
b
(B) 4P0V + 3ST = 0
(C) P0V + 4ST = 0

c
(D) 4P0V + ST = 0
(57) Find the work required to be done to double the diameter, of the bubble of soap solution form in
air, T = surface tension = 30 dyne cm1
(A) 360 p (B) 720 p (C) 90 p (D) 180 p
138
(58) 1000 mercury droplets are unite to form a big drop of radius R. The ratio of total surface energy
of all droplets to the surface energy of big drop is ......
(A) 1 : 10 (B) 10 : 1 (C) 100 : 1 (D) 1 : 100
(59) Two soap bubble of radius 1 cm and 2 cm are combine and form a big bubble. If tempereture
remains constaund during this process. than radius of big drop is ...... .
(A) 2.4 cm (B) 1.5 cm (C) 1.1 cm (D) 0.66 cm
(60) A capillary of radius 0.2 mm held vertical in a container filled with water. Find the pressure
applied on a capillary so that water level in capillary is same as the water surface in cantainer (T
= 0.07 Nm1, atmospheric pressure P = 105 Nm2).
(A) 103 (B) 99 × 103 (C) 100 × 103 (D) 101.4 × 103
(61) When an air bubble rises from bottom of a lake to surface of lake, its volume increases by four
times. If 75 cm of mercury coloum producer atmosphere depth of a lake is ...... m. (density of
water is one tenth of that of mercury)
(A) 45 m (B) 7.5 m (C) 22.5 m (D) 12.5 m
(62) When an air bubble rises from bottom of a lake to surface of a lake, its diameter becomers three
times. Tempereture of a bubble remains same. Barometric height at the surface with respect to
relative density of mercury is ......
(A) 26 s H (B) 26 V (C) 9 s H (D) 9 V

H H
Ans. : 53 (B), 54 (A), 55 (B), 56 (A), 57 (D), 58 (B), 59 (C), 60 (D), 61 (C), 62 (B)
Heat transfer :
Type of heat transfer
(i) Heat conduction (ii) Heat convection (iii) Thermal radiation
Heat (Thermal) conduction :
The flow of heat energy between the adjacent past of a body due to temperaturs difference be-
tween them is called thermal or heat conduction.
The constituent particles in solid vibrate about their mean position, depending on their
temperature and not perfom real linear motion.
Non steady state :
Temperature at every cross section changes with time.
Steady state :
Thermal steady state temperature at every cross-section remain same. Temperature ture
decrease from hot end to cold end.
Remember, temperature of each parts becomes constant but not equal but it is
gradually decresing from hot end to cold end.
Iso - thermal surface :
A surface perpendicular to heat conduction maintain at constant temperature is known as
isothermal surface.
Two isothermal surfaces do not intersect each other.
Shape of isothermal surface depends upon type of heat conduction and shape of a
conductor.
Such isothermal surfaces are perpendicular to the heat conduction.
139
Temperature gradient :
Rate of change of temperature in direction of heat conduction is known as temperature
gradient.
§ ' T · dT
Temperature gradient = –''xT = lim ¨ ¸
' x o0 © ' x ¹ dx
(negative sign indicate that temperature decrease with distance).
unit : C°/m1 or Km1
Heat current
H= = kA
dQ dT
dt dx
ª T2 T1 º
H = kA « »
¬ L ¼
ª T1 T2 º
H= = kA « L »
Q
t ¬ ¼
Amount of heat flows through the conductor in time (t).
ª T1 T2 º
Q = kA « »t
¬ L ¼
k = thermal conductivity, A = area of cross-section, T1 = Temperature at hot end
T2 = Temperature at cold end, L = length of a conductor = Thickness of bottom of a container.
Thermal conductivity (k) :
Amount of heat flowing per unit time perpendicularly between the planes having unit
temperature gradient between then per unit area is known as thermal conductivity.
MKS unit : cal s1 m1 K1 or Wm1 K1. Dimensional formula : M1L1T3K1
Thermal resistance R = k A =
L T1 – T2
H
MKS unit : KsJ1 or K watt1. Dimensional formula : M1L2T3K1
A compound slab can be obtained by fusing two slabs having different thermal condctirity.
Following two types of connections are possible.
(1) Series connection : T
Parallel connection
T
1 2
L1 L2
k1 k2
T1 T2 A1
k1
Tx
Q Q
t t
Rs = R1 + R2
A2
k2
1 § L1 L 2 ·
= ¨ ¸
A © k1 k2 ¹
T2
T1 L
140
For series connection Rs = R1 + R2
§ L1 L 2 ·
¨ ¸ =
L1 L2
+ k A For parallel connection Rp
© sk A ¹ k1 A 2
L1 L 2
\ ks = L R p = R1 + R 2
1 1 1
2
1 L
k1 k2
k1 A 1 k2 A 2
If : L1 = L2 = L = L1
+ L2
2k1k2
ks = k k = L (k1A1 + k2A2) (\ L1 = L2 = L)
1 1
1 2 Rp
L
For n slabs \ Rp = k1 A k2 A 2
1
L1 L 2 ........ L n
ks = kp (A1 A 2 ) = k1 A1 k2 A 2
L L
..... n
L1 L2 L
k1 k2 kn
k1 A 1 k2 A 2
\ kp = A1 A 2
If A1 = A2 = A
k1 A k2 A
kp =
2A
k1 k2
kp =
2
For n - slabs
k1 A1 k2 A 2 ........ kn A n
kp = A1 A 2 ...... A n
Phenomeon of formation of ice in a lake :

Thickness of ice level increase from x1 to x2 time
where, r = density of water
1 UL
t= (x22 x12) L = latent heat of water
2 kT
k = thermal conuctivity
\ t µ (x22 x12) T = negative temp of atmosphere
Remember :
A compound slab can be divided in series connection and parallel connection.
If every point on the contact surface are at same temperature then they are connected in series.
If temperature at every point on the contact surface continously decreases from hot end to
cold end then they are connected in parallel.
141
(63) A cylindrical shell having thermal conductivity (k) is fixed on a cylinder having radius r and
thermal condutivity 2k. Internal and outer radius of shell is r1 and r2 respectively. Temperature at
both ends are T1 and T2 (Where T1 > T2). Find equivailent thermal conductivity ?
k2 2r
T1 r T2
k1
L
(A) 5 (B) 4 (C) 4 (D) 3
4k 5k 3k 4k
(64) Internal and outer radius of a cylindrical shell are 2 cm and 4 cm respectively. Length of a
cylinder is 50 cm. Temperature at internal surface and outer surface are T1 = 0°C and
T2 = 200°C remains constant. Thermal conductivity is 69.3 Wm1K1. Calculate the rate of heat
flow perpendicular to outer and inner surface.
dr
r2
r
r1
(A) 2.72 ×104 Js1 (B) 2.72 ×107 Js1 (C) 6.28 ×104 Js1 (D) 6.28 ×107 Js1
(65) A compound slab is shown in figure. Temperature at top and botton are T1 and T2 respectively.
Find equivalant thermal conduetivity k (Where T1 > T2) Dimensions of each block are show in
figure.
x T1 T1 T1
k2
k1
k4
2x
k3
x
T2 T2 T2
x 2x x
( k1 k4 ) ( k2 k3 ) 4 k2 k3 k1 k2 k3 k4
(A) 4( k2 k3 )
(B)
3
4k1k4 (k2 k3 ) (k1 k4 )

(C) (D) non of the above
2k2 k3
142
(66) Calculate the equivalent thormal conductivity of a compound slab shown in figure (Where T1 > T2)
(3)
(1) 2x
T2
2k
k
T1 x
x
T2
k
T1 2k (2) (4)
x x
20 k 40 k 3k
(A) 3k (B) (C) (D)
27 27 2
(67) A spherical thermocol container contains 10 kg ice. Internal and outer radius of a container are
25m and 30m respectively. 335 kJ heat energy is required to melt 1 kg of ice. Thermal
conductivity of thermocol is 0.028 Jm1K1s1. Consider walls of container in thermal steady state.
Calculate the time in which half of the ice melts ?
(A) 90 h (B) 3800 s. (C) 9000 s. (D) 20 h.
(68) The dimensions of the celling of a room are 5 m×5 m×10 cm. Thermel conductivity of concrete is
1.26 W/m°C. At one moment, the temperature outside and inside the room are 44°C and 32°C
respectively. A layer of thermocol of thickness 5 cm and thermal conductivity 0.0275 W m1°C1
is laid on the ceiling. A layer of bricks of thickness 7.5 cm and thermal conductivity 0.65 W m
1
°C1 laid on the ceiling. Find new rate of heat flow.
(A) 155.8 Js1 (B) 20.337 Js1 (C) 0.924 Js1 (D) 0.0064 Js1
(69) Five rods of different material but having same dimensions are connected as shown in figure. If
heat current in rod CD is zero find thermal conductivity of rod AD. C
k1 k2
k1 = 370 Wm1K1 (Copper)
k2 = 320 Wm1K1 (Gold) A k5 B
k4 = 16 Wm1K1 (Steel) k3 k4
k3 = ? D
(A) 74.00 (B) 13.83 (C) 18.5 (D) 185
(70) The thickness of ice layer on the surface of lake is 8 cm. Temperature of environment is 12°C
find the time require for the thickness of ice layer becomes 15 cm. Thermal conductivity of ice
0.004 cal K1cm1s1, density of ice 0.92 g cm3, latent heat of fusion is 80 cal g1.)
(A) 21.4 h (B) 34.3 h (C) 27.7 h (D) 4.4 h
Ans. : 63 (B), 64 (C), 65 (A), 66 (C), 67 (D), 68 (A), 69 (C), 70 (B)
143
Heat convection
The transfer of heat, due to the difference in the density of fluid is callled heat convection.
Here, the constituent particles actually move from one place to the other.
In heat transfer occurs on the earth, the maximum contribution is of heat convection only.
Natural heat Convection
Langmuir - Lorentz law

dT
= k' T Ts 4
5
Where, T = temperature of the system
dt
Ts = temperature of surrounding
k' = proportionality constant
Forced heat Convection
Newtons Law of cooling
k' = propertionality Constant
= k' (TTs)
dT
dt
Thermal Radiation
Every substance emitts electromagnetic radiation of difinate frequencies in accordance with its
temperature.
Thermal radiations are electromagnetic waves only, they travel with the speed of light, in free space.
The medium is not required for their propagation.
Perfect Black Body :
The body which absorbs all the radiant energy incident on it is called a perfect black body. e.g. Sun.
The good absorber of heat is also good reflector of heat.
When a black body is heated upto certain high temperature it emitts all wave lengths.
Total emissive Power
The amount of radient energy emitted per unit area per second, at a given temperatue, is called
total emissive power (W)
Its unit is : Wm2

radient energy absorbed
absorptivity (a) =
radient energy incident
Total emissive power of the body

emissivity (e) =
emissive power of the black body at the same temp.
For perfect black body a = 1 and e = 1
Kirchhoffs law :
The values of emissivity and absorptivity are equal for every surface.
144
Steafan - Boltzmans law
The total emissive power of the body is directly propotional of forth power of its absolute
temperature. Where s = 5.67 ×108 Wm2K4
W µ T4 s = Steafan Boltzmans constant
dimenssional formula = M1L0T3K4
\W=esT 4
The rate of loss of heat due to radiation Where T = temperature of the system
Ts = temp of the surrounding
= e s A (T4 Ts4)
dQ
dt
Wiens Displacement Law

With the increase in temperature, the wavelength lm corresponding to maximum value Wl
decreases. Where k = wiens constant
\ lmT = constant (k) k = 2.89 × 103 mK
The D.F. of the constant : M0L1T0K1

(71) The temperature of the body decreases from 90°C to 74°C in 4 min. The temperature becomes
62°C in 8 min. What would be the tempereture of the body at the end of 20 min ?
(A) 36.4 °C (B) 42.4 °C (C) 38.4 °C (D) 40.4 °C
(72) The temperature of a liquid at 100 °C is in contact with the atmosphere having temperature
10 °C. What would be the time require to decrease the temperature of the liquid to 82 °C.
Constant k' = 0.01234567 °C-1/4 min1.
(A) 18 min (B) 9 min (C) 6 min (D) 12 min
(73) Calculate the change in the wavelength corrosponding to the maximum energy for the perfect
black body whose temperature is increased by 30 %.
(A) 8100 % increase (B) 8100 % decrease (C) 30 % decrease (D) 30 % increase
(74) On decreasing the temperature of a perfect black body, the decrease in the wavelength
corresponding to its maximum energy is 20 %. What would be the percentage change in the
power emitted ?
(A) increases by 316 % (B) decreases by 316 % (C) increases by 416 % (D) decreases by 416 %
(75) What would be the percentage change in the temperature of a perfect black body to decrease its
emissive power by 25 %.
(A) decrease by 30 % (B) decrease by 7 % (C) increase by 7 % (D) increase by 30 %
(76) What would be the percentage change in the emissive power of a perfect black body on
increasing its temperature by 3 times ?
(A) 8100 % (B) 800 % (C) 81 % (D) 8000 %
(77) The temperature of a cup of hot milk decreases 3.65 times faster at temp 360 K than at 320 K
by 1°C. Consider milk as a perfect black body and calculate the temperature of the room.
(A) 310 K (B) 273 K (C) 285 K (D) 300 K
Ans. : 71 (D), 72 (C), 73 (C), 74 (A), 75 (B), 76 (D), 77 (D)
145
(78) Assertion : The length of a rubber string is L. On appling the tensile force of 5N and 6N the
length becomes a and b respectively. When 9N force is applied the length becomes (a + b L) m.
Reason : Increase in the length of the string is directly proportional to its original length
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(79) Assertion : The graph of stress ® strain for two different type of rubbers are as shown in the
figure. Rubber A is more useful as car tyre than ruber B.
Reason : Ruber A releases more energy than B.
Stress
Stress
A B
Strain Strain
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(80) Assertion : Two wires A and B are of equal material and are also of equal cross-section. The
length of the wire A is double than that of B. The increase in the length of wire A is
double than of B.
Reason : Increasing in the length is directly proportional to the original length.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(81) Assertion : Two wires A and B are of equal material and are also of equal length. The diameter
of wire A is double than that of B. Now increase in the length of wire B is 4 times
than that of A.
Reason : Increase in the length of the wire is inversely proportional to its cross-sectional area.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d

(82) Assertion : When a tension force is applied on an object, the restoring force is produced due to
the inter molecular force of attraction.
Reason : The restoring force produced is due to the internal property of the object and not due
to intermolecular force of attraction.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
146
(83) Assertion : To maintain a piece of paper floating horizontally in air, we must blow air above the paper
and not below.
Reason : In a steady flow of a fluid, for a given mass, the total energy is conserved.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(84) Assertion : When a fluid is flowing through a small hole of a vessel than the backforce acts on
the vessel.
Reason : For a given mass of fluid the total energy is fully in the form of kinetic energy.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(85) Assertion : The critical velocity of a fluid passing through a tube is inversly proportional to the
radius of the tube.
Reason : The velocity ot the fluid passing through a tube is inversly proportional to the area of
the cross section.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(86) Assertion : To keep a light ball rotating about its own axis in air, the blow of air must be as
shown in the figure.
Reason : Due to the viscosity of air there exsist upward thrust.

(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(87) Assertion : The upward lift of an aeroplane when it moves horizontally, is due to the pressure
difference between over and below the wings.
Reason : The velocity of the air over the wings is more than that below the wings.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(88) Assertion : No force is acting on an object freely falling with its terminal velocity.
Reason : The weight of the object is balanced by the upward buoyant force.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
Ans. : 78 (D), 79 (C), 80 (A), 81 (A), 82 (C), 83 (A), 84 (C), 85 (C), 86 (C), 87 (A), 88 (C)
Comprehension Type Questions
Passage-1
L L
Two conducting rods P and Q are of equal
cross-section area (A) and length (L) are kept between two P Q
rigid walls as shown in the figure. Their linear coefficient of
expansion are a1 and a2 and Youngs modulus are
Y1 and Y2 respectively. The temperature of both the rod
increases by T.
(89) The force exerted by any one rod, on the other is ...... .
TA (D1 D 2 )
(A) F = (B) F = TAY1Y2 (a1+a2)
§ 1 ·
¨ 1 ¸
© Y1 Y2 ¹
(C) F = TA (Y1+ Y2) a1a2 (D) None of the above

147
(90) The new length of the rod P
ª F º ª F º
(A) L1 = L «1 D1 T AY » (B) L1 = L «1 D1 T AY »
¬ 1¼ ¬ 1¼
ª F º ª F º
(C) L1 = L «1 D1 T – AY » (D) L1 = L «1 D1 T – AY »
¬ 1¼ ¬ 1¼
(91) The new length of the rod Q
ª F º ª F º
(A) L2 = L «1 D 2 T AY » (B) L2 = L «1 D 2 T AY »
¬ 2¼ ¬ 2¼
ª F º ª F º
(C) L2 = L «1 D 2 T – AY » (D) L2 = L «1 – D 2 T – AY »
¬ 2¼ ¬ 2¼
Passage-2
One end of a steel rod of length 1m and cross-section area
0.01 cm2 is fixed with a rigid support and a sphere of 2 kg is
attached at the other end. Now as shown in the figure the sphere
is given rotation on the circular path of radius 0.2 m with a
constant angular speed w in such a way that the wire makes an
angle q with vertical line. (q = 30°)
(92) Angular speed w = ......
(A) 5 rad s1 (B) 6.58 rad s1 (C) 5.37 rad s1 (D) 9.30 rad s1
(93) The tension force porduced in the wire is = ......
(A) 23.12 N (B) 40 N (C) 34.6 N (D) 266.5 N
(94) Increase in the length of the wire DL = ......
(A) 4.62 ×1018 m (B) 1.156 ×104 m (C) 2 ×104 m (D) 1 ×104 m
(95) The stress produced in the wire = ......
(A) 20 ×106 N m2 (B) 16 ×106 N m2 (C) 24 ×106 N m2 (D) 4 ×106 N m2
Passage-3
As shown in the figure mass m and M = 2m are tied
to two ends of a wire of cross - sectional area A passed
over a frictionless pulley. Now the system is made free T
T
from the equilibriam. m
(96) The common acceleration of the blocks is = ...... M
(A) g (B) (C) (D)

g 2g 3g
3 3 2
(97) The stress produced in the wire = ......
(A) (B) (C) (D)

Mg 2 mg 3M g 4mg
A 3A 4A 3A
148
(98) If m = 1 kg, A = 8 ×109 m2, Braking Stress = 2 ×109 Nm2 and g = 10 ms2. The maximum
value of M for which the wire does not break is ...... .
(A) 4 kg (B) 6 kg (C) 8 kg (D) 20 kg
Passage-4
When a fluid passes through a tube, there exsist relative velocity between fluid layers. As
a result, resistive force is produced at the surface of layers in contact. This force is called
viscous force. According to Newtons law for Viscous flow, the frictional force F = h A × .
dv
dx
Where A is area of contact between two layers. h is co-efficient of viscocity and dx is

dv
velocity gradient.
(99) If f is the frictional force required for one solid object to move over another solid object and F
is the frictional force acting between two consecutive layers of the liquid then...
(A) f is indepent of the area of contanct between the surfaces of the solids.
(B) f depends on the relative velocity between the solids.
(C) f depends on the area of the liquid layer.
(D) f is independent to the relative velocity between the liquid layers.
(100) The dimenssional formula for the co-efficient of viscosity.

(A) M1L1T1 (B) M1L1T1 (C) M1L2T2 (D) M1L1T2
(101) The depth of a river is 5 m. The velocity of the water at the uppermost layer is 2 ms1. The co-
efficient of viscosity is 103 SI unit. Calculate the viscous force acting per unit area of contact ?
(A) 104 Nm2 (B) 2 × 104 Nm2 (C) 4 × 104 Nm2 (D) 5 × 104 Nm2
Passage-5
Figure shows a cylindrical vessel having cross-

sectional area A. Two non viscous liquid which do not
get mixed are filled in this vessel. The density of the
50 cm
liquid-1
liquids are 0.6 g cm3 and 1.2 g cm3 respectively. The

height of both of the liquid is 50 cm. A small hole is
50 cm
liquid-2 bored on the Surface of the Vessel, at a height of

25 cm 25 cm from the bottom. The cross-section area of the
x
hole a (<<<A).
(102) The initial speed of the liquid coming out of the hole is ...... .
(A) 88.54 cm s1 (B) 62.60 cm s1 (C) 44.27 cm s1 (D) 31.30 cm s
149
(103) The initial horizontal range x of the liquid = ...... .
(A) 100 cm (B) 70.71 cm (C) 50 cm (D) 35.35 cm
(104) The height of the hole required to have maximum range x is ...... cm from the bottom.
(A) 66.66 (B) 150 (C) 75 (D) 50
Passage-6
A cylindrical water-tank of cross-sectional area a1 is open at the top. The height of the water
level in the tank is h. A small hole having cross-section area a2 is at the bottom of this tank,
where a1 = 3a2.
(105) The initial speed of the water falling from the tank.
(A) (B) (C) (D)

gh 1 gh
2 gh gh 2 2
(106) The initial speed of the water coming out at the hole ...... .
(A) (B) (C) (D) 2 2 gh

1 gh 3 gh
2
2 gh 2
(107) The time consumed to empty the tank is ...... .
(A) (B) 4 g (C) 6 g (D) g g

2h h 2h 2h
g
Passage-7
Every substance emits electromagnetic rodiation of definate frequency in accordance

with its temperature. This radiation is known as thermal radiation. The energy associated with
this radiations is called radient energy. The thermal radiation propagates in the frce space or air
with the speed of light. The thermal radiation also experiences reflection and refraction same as
those of light and also produce phenomenons like interference, diffraction and polarization.
The body which absorbs all the radient energy incident on it is called perfect black body.
The radient energy emitted per second through the unit area is
W = sT4 Where, T = temperature of the black body, s = Slefan-Boltzman constant
If the body is not perfect black
W = esT4
e = emissivity of the surface.
150
(108) The dimenssional formula for s.
(A) M1L2T2K4 (B) M1L1T2K4 (C) M1L1T3K4 (D) M1L0T3K4
(109) What is the SI unit of s ?
(A) Js1K4 (B) Wm1K4 (C) Wm2K4 (D) Jm2K4
(110) In which part of the electromagnetic wave the thermal radiations are laying ?
(A) Visible light (B) Infrared (C) Ultraviolet (D) microwave
(111) Which appratus is used to detect thermal radiation.
(A) Constant gas thermometer (B) Platinum resistance thermometer
(C) Thermostate (D) Thermopile
(112) An object B of temp T2 is wound on object A having higher temperature T1. (T2 < T1). The rate
of heat loss for object A is ...... .
(A) T14 (B) (T1 T2)4 (C) T1 T2 (D) T14 T24
Ans. : 89 (A), 90 (C), 91 (C), 92 (C), 93 (A), 94 (B), 95 (A), 96 (B), 97 (D), 98 (D), 99 (A) &
(C), 100 (A), 101 (C), 102 (D), 103 (B), 104 (C), 105 (D), 106 (C), 107 (B),
108 (D), 109 (C), 110 (B), 111 (D), 112 (D)
151
8 Thermodynamics
Thermal Equilibrium
When temperature of system A and system B becomes equal, then heat exchanged between them
becomes zero. It is said that thermal equilibrium has been established between system A and system B.
Zeroth law of thermodynamics
When system A and system B are in thermal equilibrium with a third system C then system A and B
are said to be in thermal equilibrium with each other.
TA = TC ½
° ÞT =T
¾ A B
TB = TC °¿
Thermal Expansion
Thermal Expansion
Linear expansion Surface expansion Volume expansion
(1- dimensional) (2-dimensional) (3-dimensional)
- Change in length takes place. - Change in length and breadth - Change in length, breadth
takes place. and height takes place.
( photographic enlargement)
- Dl = alDT
= 'l DA = bADT DV = g V DT
l 'T
a
'A
a = Coefficient of linear b = A 'T g = 'V
V'T
expansion
Unit : a = °C1 or K1 b = Coefficient of surface g = Coefficient of volume
expansion expansion
b = 2a g = 3a
Unit : °C1 or K1 Unit : °C1 or K1
Percentage change in density due to volume expansion :
U U0 J'T
=
U0 1 J ' T
Relation between different scales of temperature :
(1) Celsius and kelvin : TC = Tk 273
(2) Fahrenheit and celsius : TF = 9

T + 32
5 C
(3) Fahrenheit and kelvin : TF = 9

5
[Tk 273] + 32
Phase diagram :
Graph of P ® T for any substance is called its phase diagram.
152
B Liquid
C
rm form
fo
ve
P lid rve
cur
cu
So ion
ion
at
ris
Fus
po
Va
A
e
rv
cu Triple point Gaseous
n
io
at form
im
ubl
S
O T®
Curve OA : Sublimation curve. Solid and gaseous form coexists.
Curve AB : Fusion curve. Solid and liquid form coexists.
Curve AC : Vaporisation curve. Liquid and gaseous form coexists.
(1) A gas thermometer is used to measure temperature. When it is dipped in water, triple point
temperature is 273.16 K and pressure is 3×104 Nm2. When this gas thermometer is dipped in
some other liquid, pressure indicated is 3.5×104 Nm2 then the new temperature will be ...... .
(A) 54.6 K (B) 45.6 K (C) 54.6 °C (D) 45.6 °C
(2) There are two similar metal strips one of copper and other of brass. Here aB > aC. On
increasing temperature by DT, both strips form an arc of radius R. Then R ...... .
d2 D B DC ' T
(A) d (aB aC) DT (B) D D ' T (C) D D ' T (D)
d
B C B C d2
(3) On adding steam to 100 g water, temperature of water increases from 24°C to 90°C. How much
steam should be added ?
(A) 25 g (B) 12 g (C) 21 g (D) 100 g
(4) In a temperature scale "A", melting point of water is shown as 160° A and boiling point of
water as 50° A then in its scale, temperature 340 K will be shown as ...... .
(A) 86.3 °A (B) +86.3 °A (C) 86.3 °K (D) 86.3 °C
(5) In a thermometer, if melting point of water is 20 °C and boiling point of water is 150 °C then
50 °C will be shown in this thermometer as ...... .
(A) 85 °C (B) 85 °C (C) 58 °C (D) 58 °C
(6) Mass of ice at 20 °C temperature is 1200 g. To completely melt it, how much steam at 100 °C will
be required ?
Here, specific heat of ice S = 0.5 cal g1 °C1
specific heat of water S = 1 cal g1 °C1
Latent heat of ice L = 80 cal g1
Latent heat of steam L = 540 cal g1
(A) 18.75 kg (B) 18.75 g (C) 1.875 kg (D) 1.875 g
153
(7) A copper sphere of mass 1 kg is heated upto 500 °C and then placed on a big piece of ice at
0 °C then how much ice will melt ?
[specific heat of copper S = 400 Jkg1 °C1, latent heat of ice L = 3.5 ×105 Jkg1]
(A) 0.57 kg (B) 570 gm (C) 5.7 kg (D) 57 kg
(8) On heating a metal sphere to temperature 60 °C, its volume increases by 0.12 % then coefficient
of linear expansion of metal wil be ...... .
(A) 6.66 × 106 °C1 (B) 66.6 × 106 °C1 (C) 5.56 × 105 °C1 (D) 55.6 × 106 °C1
(9) Co-ordinate of triple point of water is ...... .
(A) 4.58 mm-Hg, 273.16 K (B) 4.58 mm-Hg, 0 K
(C) 5.58 m-Hg, 273.16 K (D) 5.58 mm-Hg, 0 K
(10) For values of pressure and temperature at triple point, ...... forms of matter coexists in
equilibrium.
(A) Gas and liquid (B) Solid and gas (C) Solid and liquid (D) All three
(11) Relation between temperature in Fahrenheit (TF) and in Celsius (TC) is ...... .
(A) TF = 9 TC 32 (B) TF = 5 TC + 32
5 9
(C) TF = 9 TC + 32 (D) TF = 5 TC 32
5 9
(12) Temperature difference of 10 °C is equal to ...... temperature difference.

(A) 10 °F (B) 20 °F (C) 50 °F (D) 40 °F
(13) Temperature of body of a patient is 40° C. It would be ...... in Fahrenheit scale.
(A) 100 °F (B) 101 °F (C) 102 °F (D) 104 °F
(14) If temperature of a substance changes by 20° C then change in kelvin scale will be ...... .
(A) 293 K (B) 20 K (C) 293 °F (D) 20 °C
(15) Ice at 5 °C temperature is heated slowly till it converts into steam at 100°C. Which of the
following graph shows this entire process ?
(A) (B)
Temperature
Temperature
Heat Heat
(C) (D)
Temperature
Temperature
Heat Heat
Heat on X-axis Temperature on Y-axis
154
(16) A metal sphere of radius R and having specific heat S is rotating with angular speed
f rotation/sec about an axis passing through its centre. Now, on stopping it suddenly, its 50 %
energy is used in increasing its temperature then the equation giving increase in temperature of
sphere will be DT = ...... .
S R2 f 2 S2 R f S2 R 2 f 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2 S 2 2 2
5 S2 R 2 f 2 5 S 5 S2 5 S
(17) Heat capacity of aluminium piece of mass 100 g is ...... . (specific heat S = 0.2 cal g1 °C1)
(A) 4.4 J °C (B) 44 J °C (C) 4.4 J °C1 (D) 44 J °C1
(18) At triple point of water, temperature measured in Celsius scale will be ...... °C.
(A) 0 (B) 273.16 (C) 100 (D) 0.01
(19) At atmospheric pressure, when equilibrium is established between pure water and its vapour,
temperature is taken ...... K.
(A) 100 (B) 273.15 (C) 373.15 (D) 273.16
(20) Value of absolute zero temperature in fahrenheit scale is ...... °F.
(A) 0 (B) 273.15 (C) 459.67 (D) 356.67
(21) At which temperature does value on °C scale and °F scale becomes same ?
(A) 0 (B) 40 (C) 40 (D) 32
(22) At which temperature density of water is maximum ?
(A) 32 °F (B) 39.2 °F (C) 42 °F (D) 4 °F
(23) At which temperature does coefficient of volume expanssion of water becomes zero ?
(A) 0 °C (B) 4 °C (C) 15.5 °C (D) 100 °C
(24) Ratio of heat required to raise temperature of two copper spheres of radii R1 and R2 by 1K is
...... . Here R1 = 2R2
(A) 27 (B) 8 (C) 1 (D) 8

8 27 8 1
(25) A thermodynamic system moves in states (i) from P1, V to 2P1, V and (ii) P1, V1 to P1, 2V1
work done in both cases is ...... .
(A) 0, 0 (B) 0, P1V1 (C) PV1 , 0 (D) PV1 , P1V1
(26) 100 g pure water is heated from 25°C to 50°C temperature. If we neglect expansion of water,
change in internal energy will be ...... .
(specific heat of water = 4184 J kg1 K1)
(A) 1046.00 cal (B) 10460 cal (C) 1046.00 J (D) 10460 J
(27) For isothermal process of an ideal gas, P = ...... .

dP
(A) g V (B) V (C) J V (D) g2 V

dV dV dV dV
155
(28) For adiabetic process of an ideal gar dP = ...... .
P
(A) g V (B) V (C) J V (D) g2 V

dV dV dV dV
(29) Amount of heat required to raise temperature of a substance by 1° C is called ...... .
(A) Water equivalent (B) Heat capacity (C) Entropy (D) Specific heat
(30) Unit of coefficient of linear expansion is ...... .
(A) °C (B) °C1 (C) m °C (D) m °C1
(31) Length of a metal rod is 50 cm. On increasing its temperature by 100 °C, how much increase in
its length takes place ? (for metal, a = 1.1 × 105 °C1)
(A) 5.5 × 102 m (B) 5.5 × 102 cm (C) 5.5 × 103 m (D) 5.5 × 103 cm
(32) Radius of a circular disc made of copper is 10 cm and there is a hole of radius 1 cm at its
center. On heating the dics, area of hole ...... .
(A) increases (B) decreases
(C) does not change (D) hole will be destroyed
(33) 5 mole gas at temperature 20 °C is adiabetically compressed at pressure 1 atm such that its
volume becomes tenth part of its original volume then final temperature is ...... .
(A) 736 K (B) 846 K (C) 736 °C (D) 523.5 K
(34) An ideal gas having volume 3 Litre and pressure 20 atm is isothermally expanded to make volume
24 L. Work required is ...... .
(A) 15600 J (B) 12600 J (C) 13750 J (D) 12.600 J
(35) A crystal has coefficient of linear expansion in one direction as "a" and in all perpendicular
direction coefficient of linear expansion is "b". Then coefficient of volume expansion for this
crystal becomes ...... .
(A) 2a + b (B) a + 3b (C) a + 2b (D) 3a + b
(36) For adiabetic process of an ideal gas, relation between pressure and temerature is ...... .
(A) Pg Tg1 = constant (B) PVg = constant
(C) PV = constant (D) P1g Tg = constant
(37) Dimensional equation of g in equation PV = constant for adiabetic process is ...... .
g
(A) M0L1T1 (B) M1L1T0 (C) M1L0T1 (D) M0L0T0
(38) On adiabetically compressing a gas at 1 atm pressure, its volume becomes half of original volume
then new pressure will be ...... m Hg. [g = 1.4]
(A) (B) 0.76 × (2)1.4 (C) 7.6 × (2)0.4 (D) 0.76 × (2)0.4
0.76
1.4
(2)
(39) Temperature of a substance on kelvin scale is T K and same temperature on fahrenheit scale is
T°F then T = ...... .
(A) 40 (B) 313 (C) 574.25 (D) 301.25
156
(40) Air inside tyre of vehicle has pressure 4 atm and temperature 27 °C. Suddenly tyre bursts, then
new temperature of air becomes ...... . [g = 5 ]

7
–2 –2 2 2
(A) 300 (4) 7 (B) 400(3) 7 (C) 300(4) 7 (D) 400(3) 7
(41) 95 K temperature on kelvin scale is equivalent to ...... on fahrenheit scale.

(A) 288° F (B) 146° F (C) 338° F (D) 178° F
(42) On heating a metal wire, its length increases by 2 % then increase in its area of cross-section is
...... .
(A) 1 % (B) 2 % (C) 3 % (D) 4 %
(43) A glass beaker at 4 °C temperature is completely filled with water and kept in a fridge. Now, its
temperature goes below 4 °C, then ...... .
(A) water will come out.
(B) no change in level of water.
(C) water will go in the beaker.
(D) water will initially go inside and then come out.
(44) A long rod of LA + L B is made by joining rod having length LA and LB of metal A and B
respectively. Coefficient of linear expansion of A and B are aA and aB respectively. When
temperature of rods are increased up to T °C, change in length of every rod is equal, then ratio
LA
L A L B = ...... . (aC acoefficient of combine linear expansion).
DC DA
(A) (B) (C) aA . aC (D) aA + aB
DA DC
(45) Two thermometers-one having celsius scale and other having fahrenheit scale, are kept in a hot
substance showing 212° F temperature. When fahrenheit thermometer shows temperature
140 °C then celsius thermometer will shows decrease in temperature by ...... .
(A) 40° (B) 30° (C) 60° (D) 80°
(46) Length of a metal wire at 30 °C temperature is 30 cm then its length at 10 °C temperature
is ...... .
(a = 11 × 106 °C1 )
(A) 30 cm (B) 29.99 cm (C) 30.10 cm (D) 29.10 cm
(47) Efficiency of carnot engine at temperature (i) 100 K and 500 K and (ii) T K and 900 K are
same. Then value of T = ...... .
(A) 250 K (B) 280 K (C) 200 K (D) 180° K
(48) On increasing temperature of a metal sphere upto 30 °C, its volume increases by 0 0.30 % then
coefficient of its volume expansion (g) will be ...... .
(A) 0.00003 °C1 (B) 0.0003 °C1 (C) 0.0001 °C1 (D) 0.001 °C1
(49) In thermal expansion, ratio of coefficient of linear expansion (a), coefficient of surface expansion (b)
and coefficient of volume expansion (g) is ...... .
(A) 3 : 2 : 1 (B) 2 : 3 : 1 (C) 1 : 2 : 3 (D) 1 : 3 : 2
157
(50) Amount of heat required to convert substance of unit mass from solid state to liquid state at
constant temperature is called ...... .
(A) Heat energy (B) Latent heat of fusion (C) Specific heat (D) Internal energy
(51) Depending on phase diagram, match the following :
Column-1 Column-2
(a) Solid and gaseous form of substance P Sublimation curve
coexists
(b) Liquid and gaseous form of substance Q Fusion curve
coexists
(c) Solid and liquid form of substance R Triple point
coexists
(d) All three forms of substance coexists S Vaporisation curve
(A) a ® S ; b ® R ; c ® P ; d ® Q (B) a ® P ; b ® S ; c ® Q ; d ® R
(C) a ® Q ; b ® P ; c ® S ; d ® R (D) a ® R ; b ® Q ; c ® P ; d ® S
Ans. : 1 (D), 2 (C), 3 (B), 4 (A), 5 (A), 6 (B), 7 (A), 8 (A), 9 (A), 10 (D), 11 (B), 12 (C),
13 (D), 14 (B), 15 (A), 16 (D), 17 (D), 18 (D), 19 (C), 20 (C), 21 (C), 22 (B), 23 (B),
24 (D), 25 (B), 26 (D), 27 (B), 28 (A), 29 (B), 30 (B), 31 (B), 32 (A), 33 (A), 34 (B),
35 (C), 36 (D), 37 (D), 38 (B), 39 (C), 40 (A), 41 (A), 42 (D), 43 (A), 44 (A), 45 (A),
46 (B), 47 (D), 48 (C), 49 (C), 50 (B), 51 (B)
1st law of thermodynamics :

DU = DQ DW
where,
(A) DU = Change in internal energy of system
® depends only on initial and final state of system.
® If temperature of system increases, DU = positive
® If temperature of system decreases, DU = negative
® It is a function depending only on temperature of system
(B) DQ = Change in heat energy of system
® If heat given to system, DQ = positive
® If heat lost by system, DQ = negative
(C) DW = Work done
® If work done by system (its volume increases), DW = positive
® If work done on system (its volume decreases), DW = negative
1st law of thermodynamics for different processes :
(A) Isothermal process :
Temperature remains constant during entire process.
DT = 0 Þ DU = 0
\ 0 = DQ DW
\ DQ = DW
158
Boyle's law : PV = constant
Work done W = SPDV = ³ PdV

§ V2 · § P1 ·
W = mRT ln ¨ V ¸ = mRT ln ¨ P ¸
© 1¹ © 2¹
§ V2 · § P1 ·
= 2.303 mRTlog ¨ V ¸ = 2.303 mRT log ¨ P ¸
© 1¹ © 2¹
(B) Adiabetic Process :

Exchange of heat energy between system and surrounding DQ = 0
DU = DW
\ if work done by system, DU = negative
& if work done on system, DU = positive
Work done W = SPDV = ³ PdV

P1 V1 P2 V2 P R (T1 – T2 )
W= J 1
= J 1
Relation between P, V and T :

1J
PV = constant, TV = constant, TP J = constant
g g1
(C) Isobaric process :

Pressure of system remain constant
DP = 0
(D) Isochoric process :
Volume of system remains constant
DV = 0
\ W = P (DV) = P(0) = 0
\ DU = DQ
(E) For isolated system :
DQ = 0 Þ DU = 0 Þ U = constant
DW = 0
Heat capacity :
'Q cal J
HC = Unit : ;
'T °C K
Depends on type and mass of substance.
Specific heat :
'Q
C= = [for solid and liquid]
HC
m m' T
159
depends only on type of substance
cal ; J
Unit :
g °C kg K
Specific heat of gas at constant volume (CV) :
§ 'Q ·
CV = ¨ P ' T ¸ v = constant =
fR
© ¹ 2
Specific heat of gas at constant pressure (CP) :
§ 'Q · § f ·
CP = ¨ P ' T ¸ P = constant = ¨ 1 2 ¸ R = +R
fR
© ¹ © ¹ 2
Relation between CP and CV :

CP CV = R (for ideal gas)
f2
g= C = =1+ f
CP 2
V f
(52) During a thermodynamic process, 1000 J heat is lost on doing 100 J work. Thus, change in its
internal energy will be ...... .
(A) 900 J (B) +900 J (C) +1100 J (D) 1100 J
(53) In a thermodynamics process, on changing pressure of gas, it releases 200 J heat and
100 J work is done on it. If initial internal energy of system is 10 J then final internal energy
will be ...... .
(A) 290 J (B) 90 J (C) 290 J (D) 90 J
(54) 420 J work is done on a system, then change in its internal energy is ...... cal.
(A) 420 (B) +100 (C) 420 (D) 100
(55) For hydrogen gas, CP = 3400 cal kg1 °C1 and CV = 2400 cal kg1 °C1. Work required to
increase temperature of hydrogen gas from 30° C to 40° C at constant pressure is ...... J if mass
of hydrogen gas is 10 kg.
(A) 100 cal (B) 1000 cal (C) 100000 cal (D) 10 cal
(56) If temperature of 100 m gas at 1 atm pressure is increased from 27° C to 627° C adiabetically,
3
then final pressure will be ...... . (Take g = 1.5)

(A) 27 atm (B) 2.7 atm (C) 270 atm (D) 2700 atm
(57) Heat Q is given to a diatomic (rigid rotator) gas at constant pressure then work done by gas
is ...... .
(A) 3 Q (B) 2 Q (C) 7 Q (D) 2 Q

2 3 2 7
(58) When a system is taken from initial state (i) to find state (f) through path iaf, Q = 500 cal and
W = 100 cal is needed. When system is taken through path ibf, Q = 2000 cal then
W = ...... on path ibf. a
(A) 1400 cal (B) 1900 cal
(C) 1600 cal (D) 1500 cal i f
b
160
(59) For an ideal gas, specific heat at constant pressure is
7
2
R then ratio of specific heats at constant
pressure to that at constant volume is ...... .
(A) (B) (C) (D)

5 7 9 7
7 5 7 9
(60) 5.6 L Helium gas at STP is adiabetically compressed to volume 0.7 L. If initial temperature is
T1 then work done during the process is ...... .
(A) RTl (B) RTl (C) RTl (D) RTl

3 9 8 9
2 2 9 8
(61) During adiabetic process, relation between pressure and volume is P3 µ

1
then ratio of
V4
specific heat is ...... .
(A) 1.80 (B) 1.33 (C) 1.67 (D) 1.42
(62) On expanding 10 mole ideal gas at 100 K constant temperature, its volume increases from
10 L to 20 L. Work done during this process is ....... .
(A) 5763 J (B) 5673 J (C) 57.63 J (D) 567.3 J
(63) Work done during adiabetic compression of 1 kilo mole gas is 146 kJ. During this process, its
temperature increases by 7 °C. This gas will be ....... . (R = 8.3 Jmol1 k1)
(A) Monoatomic (B) Diatomic (C) Triatomic (D) Polyatomic
(64) Coefficient of volume expansion of glycerine is 49×10 °C . On increasing its temperature by
5 1
20 °C, percentage decreases in its density is ...... .

(A) 10 % (B) 0.98 % (C) 1 % (D) 9.8 %
(65) If g is ratio of specific heats and R is gas constant then molar specific heat at constant pressure
CP = ...... .
JR JR
(A) J 1 (B) J 1 (C) J – 1 (D) J – 1
R R
(66) If g is ratio of specific heats and R is gas constant then molar specific heat at constant volume
Cv = ...... .
J 1 J –1
(A) (B) (C) J 1 (D) J – 1
R R
R R
(67) During an adiabetic process, pressure of a gas is directly proportional to cube of its temperature.
Then for this gas g = ...... .
(A) (B) (C) (D)

3 5 7 5
2 3 5 7
(68) 1 mole ideal gas at temperature T1 K does 6R J work adiabetically. If g = 3 then final
5
temperature of gas is ...... .

(A) (T1 + 4) K (B) (T1 4) K (C) (T1 + 8) K (D) (T1 8) K
(69) Latent heat of vaporisation for water is 2240 J. If energy required to vaporize 1 g water is
168 J then change in internal energy is ...... .
(A) 2408 J (B) 2240 J (C) 2072 J (D) 1904 J
161
(70) For cyclic process shown in figure, net heat absorbed
P (N m2)
by system in every cycle is ...... . 4 × 105
(A) 10 p unit
(B) p unit
2 × 105
(C) 100 p unit
(D) p2 unit
V
2 × 102 4 × 102 (L)
(71) In the figure, ideal gas 1 and 2 move from state A to state
1
P B by different path. If change in internal energy for path 1
and 2 are (DUint)1 and (DUint)2 then ....... .
A B
(A) (DUint)1 = (DUint)2
(B) (DUint)1 < (DUint)2
2
(C) (DUint)1 > (DUint)2
V® (D) (DUint)1 = 5 (DUint)2
(72) Which part of graph of P ® V shown in figure represents

1 2
Isothermal process, Isochoric process and Isobaric P
process ...... respectively.
(A) 12 ; 34 ; 23
3
(B) 12 ; 14 ; 34
(C) 23 ; 34 ; 12
4
(D) 34 ; 12 ; 23
V®

(73) P (4P, V) (4P, 4V) For cyclic process in graph of P ® V shown in figure,
4P
work done = ...... .
3P
(A) 2 PV
2P
(B) 4 PV
P (P, 4V)
(P, V)
(C) 9 PV
(D) 6 PV
V 2V 3V 4V
V®
C
(74) As shown in figure, 1 mole He gas experience cyclic
process ABCA. During the process, 1000 J heat is obtained P
from the gas then work done during stage BC is ...... .
(R = 8.3 1 mol1 K1) A B
(A) +3490 J (B) 1490 J TA = 300 k TB = 600 k
(C) 3490 J (D) 1490 J V®
162
(75) Cyclic process of m mole Ar gas is shown in figure.
V(m3)
T2 C Efficiency of thermodynamic process is ...... .
BT1
2
(A) 100 %
(B) 25 %
1 A T2
(C) 75 %
(D) 50 %
5 10
P (N/m2) ®
(76) Which of the following is the graph of b ® P for an ideal gas at constant temperature where b =
compressibility of gas =
d V/ dP
V
.
(A) (B)
b b
P® P®
(C) (D)
b b
P® P®
(77) Liquid O2 at 1 atm pressure is heated from 50 K to 300 K at constant pressure. Rate of heating
is constant. Which of the following shows graph of change in temperature with time ?
(A) B (B)
B
Timperature®
Timperature®
A
A
Time Time ®
C
Timperature®
(C) (D) D
B
B
Timperature®
C
A A
Time ® Time ®
163
(78) 1 mole ideal gas moves from state A to state B by two different ways. Firstly, volume is changed
from V to 3V by isothermal expansion and then volume is decreased from 3V to V at constant
pressure. Which of the following is the graph of P ® V showing these two processes ?
(A) (B)
B A
P P
A B
V V® 3V V V® 3V
(C) (D)
A
A P
P
B
B
V V® 3V
V V® 3V
(79) In the figure, a system moves on path 1-2-1. In the P ® V
graph, different paths are shown such that each time thermal P 1 a
equilibrium is set up between system and environment. During b
which closed path is work done maximum positive ? c
d
(A) 1 b 2 f 1 (B) 1 c 2 e 1
e
(C) 1 d 2 e 1 (D) 1 a 2 f 1 f 2
V®
(80) P For graph of P ® V of a cyclic process, shown in figure,
i=f
change in internal energy of gas DU = ...... and net heat
exchange DQ = ...... .
(A) positive, negative (B) positive, zero
(C) zero, negative (D) zero, positive
V
P (N m2)×104
(81) During cyclic process shown in figure, net heat
A B
absorbed by system per cycle is ...... . 30
(A) 20 × 106 J
(B) 2 × 105 J
(C) 200 × 107 J 10 C
(D) 20 × 107 J
100 300 V (m3)
Ans. : 52 (A), 53 (D), 54 (B), 55 (C), 56 (A), 57 (C), 58 (C), 59 (B), 60 (D), 61 (B), 62 (A), 63 (B), 64
(B), 65 (C), 66 (D), 67 (A), 68 (B), 69 (C), 70 (B), 71 (A), 72 (C), 73 (C), 74 (C), 75 (D), 76
(A), 77 (D), 78 (D), 79 (B), 80 (C), 81 (A)
164
Efficiency of heat engine :
W Q1 - Q2 Q2
h= Q = Q1 = 1 Q1
1
h < 1 (always)
where Q1 = Heat absorbed from heat source at high temperature
Q2 = Heat released in sink at low temperature
Coefficient of performance of refrigerator :
Q2 T2
a= = =
Q2
W Q1 - Q2 T1 - T2
a > 1 but never infinity

where Q1 = Heat released by working substance in surrounding at higher temperature (T1)
Q2 = Heat absorbed by working substance from arrangement at lower temperature (T2)
Efficiency of Carnot engine :
T2 Q2
h=1T = 1 Q
1 1
where T1 = Temperature of heat source

T2 = Temperature of sink
(82) Efficiency of a heat engine is 30 %. During each cycle, difference of heat absorbed and heat
released is 60 J. Then heat absorbed from heat saurce during every cycle, is ....... and that
released in sink is ...... .
(A) 100 J, 63 J (B) 150 J, 65 J (C) 200 J, 63 J (D) 200 J, 140 J
(83) A heat engine absorbs 50 kJ heat from heat source. If its efficiency in 30 % then it releases ......
heat in sink.
(A) 35 kJ (B) 350 kJ (C) 35 J (D) 350 J
(84) If heat engine absorbs 2 kJ heat from heat source and releases 1.5 kJ heat in sink then
efficiency h = ...... .
(A) 5 % (B) 25 % (C) 50 % (D) 2.5 %
(85) A Carnot engine absorbs heat 3×106 cal from heat source at temperature 627 °C and releases
some heat in sink at temperature 27 °C then work done is ...... .
(A) 8.4 × 106 cal (B) 2 × 106 J (C) 8.4 × 106 J (D) 12 × 106 J
(86) Efficiency of a Carnot engine is 40 % and temperature of sink is 400 K. Keeping temperature of
heat source constant, if efficiency is to be made 80 %, temperature of sink should be made ...... .
(A) 300 K (B) 667 K (C) 532 K (D) 133 K
(87) A heat engine works between temperature 227° C and 127° C of Carnot cycle. If it absorbs 6
kJ heat from heat source then it converts ...... heat into work,
(A) 1.2 × 103 J (B) 1.2 × 103 cal (C) 1200 J (D) 1200 cal
165
(88) Efficiency of a heat engine with sink temperature 300 K is 40 %. How much the temperature of
heat source should be increased so as to increase the efficiency by 50 % by keeping sink
temperature constant.
(A) 2500 K (B) 250 K (C) 250 K (D) 200 K
(89) Efficiency of a heat engine is

1
6
. When temperature of sink is reduced by 62 °C, its efficiency
doubles. Temperature of heat source will be ...... .

(A) 37 °C (B) 99 °C (C) 62 °C (D) 52 °C
(90) Efficiency of a Carnot engine is 20 %. It work as heat system for a refrigerator. If 50 J is work
done on the system then how much heat will sink absorb ?
(A) 200 cal (B) 100 cal (C) 200 J (D) 100 J
(91) Coefficient of performance of a refrigerator is a = 5. If it absorbs 120 J heat per cycle from
cold reservoir then how much heat does it release in every cycle to hot reservoir at higher
temperature ?
(A) 96 cal (B) 144 cal (C) 96 J (D) 144 J
Ans. : 82 (D), 83 (A), 84 (B), 85 (C), 86 (D), 87 (A), 88 (A), 89 (B), 90 (C), 91 (D)
(92) Assertion : Its difficult to find reversible process in practice.
Reason : Most of the processes lost on energy.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(93) Assertion : When air comes out of balloon, it feels instantly cool.
Reason : Air experiences adiabetic expansion while coming out.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(94) Assertion : Carnot cycle is useful in understanding efficiency of heat engine.
Reason : It shows probability of obtaining maximum possible efficiency at a given temperature.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(95) Assertion : On cooling milk kept in a glass in a room, its disorderness (entropy) decreases.
Reason : on cooling a hot substance, it does not dissolved. second law of Themodyhamics.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(96) Assertion : Entropy (Disorderness) of an isolated always increases.
Reason : Processes occuring in isolated system are adiabetic.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
166
(97) Assertion : A Temperature on surface of Sun is 6000 K. Now, by focusing sunrays with help
of huge lens, one can obtain 8000 K temperature.
Reason : This temperature can be obtained according to thermodynamics second law.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(98) Assertion : Refrigerator absorb heat from low temperature and releases at high temperature.
Reason : Normally heat can not be flow from high temperature to low temperature.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(99) Assertion : An efficiency of Carnot engine will increase when temperature of sink will decrease.
Reason : h = 1
T2
T1
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d

(100) Assertion : Internal energy of ideal gas depends only on temperature and not on volume.
Reason : Temperature is more important than volume.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(101) Assertion : Internal energy and temperature of system will be decrease in adiabatic
compression process.
Reason : An adiabatic process is very slow process.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(102) Assertion : When a bottle of cold drink like pepsi is opened, some fogg will produced around it.
Reason : As low temperature, gas get adiabatic expansion and vapour of water cools.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
Ans. : 92 (A), 93 (A), 94 (A), 95 (A), 96 (A), 97 (D), 98 (C), 99 (A), 100 (A), 101 (D), 102 (A)
P
Paragraph : (N m2)
A B
A P ®T cyclic process done on 1 mole Ar gas 4 × 105
is shown in figure along path ABCD. D C

2 × 105
O 100 K 200 K 300 K T
(103) Work done to take Ar gas from A to B at constant pressure (4 × 105 N m2) is ...... .
(A) 16628 J (B) 1662.8 J (C) 166.28 J (D) 16.628 J
(104) Work done to take Ar gas from B to C at constant temperature (300 K) is ...... .
(A) 17.29 J (B) 172.9 J (C) 172900 J (D) 1729 J
167
Paragraph : V (c c)
A process ABCA on 1 mole Ar is shown in figure . 400 c c C
(105) Work done during isochoric process AB is ...... .
(A) 0 J (B) 300 J
100 c c A
(C) 100 J (D) 200 J B
(106) Work done during isothermal process BC is ...... . 100 K 400 K

T®
(A) 46.11 J (B) 461.1 J (C) 3586 J (D) 4611 J
(107) Work done during adiabatic process CA is ...... .
(A) 0 J (B) 1000 J (C) 3200 J (D) 2494 J
Paragraph :
Pressure of gas and volume change while heat of gas remain constant. This process is known as
Adiabatic process. For such process PV = constant. Process is very rapid and walls of a system are
g
thermal insulator, so no exchange of heat takes place between system and its environment. For this
changes, DQ = 0 and according to thermodynamics first law DQ = DU + DW = 0 \ DU = DW
Answer the following questions according to above paragraph :
(108) Bicycle's tyre burst suddenly. Changes in air pressure and volume will be ....... .
(A) Isothemal (B) Adiabatic (C) Isobaric (D) Isochoric
(109) The temperature of gas, which is suddenly compressed in system, ...... .
(A) Increase (B) Decrease
(C) Constant (D) Depend on environment temperature
(110) When gas in system is suddenly compressed then internal energy of gas will be ....... .
(A) increase (B) decrease
(C) constant (D) no comment
(111) The specific heat of gas during adiabatic process ...... .
(A) 1 (B) 1 (C) 0 (D) infinite (¥)
Match the columns :
(112) A thermodynamic processes are shown in column-1 and in column-2 equation of work done are
given. Match it appopriately.
Column-1 Column-2
(a) Adiabatic process (P) W=0
P R(T1 T2 )
(b) Isothermal process (Q) W= J 1
§ V2 ·
(c) Isochoric process (R) W = 2.303 mRT log ¨ V ¸
© 1¹
(d) Isobaric process (S) W = P DV

(A) a ® P ; b ® R ; c ® Q ; d ® S (B) a ® Q ; b ® R ; c ® S ; d ® R
(C) a ® R ; b ® S ; c ® P ; d ® Q (D) a ® S ; b ® Q ; c ® R ; d ® P
168
(113) Column-1 Column-2
(a) Adiabatic process (P) DU = 0
(b) Isothermal process (Q) DQ ¹ 0; DU ¹ 0, DW ¹ 0
(c) Isochoric process (R) DW = 0
(d) Isobaric process (S) DQ = 0
(A) a ® R ; b ® P ; c ® Q ; d ® S (B) a ® Q ; b ® R ; c ® S ; d ® P
(C) a ® S ; b ® P ; c ® R ; d ® Q (D) a ® P ; b ® S ; c ® Q ; d ® R
(114) Different thermodynamic processes are shown in graph of (P) ® (V)
Column-1 Column-2 E C
G
(a) Graph AB (P) Isochoric process
P B
(b) Graph GH (Q) Adiabatic process A H
F
(c) Graph EF (R) Isobaric process D
(d) Graph CD (S) Isothermal process V®
(A) a ® Q ; b ® P ; c ® S ; d ® R (B) a ® P ; b ® Q ; c ® R ; d ® S
(C) a ® S ; b ® R ; c ® P ; d ® Q (D) a ® R ; b ® S ; c ® Q ; d ® P
(115) Match according to concept of heat transfer :
Column A Column B
(a) Heat required to convert a gas from liquid. (P) 2256 kJ
(b) Heat required to convert a liquid from solid. (Q) 333 kJ
(c) Heat required to convert 1g ice to water (R) Heat of fusion
(d) Heat required to convert 1g water to vapour. (S) Heat of vaporization
(A) a ®B b®C c ® D d®A

(B) a ®D b®C c ® B d®A
(C) a ®A b®B c ® C d®D
(D) a ®D b®A c ® B d®C
Ans. : 103 (A), 104 (D), 105 (A), 106 (D), 107 (D), 108 (B), 109 (A), 110 (A), 111 (C), 112 (B),
113 (C), 114 (D), 115 (B)
169
6 Gravitation
Newtons Universal law of Gravitation :
Every particle in the universe attracts every other particle with a force which is directly proportional
to the product of their mass and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them
and the direction of this force is along the line joining them.
The magnitude of the gravitational force acting between two particles of mass m1 and m2 lying at
distance r from each other is,
F= (obeys inverse square law)

G m1m2
r2
Where G = universal constant of gravitation
its value is 6.67 × 1011 Nm2 kg2 and the dimensional formula is M1L3T2.
Definition of G : The gravitational force of attraction between two objects of unit mass each and
placed unit distance apart is called the universal gravitational constant.
Gravitational force in vector form :
Gravitational force acting on the particle of mass m1 by the particle of mass m2 is,
o
=
G m1m2
F 12 r 12
r2
o
Where r 12 is the unit vector in the direction of F 12 .

Similarly, the gravitational force acting on the particle of mass m2 by the particle of mass m1 is,
o o – G m1m2
F 21 = or F 21 =
G m1 m2 r r 12
r2
21
2
r G
where 21 is the unit vector in the direction of F21 .
r
Here F 12 = F 21 and | F 12 | = | F 21 |
o o o o
Important features of Gravitational force :

It is acting between any two bodies by virtue of their mass.
It is always attractive in nature.
The gravitational force between two objects is independent of intervening medium.
The gravitational forces are mutually interactive forces.
The gravitational force is a central force.
The gravitational force is a conservative force. The work done on the object by it does not depend
on the path taken but only depends on initial and final position. or The work done by it on closed
path is zero.
The gravitational force between two bodies is independent of the presence of other bodies.
(Two body force)
The gravitational force by a hollow spherical shell of uniform density on a particle out side the
shell is equal to the force which can be obtained by considering the entire mass of the shell as
concentrated on its centre.
The force on a particle at any point inside a hollow spherical shell of uniform density is zero.
96
(1) Calculate the value of gravitational force acting between two spheres each of mass 2 kg, when
their centres are 20 cm apart. (G = 6.67 × 1011 Nm2kg2)
(A) 6.67 × 109 N (B) 6.67 × 1011 N (C) 6.67 × 107 N (D) 6.67 × 105 N
(2) Three uniform spheres, each having mass m and radius r, are kept in such a way that each
touches the other two. The magnitude of the gravitational force on any sphere due to the other
two is ......
G m2 2 G m2 3 G m2
(A) G m (B) (C) (D)
2
r2 4r 2 4r 2 4r 2
(3) Three masses, each equal to m, are placed at the three corners of a square of side l. The
magnitude of gravitational force on unit mass at the fourth corner will be ...... .
(A) G m (B) (C) G m 1 2 2 (D)

3Gm 3G m
3l 2 l 2 2
l l2
(4) Two identical solid brass spheres of radius R are placed in contact with each other. The
gravitational force between them is proportional to ......
(A) R2 (B) R4 (C) R3 (D) R4
(5) Two point masses A and B having mass in the ratio 4 Ñ 5 are separated by a distance of 1 m.
When another point mass C of mass M is placed in between A and B, the gravitational force
between A and C is 15 times the gravitational force between B and C. Then the distance of C
from A is ......
(A) 2 m (B) 2 m (C) 1 m (D) 25 m
3 7 3
(6) The magnitude of gravitational force acting between two particles of mass m1 and m2 separated by a
distance r is F. What would be the change in the distance between them so that the gravitational
force acting between them will become 2F ?
(A) decreased by 29.3 % (B) increased by 29.3 %
(C) decreased by 50 % (D) decreased by 25 %
(7) The gravitational force due to earth on a body of mass m at a height h from the Earths surface
is 13 times the force on it at sea level (at surface of the earth). Then h = ......
R
Where R = radius of the earth
(A) 0.414 (B) 0.732 (C) 0.500 (D) 0.314
(8) The distance of the centres of earth and moon is r. The mass of earth is 81 times the mass of
the moon. At what distance on the line joining their centres from the center of the earth, the
gravitational force on any object will be zero ?
(A) 0.9 r (B) 0.7 r (C) 0.5 r (D) 0.25 r
(9) Three particles each of mass m are placed at the three vertices of an equilateral triangle of side l.
What is the resultant gravitational force due to this system of particles acting on another particle of
mass (M) placed at the mid-point of any side ?
(A) 3GM m (B) 4GM m (C) GM m (D) 4GM m

4l 2 3l 2 4l 2 l2
(10) A mass M is split into two parts, m and M m. If the gravitational force acting between the two
parts is maximum for a given distance, then the ratio m = ...... .

M
(A) 1 (B) 1 (C) 3 (D) 1
2 4 4 5
97
(11) The gravitational force acting between two spheres of mass m and M situated at a distance r in
air is F. Now these spheres are kept in the liquid of specific gravity 5 at a distance r, then the
gravitational force will be ......
(A) 5F (B) F (C) F (D) F

5 25
(12) The gravitational force by earth on a body of mass 1 kg at earths surface is 10 N. Then the
gravitational force on a satellite of mass 100 kg revolving around the earth in a orbit at average
distence 3 R from the centre of the earth will be ......

2
(R = radius of earth)
(A) 4.44 × 102 N (B) 6.66 × 102 N (C) 500 N (D) 3.33 × 102 N
(13) The centripetal force acting on a satellite orbiting around the earth is F and the gravitational force
acting on a satellite due to earth is also F. The resultant force acting on satellite will be ......
(A) F (B) 2F (C) Zero (D) 2F

(14) Two particles of equal mass m go round a circle of radius R under the action of their mutual gravita-
tional attraction. The speed of each particle is ......
(A) (B) (C) 1 G m (D) 1

Gm 4G m 1
2R R 2 R 2R Gm
(15) The gravitational force is a ...... force.
(A) conservative (B) non conservative (C) electrostatic (D) repulsive
Ans. : 1 (A), 2 (D), 3 (C), 4 (D), 5 (A), 6 (A), 7 (B), 8 (A), 9 (B), 10 (A), 11 (C), 12 (A), 13 (A),
14 (C), 15 (A)
Gravitational Acceleration
The acceleration produced in the body due to the gravitational force of the earth is called the
gravitational acceleration or the acceleration due to gravity (g).
The gravitational acceleration at a distance r (r > Re) from the centre of the earth is
g = G Me ; where_ Me = mass of the earth and Re = Radius of the earth.

r2
At the surface of the earth, r = Re
\g=
G Me
R e2
The value of the g does not depend on the mass, shape and size of the body but depends on the mass
of the earth and height or depth from the surface of the earth.
The value of 'g' at the surface of the earth is 9.8 ms2.
'g' is a vector quantity and its direction is always towards the centre of the earth.
Variations in Acceleration Due to Gravity
(1) Due to shape of the earth :
The earth is not completely spherical but is slightly bulged out at the equator and flattened at
the poles. The radius of the earth at equator is nearly 21 km more than the radius at the poles.
\ gpole > gequator ( more by 0.018 ms2 approximately.)
98
(2) Variation in 'g' with altitude :
The gravitional acceleration at a height h from the surface of the earth is,
g(h) = OR
G Me
R e h 2
g(h) = (for any height) OR

g
§ h ·
¨1 R ¸
2
© e ¹
g(h) = g §¨1 – 2h ·¸ (for h < < Re)

©R e ¹
for h < < Re,
The absolute decrease, D g = g g(h) = R

2hg
e
'g
The fractional decrease, g = = 2h
g – g ( h)
g Re
The percentage decrease, 'g × 100 % = 2 h × 100 %

g Re
\ The loss in the weight of a body of mass m at a height h from the surface of the
earth =
2 mgh
Re
(3) Variation in 'g' with depth :
The gravitational acceleration at a distance r (r < Re) from the centre of the earth is
g' = 4 pGrr where r = uniform density of the earth.

At the surface of the earth, r = Re
3
\ g = 4 pGRer
3
The gravitational acceleration at depth d from the surface of the earth
(at distance r < Re from the centre of the earth)
§ ·
g' = g ¨1– d ¸
©R e ¹
At the centre of the earth, d = Re
\ g' = g §¨1– e ·¸ = 0
R
R © e ¹
Thus, the value of the gravitational acceleration at the centre of the earth is zero.
§ g ·
The absolute decrease = D g = g g' = d ¨ ¸
© Re ¹
'g g–g'
The fractional decrease = g = = R
d
g e
'g
The percentage decrease = × 100 % = R × 100 %
d
g e
The rate of decrease of g outside the surface of the earth (for h < < Re) is double to that of inside
the surface of the earth.
99
The graph of g ® r :

g
At surface of the earth

g=
G Me
R e2 Above the surface of the earth
gµr

gµ 1
r2
O r = Re
r®
Inside the surface of earth (distnce from centre of the earth)
(4) Variation in effective Gravitational Acceleration 'g' with latitude due to earths Rotation :
Equtorial Plane : The plane passing through the center of the earth and perpendicular to its
axis of rotation is called equatorial plane.
Latitude : The angle made by the line joining a given place on the Earths surface to the centre
of the Earth with the equatorial line is called the latitude (l) of that place.
At the equator l = 0° and at the poles l = 90°
The effective gravitational acceleration at the place having latitude l is.
g' = g Re w2 cos2 l
R e Z2 cos 2 O
= g (1 ), Where w = rate of rotation about its own axis.
g
(i) At the equator l = 0° Þ cos l = 1

R e Z2
g' = g (1 g
) = g Rew2
= minimum value of effective gravitational acceleration.

(ii) At the poles l = 90° Þ cos l = 0
\ g' = g
= maximum value of effective gravitational acceleration.
When a body of mass m is moved from the equator to the poles, its weight increases by an amount,
m (gp ge) = mw2Re
where gp = gravitational acceleration at poles, ge = gravitational acceleration at equator.
If earth stops rotating about its own axis then at the equator the value of g increases by w2Re and
consequently the weight of the body of mass m lying there increases by mw2Re.
Average density of the earth in terms of 'g' and 'G'.
Accepting the earth as a solid sphere of uniform density,
§ g R e2 ·
3¨ ¸
¨ G ¸
r= = = © ¹
(\ Me = )
Me 3M e g R e2
4 SR 3 4 S R e3 4 S R e3 G
e
3
3g
= 4SR G
e
100
(16) A body weighs 81 kgf on the surface of the earth. How much will it weigh on the surface of Mass
whose mass and radius are 19 times and 12 times respectively that of the earth ?
(A) 40 kgf (B) 36 kgf (C) 24 kgf (D) 162 kgf
(17) If the earth were a sphere made completely of lead, then what would be the value of gravitational
acceleration on its surface ? (Radius of the Earth = 6.4 × 106 m, G = 6.67 × 1011 SI,
Relative density of lead = 11.3)
(A) 22.21 ms2 (B) 34.49 ms2 (C) 28.72 ms2 (D) 14.67 ms2
(18) The mass of two planets are in the ratio 1: 2. Their diameters are in the ratio 1: 3. The acceleration
due to gravity on the surface of the planets are in the ratio ......
(A) 2 : 1 (B) 3 : 2 (C) 2 : 3 (D) 9 : 2
(19) If the radius of the earth is made three times that of present value. Then for what should be the
approximate change in the value of density of earth, so that the value of gravitatonal acceleration on
the surface of the earth remains constant.
(A) decreased by 67 % (B) increased by 67 %
(C) decreased by 33 % (D) increased by 33 %
(20) A man can jump to a height of 2 m on a planet A. What is the height he may be able to jump on
another planet whose density and radius are respectively, one - quarter and one third that of planet A.
(A) 18 m (B) 24 m (C) 36 m (D) 15 m
(21) The weight of a body on the surface of the earth is 54 N. What would be its weight at height
from the surface of the earth ? Where Re = radius of the earth.

Re
2
(A) 72 N (B) 36 N (C) 18 N (D) 24 N
(22) At what height from the surface of the earth, the value of gravitational acceleration will be half that
on the surface of the earth ? Radius of the earth R = 6400 km
(A) 2650 km (B) 3366 km (C) 1325 km (D) 414 km
(23) A body hanging from a massless spring stretches it by 1 cm at the earth surface. How much will the
same body stretch the spring at a place 1600 km above the earths surface ?
(Radius of earth R = 6400 km)
(A) 0.32 cm (B) 0.64 cm (C) 0.16 cm (D) 0.86 cm
(24) At what distance from the centre of the earth the weight of body becomes 16
1
times its weight that
on the surface of the earth ? Radius of the earth is R.
(A) 3R (B) 4R (C) 5R (D) 8R
(25) At what height above the earths surface the value of gravitational acceleration be same as that the
gravitational acceleration at a depth of 100 km from the surface of the earth ?
(A) 50 km (B) 100 km (C) 200 km (D) 25 km
(26) How much below the surface of the earth does the acceleration due to gravity become 10 % of its
value at the earths surface ? (Radias of the earth R = 6400 km)
(A) 6336 km (B) 5400 km (C) 5760 km (D) 5980 km
101
(27) The ratio of weights of a body of mass m at a height of 30 km above earths surface to a depth of
30 km from the surface of the earth is ......
(A) 0.946 (B) 0.962 (C) 0.984 (D) 0.995
(28) Suppose the earth is a uniform sphere of radius R. If the acceleration due to gravity at a place having
latitude 45° and at equator are g' and g'' respectively. Then g' g'' = ...... (gravitational acceleration
at the poles = g)
(A) 3R Z (B) R Z (C) R Z (D) 2 R Z

2 2 2 2
2 2 3 3
(29) The angular velocity of the earth with which it has to rotate so that acceleration due to gravity on
60° latitude becomes zero is ...... (Radius of earth R = 6400 km, at the poles g = 10 ms2)
(A) 2.5 × 103 rad s1 (B) 1.25 × 103 rad s1 (C) 2.5 × 102 rad s1 (D) 1.25 × 102 rad s1
(30) The angular velocity of the earth with which it has to rolate so that the weight of a body becomes 13
times the weight at body at equator ...... (Redius of earth R = 6.4 × 106 m, at the poles g = 9.8 ms2)
(A) 7.8 × 104 rad s1 (B) 6.7 × 104 rad s1 (C) 8.7 × 104 rad s1 (D) 10 × 104 rad s1
(31) The weight of a body on the surface of earth is W. Then the weight of a body at half way mark from
the surface of the earth to centre of the earth is ...... (Consider the density of the earth to be uniform)
(A) 2 (B) W (C) 4 (D) 8
W W W
(32) The density of a planet is twice that of the earth and radius is times that of the earth. Then the
3
2
value of gravitational acceleration on the surface of the planet is how many times the value at sur-
face of the earth ?
(A) 43 (B) 3 (C) 6 (D) 4
3
(33) The mass of a body on a surface of the earth ia M. Then the mass of the same body at the surface
of the moon is ...... .
(A) M
6
(B) M (C) zero (D) infinite
(34) The rate of change of gravitational acceleration (g) at a depth x from the surface of the earth is ......
–8G SU
(A) – 43 Gpr (B) – 23 Gpr (C) (D) Gpr
3
(35) The value of acceleration due to gravity at a height 1600 km above the earths surface is ......
(Value of g at surface of the earth = 9.8 ms2, radius of earth R = 6400 km)
(A) 8.73 ms2 (B) 7.59 ms2 (C) 6.27 ms2 (D) 9.12 ms2
(36) If the earth stops rotating about its own axis, then the change in the value of gravitational accelera-
tion at a place having latitude of 45° is ...... (radius of the earth R = 6.4 ×106 m)
(A) 2.74 cms2 (B) 1.68 cms2 (C) 1.12 cms2 (D) 3.34 cms2
(37) The radius and mass of the earth are R and M respectively. Then the ratio
g
G
= ......
(Where g = gravitational acceleration, G = universal constant)
(A) MR2 (B) (C) M (D) R

M 2
R2 R M
(38) Assume earth to be complete sphere of radius R. If values of gravitational accelerations at a place
having latitude of 30° and at equator are g30 and g respectively. Then, g g30 = ......
(A) w2R (B) 4 w2R (C) Z R (D) Z R

3 2 2
2 4
102
(39) Assume that the acceleration due to gravity on the surface of the moon is 0.2 times the acceleration
due to gravity on the surface of the earth. If Re is the maximum range of a projectile on the earths
surface. What is the maximum range on the surface of the moon ...... (Assume initial velocity of
projection to be constant)
(A) 0.2 Re (B) 0.5 Re (C) 2 Re (D) 5 Re
Ans. : 16 (B), 17 (A), 18 (D), 19 (A), 20 (B), 21 (D), 22 (A), 23 (B), 24 (B), 25 (A), 26 (C), 27 (D),
28 (B), 29 (A), 30 (D), 31 (A), 32 (B), 33 (B), 34 (A), 35 (C), 36 (B), 37 (B), 38 (B), 39 (D)
Mass and Weight
The quantity of matter in the body is called mass. it is the fundamental intrisic property of the body.
Mases are of two types :
(i) Inertial mass : The ratio of the external force applied on a body to the acceleration produced
in it due to the external force is called the inertial mass (mi).
Applied external force
mi = = Fa
Acceleration produced Froce
(Q according to Newtons second law of motion, mass = ).
acceleration
The inertial mass of a body is a measure of its inertia.
It is the measure of ability of the body to oppose the production of acceleration in its
motion by an external force.
(ii) Gravitational mass : The ratio of the gravitational pull of the earth on a body to the
acceleration produced in it due to gravitational force is called the gravitational mass (mg).
\ mg = g
F
From the experiments mi = mg = m

Weight of the body : The gravitational force exerted by earth on a body is called weight of a body.
W=
GM e m
R e2
(Where Me = mass of the earth, Re = radius of the earth, G = universal gravitational constant)
Q W = mg
Its unit is N and directed towards the centre of the earth.
Gravitational Intensity (Gravitational field) :
Defination : The gravitational force exerted by the given body on a body of unit mass (test
mass) at a given point is called the intensity of gravitational field (I) at that point.
o
o
\ I = m where m = test mass
F
It is a vector quantity and its direction is towards the centre of gravity of a body whose
gravitational field is considered.
Its unit is N kg1 and dimensions are M0L1T2.
The gravitational intensity due to body of mass on at a distance r is, I = GM ÞIµ 2

1
2 r
r
If the gravitational intensiry is known at a given point the gravitotional force acting on any body
kept at that point in the field can be determined.
The value of gravitational field intensity at any point is equal to the value of gravitational
acceleration at that point.
gravitational intensity and gravitational acceleration are different quantities. Their units are
different but equivalent. (\ N kg1 and ms2).
I ® r graph for the earth is gravitational field would be the same as g ® r graph.
103
As shown in the figure suppose at point P the gravitational intensities are equal and opposite due
to two bodies A and B, Thus at point P resultant gravitational intensity is zero.
A r B
I1 I2
m1 m2
P
x rx
§ · § ·
here x = ¨¨ m m ¸¸ r and r x = ¨¨ m m ¸¸ r
m1 m2
© 1 2 ¹ © 1 2 ¹
Gravitational Field Intensity for Bodies of Different Shape

Body Position Gravitational Figure
intensity I ® r (graph)
Uniform solid (i) Outside the surface r > R I=

GM
R
r2
I
sphere (ii) On the surface r = R I=
GM
R2 GM
R2
r
(iii) Inside the surface r < R I= O r=R
GM r
R3
R
Uniform spherical (i) Outside the surface r > R I=
GM
r2
I
shell (ii) On the surface r = R I=

GM
R2
(iii) Inside the surface r < R I=0 O r=R r
Thin uniform (i) At a point on its axis I= GM r

(a r 2 ) 2
3
2 a
circular ring (ii) At the centre of the ring I=0 P l

O
r
ª º
2 GM r « 1 »
Uniform Disc (i) At a point on its axis I=
a2 « r »
1
¬ r a2
2
¼
a
or P qI
r
I= (1 cosq)
2 GM
a2
(ii) At the centre of the disc I=0
104
Gravitational Potential
The negative of the work done by the gravitational force in bringing a body of unit mass, from
infinite distance to the given point in the gravitational field is called the gravitational potential (f) at
that point.
f = m = ³ m = ³ I .d r
o o
r r o o o oF
(Q I )
W F .d r
f f m
= ³ Gm dr
r
2
f r
Gravitational Potential, f = –Gm
r
If r = ¥ then f = 0 = fmax
It is a scalar quantity. Its SI unit is Jkg1 and dimensional formula is M0L2T2.
o o
f = ³ I .d r Û I = dr
–d I

Gravitational Potential Difference :
It is defined as the work done to move a unit mass from one point to the other in the gravitational
field.
fA fB
M A B
rA
rB
WA o B § ·
Df = fB fA = = GM ¨¨ r r ¸¸
1 1
m © B A ¹
Potential due to large numbers of particles is given by scalar addition m1 m2

r2
of all the potentials. In the figure at point P, total gravitational
potential, is given by, r1
P
r4 r3 m3
f =
– G m1

G m2

G m3 ......... m4 rn
mn
r1 r2 r3
Gravitational Potential for bodies of Different shape
Body Position Gravitational Figure

intensity I ® r (graph)
Uniform solid (i) Outside the surface r > R f=

– GM
r R
sphere (ii) On the surface r = R fsurface = R
– GM
»¼
V
– GM ª
2º
r=R
(iii) Inside the surface r < R f = 2 R «3 R O r
r
¬
(iv) At the centre of the fcenter = = 2 f Surface

–3GM 3 –3GM
2R 2R
sphere (r = 0)
105
Uniform (i) Outside the surface r > R f=
– GM R
r
spherical shell (ii) On the surface r = R f=

GM V
R r=R r
O
(iii) Inside the surface r < R f=

GM GM
R R
GM
Thin uniform (i) At a point on its axis f=
a2 r 2 a
P
circular ring (ii) At the centre of the ring f= a
GM
r
Gravitational Potential Energy

The negative of the work done by the gravitational force in bringing a given body (of mass m) in the
gravitational field of the Earth from infinite distance at the given point is called the gravitational
potential energy (U) of that body at that point.
The gravitational potential energy of a body of mass m at a distance r from the centre of the earth
(r ³ Re) is,
U= = fm (Q f = e )
– GM e m – GM
It is a scalar quantity. Its unit is J and dimensional formula is M1L2T2.

r r

Gravitational potential energy is always negative because gravitational forces are attractive in
nature.
As the distance increases, gravitational potential energy increases. (becomes less negative)
At infinite distance Gravitational potential energy U = 0 = Umax
Here the potential energy U is of the system consisting of the Earth and the body.
From the centre of body of mass M is the body of mass m is moved from a point at a distance
r1 to a point at distance r2 (r1 > r2) then change in potential energy,
§1 1·
DU = U2 U1 = GMm ¨ r r ¸
© 1 2 ¹
As r1 is greater than r2, DU will be negative. It means that if a body is brought closer to earth
its potential energy decreases.
Gravitational potential energy at the centre of the earth,
§ –3 GM e ·
Ucentre = mfcentre = m ¨ 2 R ¸ = 2 R
–3 GMe m
© e ¹ e
If the body of mass m is taken at a height h from the surface of the earth, then change in
potential energy,
m gh
DU = U2 U1 = 1 h
Re
§ m g Re ·
(i) If h = nRe ; DU = ¨ ( n 1) ¸ n
© ¹
(ii) If h << Re ; DU = mgh (Q h ® 0)

Re
(iii) If h = Re ; DU = 12 mgRe
106
In case of discrete distribution of mass total potential energy
ª G m1 m 2 G m 2 m3 º
U = SUi = « ....»
¬ r12 r23 ¼
Total pairs are formed for a system of n particles.

n ( n –1)
2
(40) If gravitational force acting on a body of mass 50 g at piont is 2 N, then what would the magnitude of
intensity of the gravitational field at that point ?
(A) 40 N kg1 (B) 0.4 N kg1 (C) 2 N kg1 (D) 100 N kg1
(41) The distance at which the magnitute of gravitational field intensity due to thin uniform ring of mass
M and radius R from the centre of the ring on its axis will be zero.
(A) (B) (C) R2 (D) 23R

R R
2 3
(42) The magnitude of gravitational intensity at a point is 20 N kg1. What would be the magnitude of the
gravitational force on a body of 10 kg mass at this point ?
(A) 100 N (B) 200 N (C) 50 N (D) 400 N
(43) Two objects of equal mass m are placed at a distance d from each other on a horizontal surface. The
value of gravitational potential at a mid point on line joining their centres is ...... (G = universal
gravitational constant)
(A) (B) (C) (D) Zero

–Gm –2 G m –4 G m
d d d
(44) Three particles each of mass m are kept at the three vertices of an equilateral triangle of side b. The
gravitational potential at the centroid of this equilateral triangle is ......
(A) (B) (C) (D)

–3 3 G m –2 3 G m –3 2 G m –9 G m
b b b b
(45) Two bodies of mass m and 9m are placed at a distance r. The gravitational potential at a point on the
line joining them where the gravitational field is zero, will be ...... .
(A) (B) (C) (D)

–6 G m –9 G m –4 G m –16 G m
r r r r
(46) Four particles each of mass m are kept at the four vertices of a square with side l. The gravitational
potential at the centre of the square is ......
(A) (B) (C) (D)

–2 3 G m –4 2 G m –3 2 G m –5 2 G m
l l l l
R
(47) A body of mass m is taken from earth surface to the height h = . The increase in its potential
5
energy will be ......
(accleration due to gravity on the surface of the earth = g, radius of the earth = R).
(A) 7 mgh (B) 6 mgh (C) 4 mgh (D) 23 mgh

6 5 3
(48) Three particles each of mass 2m are kept at the three vertices of an equilateral triangle of side l. The
gravitational potential energy of this system is ......
–3 G m 2 –6 G m 2 –12 G m 2
(A) (B) (C) (D) – G m
2
l l l 2l
107
(49) A body of mass m starts falling from a distance 3R above the Earths surface. Its kinetic energy
when it has fallen to distance R above the Earths surface is ......
Radius of Earth = R, mass of Earth = M, Universal Gravitational constant = G
(A) (B) (C) (D)

GM m GM m GM m GM m
2R 4R 3R 6R
(50) A body of mass 1 kg is placed at a distance of 4 m from the centre and on the axis of a uniform
ring of mass 5 kg and radius 3 m. Calculate the work required to be done to increases the
distance of the body from 4 m to 3 3 m. (Gravitational constant = G)
(A) 6 (B) 3 (C) 2 (D) 5

G 2G 3G G
Ans. : 40 (A), 41 (A), 42 (B), 43 (C), 44 (A), 45 (D), 46 (B), 47 (B), 48 (C), 49 (B), 50 (A)
Escape velocity
The minimum velocity with which a body must be projected from the surface of earth so that it
escapes from the gravitational field of the earth is known as escape velocity (ve).
Escape velocity ve = 2 GM e
= 2g R e (Q GMe = gR2e )
Re
= 2 ( 4 SU G R e ) R e = Re 8 SGU
3 3
The value of escape velocity does not depend upon the mass of the projected body but it
depends on the mass and radius of the planet (Here Earth) from which it is being escaped.
(projected).
On the surface of the earth, ve = 2 g Re
substituting the values of g and Re, ve = 11.2 kms1

If the escape velocity required for the body lying on the surface of moon, to make free from the
moons gravitational field is ve', then
ve' = 2 GM m
Where Mm = mass of the moon and Rm = radius of the moon.
Rm
substituting all these values, in this case, ve' = 2.3 kms1
Which is nearly 1 times the escape velocity at the earths surface.

6
A planet will have atmosphere if the speed of molecule in its atmosphere at the temperature pre-
vailing there is less than the escape speed.
speed of molecules of gas = vrms = 3RT

M
\ Thats why the earth has atmosphere as at earth vrms < ve
while moon has no atomosphere as at moon rms > ve
Escape Energy
The minimum energy to be supplied to the body to make it free from Earths gravitational field
(from binding with the earth) is called the escape energy of that body. It is often called the binding
energy of the body.
\ The escape energy of the body of mass m lying on the surface of the Earth =
GM e m
Re
108
(51) The escape velocity for a body projected vertically upwards from the surface of the earth is 11.2 kms1.
If the body is projected an angle of 45° with the vertical, the escape velocity will be ...... kms1
(A) 11.2 (B) 11.2 × §¨ 1 ·¸

© 2¹ ©
§ 3·
(C) 11.2 × ¨ 2 ¸
¹
(D) 11.2 × 31
(52) The escape velocity of a body on the surface of the earth is ve, then the escape velocity on a planet
whose radius is three times and mass is three times that of the earth, is ......
(A) 3 ve (B) 9 ve (C) ve (D) 27 ve
(53) The escape velocity of a body on the surface of the earth is ve. The radius of the earth is 6400 km.
The value of radius of the earth (by contracting the earth), for which the escape velocity would
become 10 times the escape velocity of its present value ...... (Assume mass of the earth to be
constant.)
(A) 6.4 km (B) 64 km (C) 640 km (D) 4800 km
(54) A satellite with kinetic energy K is revolving round the earth in a circular orbit. How much more kinetic
energy should be given to it so that it may just escape from the gravitational field of the earth ?
(A) 2 K (B) 2K (C) K (D)

K
2
(55) A satellite is orbiting close to the surface of the earth. How much additional velocity (appronimately)
should be given to it so that it may just escape into outer space (radius of earth = 6400 km,
gravitational acceleration g = 9.8 ms2)
(A) 11.2 km s1 (B) 3.2 km s1 (C) 8 km s1 (D) 20.2 km s1
(56) The escape velocity of a body on the surface of the earth is ve. If mass of the earth is made twice
and radius is made halved, then the escape velocity of a body would become ......
(A) 2 ve (B) 2 ve (C) 43 ve (D) 3 ve

3
(57) The escape velocity on the surface of the earth is v1. The escape velocity on the surface of a planet
whose radius and density are 4 times and 9 times respectively than that of earth is v2. Then v = ......
v1
2
(A) 16 (B) 12 (C) 43 (D) 4

1 3
Ans. : 51 (A), 52 (C), 53 (B), 54 (C), 55 (B), 56 (A), 57 (B)

Kepler's Laws
First Law (Law of orbits)
All the planets move in the elliptical orbits with the sun situated at one of the foci.
elliptical orbit a = Semi major axis
P
e e b = Semi minor axis
Perigee Apogee
s
sun b a Aphelion distance = Largest distance of planet from the sun.
rmin rmax Perihelion distance = Shortest distance of planet from the sun.
When planet is far away from the sun it moves slower in the orbit. Thus its kinetic energy is minimum
109
and potential energy is maximum.
When planet is near to the sun it moves faster in the orbit. Thus its kinetic energy is maximum and po-
tential energy is minimum.
rmax = a + ea = a (1 + e)
rmin = a ea = a (1 e)
Where e is the dimensionless number having value between 0 to 1 called eccentricity of the ellipse.
If e = 0, the ellipse is a circle. For earth e = 0.017.
Second Law (Law of Areas) Ñ
The line joining the sun and the planet sweeps equal areas in equal interval of time it means the
dt
areal velocity d A remains constant..
The areal velocity being constant is the geometrical representation of the law of conservation of
angular momentum.
P3 P2 In equal interval of time,
A2 A1 area of SP1P2 = area of SP3P4
S P1
P4 \ A1 = A2
Third Law (Law of Periods) :
The square of the time - period (T) of the revolution of a planet is proportional to the cube of the
semi major axis (a) of its elliptical orbit.
\ T2 µ a3 Þ T µ a3/2
Satellites
A body revolving around a planet is called its satellite.
The orbital motion of the salellite depends on the gravitational force by the planet and the initial
conditions.
The path of these satellites are elliptical with the centre of Earth at a focus. However, the
difference in semi major axis and semi minor axis is so small that they can be treated as nearly
circular.
Orbital velocity
The minimum velocity required to put a satellite into its orbit is known as orbital velocity. The orbital
velocity of a satellite at a distance r (r > Re) from the centre of the earth is,
v0 = =
GM e GM e
r Re h
Very close to the surface of the earth, v0 = =

GMe
g Re
Re
The value of orbital velocity does not depend on the mass of the satellite, but depends on the
mass of the planet (here earth) about which it revolves and the radius of the orbit.
The orbital speed of a satellite when it revolves very close to the surface of the earth,
v0 = 9.8 u 6.4 u 106 = 7.92 km s1

The work done by the satellite in a complete orbit (i.e. one complete revolution) is zero.
If the orbital velocity of a satellite orbiting near the surface of the earth is increased by 41.4 %
( 2 times) then it will escape from the gravitational field of the earth.
110
Different orbital shapes cossesponding to different velocities of a satellite.
(1) If v < vo (vo is the velocity require to maintain satellite in the orbit)
(i) The path would not be circular, rather it will be spiral. The satellite finally falls on the Earth.
(ii) Kinetic energy is less than potential energy Þ Total energy is negative.
(2) If v = v0
(i) The satellite revolves in a circular orbit.
(ii) e = 0 (e ® eccentricity).
(iii) Kinetic energy is less than potential energy Þ Total energy is negative.
(3) If v0 < v < ve (Where ve = Escape Velocity)
(i) The satellite revolves in a elliptical orbit.
(ii) e < 1
(iii) Kinetic energy is less than potential energy Þ Total energy is negative.
(4) If v = ve
(i) The satellite will move along a parabolic path and escape out of the gravitational field of
earth.
(ii) e = 1
(iii) The kinetic energy is equal to the potential energy. Þ Total energy becomes zero.
(5) If v > ve
(i) The satellite will move along a hyperbolic path and escape out of the gravitational field of
earth.
(ii) e > 1
(iii) The kinentic energy is greater than the potential energy Þ Total energy becomes positive.
Time Period of Satellife (T) :
2 Sr 2Sr
T= = 2p GM e Þ T µ r (Q GMe is constant)
r3 2 3
v0
= GMe
r
The periodic time of satellite is independent of mass of a satellite but depends on the mass
of the planet (here earth) about which it revolves and the radius of the orbit.
Height of satellite from the surface of the Earth
§ g R 2 T2 ·3
1
h = ¨¨ e 2 ¸ R
¸
© 4S ¹
e
Energy of Satellite :
(i) Kinetic Energy (K) :
K = 12 mv02 = ... (1)

GM e m
2r
L2
Angular momentum of satellite is L = mv0r, then kinetic energy is K =
2 m r2
111
(ii) Potential Energy (U) :
The potential energy of a satellite at a distance r from the centre of the earth is,
U = ...... (2) (Note : From formula f = , U = mf.)

– GM e m – GMe
r r
– L2
= (in terms of angular momentum)
m r2
(iii) Total energy (E) :
E = Potential energy + Kinetic energy
...... (3)
– GM e m
= 2r
– L2
= (in terms of angular momentum)
2 m r2
Total energy of a satellite is negative.

From equations (1), (2) and (3)
E
K
= 1 Þ K = E and
Energy K
U
E
= 2 Þ U = 2E
For any value of r, values of U and E are negative and O
E r®
value of K is positive and K = E. U
As r ® ¥ all three energy curves approach a value of zero.
Binding Energy of Satellite :
Total energy of satellite is E = . Negative sign indicates that this satellite is in the bound
– GMe m
2r
state by an attractive force of central body. Thus energy must be supplied to remove it from the orbit
to infinity. The energy required to remove the satellite from the orbit (from the gravitational field of
the planet here the earth) to infinity is called Binding Energy of the system. i.e.
\ Binding Energy (B.E.) = E =

GMe m
2r
If the orbit of a satellite is elliptical
then, Total Energy E = = constant.

GM e m
2a
Where a = semi major axis

When the satellite is closest to the central body (about which it revolves) (at perigee), then kinetic
energy of satellite is maximum. i.e. the potential energy is minimum. (from formula U = E K)
and when the satellite is farthest from the central body (at apogee), then kinetic energy of
satellite is minimum and potential energy is maximum.
When the satellite is transferred from one circular orbit of radius r1 to other circular orbit of
radius r2 (r2 > r1) then the variation in different quantities can be shown by the following table.
112
Quantity Variation Relation with r
(1) Orbital Velocity Decreases v0 µ

1
r
3
(2) Time Period Increases T µ r2
(3) Linear momentum Decreases Pµ

1
r
(4) Angular momentum Increases Lµ r
(5) Kinetic Energy Decreases K µ 1r
(6) Potential Energy Increases U µ – 1r
(7) Total Energy Increases E µ – 1r
(8) Binding Energy Decreases B.E. µ 1r

Geo-Stationary Satellite (Geo-Synchronous satellite) (parking satellite)
The Earths satellite having orbital periodic time of 24 hours (equal to the periodic time of
rotation of the Earth about its own axis), is called the geo-stationary satellite.
Geo-stationary satellite revolve around the Earth in the equitorial plane in east west direction.
Height of Geo-stationary satellite from the surface of the Earth :
§ GM e T 2 ·3
1
Þ r = ¨¨ ¸
4S r
2 3
T2 = GM ¸
© 4S ¹
2
e
Now substituting all values in above equation, we get

\ r = 42,260 km
\ h = r Re = 42,260 6400 = 35860 km
Such an orbit of satellite is known as parking orbit.
The orbital speed of satellite using equation is 3.08 kms1

GM e
r
Polar Satellite :
These satellites revolve around the Earth in north south direction at height nearly of 800 km from
the surface of the Earth.
The time period of these satellites is almost 100 min.
Maximum height attained by a projectile :
Suppose body of mass m is thrown with velocity v in vertically upward direction from the
surface of the earth and it attains maximum height of H. At maximum height its velocity is zero.
According to law of conservation of mechanical energy,
Total energy at the Earths surface = Total energy at a height from Earths surface.
§ GM e m · § GM e m ·
mv2
+ ¨ R ¸ = 0 + ¨ R H ¸
1
© ¹ © ¹
\ 2 e e
Where Re = Radius of the Earth, Me = Mass of the Earth.
113
ª º
\ v2 = 2GMe « R R H »
1 1
¬ e e ¼
§ ·
= 2GMe ¨ (R ) (R H) ¸
H
© e e ¹
§ ·
= 2gRe2 ¨ (R ) R (1 H/ R ) ¸ (Q GMe = gRe2)
H
© e e e ¹
§ ·2
1
¨ ¸
v2 = v= ¨ ¸
2g H 2g H
¨§ ·¸
Þ
1 H ¨ ¨1 ¸¸
H
© © Re ¹¹
Re
Now, v2 = R H
2g H Re
e
\ (v2) (Re + H) = 2gHRe Þ v2Re + v2H = 2gHRe

\ v2Re = (2gRe v2)H
v2 R e
ÞH=
2 g R e – v2
Relative angular velocity of satellite
If satellite revolve around the Earth in the equitorial plane in same sense of rotations as that of earth
about its own axis (from west to east), Then the relative angular velocity of satellite for an observer lying
at the Earth surface is,
wrelative = ws wE
Where ws = angular velocity of satellite
wE = angular velocity of Earth
2S
Now using equation w = ,
T
2S 2S
T = Z 2S = Z – Z = 2S 2S = E s
T T
relative s E – TE – Ts
Ts TE
(58) The time period of a satellite orbiting close to the surface of the earth is 50 min. The time period of a
satellite orbiting at height three times the radius of the earth from the surface of the earth is ......
(A) 100 min (B) 400 min (C) 50 × 8 min (D) 150 min
(59) The rate of rotation of a planet is 8 times the rate of rotation of earth around the sun. Then ratio of
their radii of orbits of rotation is ......
(A) 24 (B) 4 (C) 16 (D) 12

1 1 1
(60) The mercury (A planet) is revolving around the sun as shown in

elliptical path. The potential energy of the mercury will be minimum R Q
at the point ......
(A) P (B) Q S P
Sun
(C) R (D) S
114
(61) The figure shows elliptical orbit of a planet of mass m about the sun m
S. The shaded area SCD is thrice the shaded area SAB. If t1 is the A D
time for the planet to move from A to B and t2 is time to move from S
B C
t1
C to D then t = ......
2
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4

(62) The period of revolution of planet A is 27 times that of B. The distance of A from the sun is how
many times greater than that of B from the sun ......
(A) 9 (B) 8 (C) 4 (D) 6
(63) Two satellites are revolving into a circular orbit of radii r and 1.01 r respectively around the earth.
Their orbital time periods are T1 and T2 respectively. The period of second satellite is larger than
that of the first one by approximately ......
(A) 0.5 % (B) 1.0 % (C) 1.5 % (D) 3.0 %
(64) The time period of a satellite revolving at a height equal to the radius of the earth from the surface of
the earth is ...... (radius of the earth R, acceleration due to gravity = g)
(A) 2p
2R
(B) 4 2 SR (C) 2p
R
(D) 8p
R
g g g g
(65) A geo-stationary satellite is orbiting the earth at a height 6R above the surface of earth. R being the
radius of the earth. The time period of another satellite at a height of 2.5R from the surface of
the earth will be ......
(A) 6 2 hr (B) 6 hr (C) 10 hr (D) 2 6 hr
(66) Two satellites A and B are revolving in the circular orbit of equal radii around the earth. The mass of
A is 100 times the mass of B. Their time periods are in the ratio of ......
(A) 1 : 100 (B) 100 : 1 (C) 1 : 1 (D) 10 : 1
(67) The rotation period of a satellite of mass m revoling close to the surface of the earth is ......
(A) 72 min (B) 62.2 min (C) 84.6 min (D) 104 min
(68) The time period of revolution of a satellite orbiting close to the surface of the earth in terms of
density of the earth (r) is ......
3S 4S S 2S
(A) GU (B) GU (C) 3
GU (D) GU
(69) Two satellites A and B go round the earth in circular orbits having radii 4R and R. If the orbital
velocity of satellite A is 3v, then the orbital velocity of satellite B is ......
(A) 6 v (B) 12 v (C) 43 v (D) 2 v

3
(70) The orbital velocily of a satellite revolving around the earth in a circular orbit close to the surface of
the earth is v0. The orbital velocity of another satellite revolving at a height one half of the radius of
the earth, from the surface of the earth, is ......
(A) v (B) v (C) 23 v0 (D) 2 v0

3 2 3
2 0 3 0
(71) The orbital time period of satellite revolving around the earth in the orbit of radius r is T. If the same
satellite is revolving in the orbit of radius 2r, the new periodic time is ......
(A) 2T (B) 1.5 T (C) 2.8 T (D) 0.5 T
115
(72) If orbital period of a satellite is T, then its kinetic energy is proportional to ......
2 2
(A) T1 (B) (C) T 3 (D) T
1 3
T3
(73) A satellite of mass m and having kinetic energy K is orbiting around the earth in circular orbit of
radius r. The angular momentum of the satellite is ......
(A) (B) (C) (D)

K K
mr 2
2 m r2 2 K mr 2 2 K mr
Ans. : 58 (B), 59 (B), 60 (D), 61 (C), 62 (B), 63 (C), 64 (B), 65 (A), 66 (C), 67 (C), 68 (A), 69
(A), 70 (B), 71 (C), 72 (D), 73 (C)
(74) Assertion : The earth suddenly stops rotating about its axis, then the value of acceleration due
to gravity will become same at all the places.
Reason : The value of acceleration due to gravity is independent of rotation of the earth.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(75) Assertion : The escape velocities for two objects projected in the direction making an angle of
30° and 60° with the surface of the earth, from the surface of the earth are v1 = 2ve
and v2 = 2ve respectively.
3
Reason : The value of escape velocity does not depend on the angle of projection.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(76) Assertion : For the planets orbiting around the sun, angular speed, linear speed, kinetic energy
changes with time but the angular momentum remains constant.
Reason : No torque is acting on the rotating planet. So its angular momentum is constant.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(77) Assertion : The weight of a body on the surface of the earth is more at mid night time that of
noon time.
Reason : The gravitational forces exerted on the body by the earth and by the sun are in
opposite direction to each other at noon time.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(78) Assertion : The orbital time period of a satellite revolving close to the sarface of the earth is
smaller than that the satellite revolving far away from the surface of the earth.
Reason : The square of the orbital time period is directly proportinal to the cube of the orbital
radius.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(79) Assertion : The orbital speed of a satellite is greater than its escape speed.
Reason : Orbit of a satellite is within the gravitational field of earth, whereas escaping is beyond
the gravitational field of earth.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
116
(80) Assertion : Different planets have different values of escape velocity.
Reason : The value of escape velocity is not a universal constant.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(81) Assertion : The gravitational froce exerted on a body by the moon is less than that by
the earth.
Reason : The value of gravitational force depends on the factor M2 for a given mass m and it is
r
very small for the moon. Where r = distance from the centre.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(82) Assertion : Gravitational force between two particles is negligibly small compared to the electrical
force.
Reason : The electrical force is experienced by the charged particles only.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(83) Assertion : Body becomes weightless at the Earths centre.
Reason : The gravitational acceleration increases when distance decreases from surface of Earth.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
And. : 74 (C), 75 (D), 76 (A), 77 (D), 78 (A), 79 (D), 80 (A), 81 (A), 82 (B), 83 (C)
Graph based questions :
(84) A shell of mass M and radius R has a point mass m placed at a distance r from its centre. The
gravitational potential energy U (r) versus r (distance from centre) will be ......
R
(A) o r (B) o r
U(r) U(r)
o r o r
(C) (D)
U(r) U(r)
(85) The correct graph representing the variation of total energy (E), Kinetic energy (K) and potential
energy (U) of a satellite with its distance from the centre of earth is ......
(A) (B)
E E
Energy
Energy
U K
o r o r
K U
Energy
Energy
(C) K (D) K
o r o r
E
U U
117
(86) The diagram showing the variation of gravitational potential of earth with distance from the
centre of earth is ......
(A) V (B) V
R r R r
O O
V V
R r R r
(C) O (D) O
Ans. : 84 (C), 85 (C), 86 (C)

Paragraph-1
The gravitational field in a region is given by I = 5 i + 12 j N kg1. Answer the following
G
questions.
(87) Find the magnitude of the gravitational force acting on a body of mass 2 kg placed at the
origin ......
(A) 26 N (B) 30 N (C) 20 N (D) 35 N
(88) Find the potential at points (12 m, 0) and (0, 5 m), if the potential at the origin is taken to
be zero.
(A) 30 J kg1, 30 J kg1 (B) 40 J kg1, 30 J kg1
(C) 60 J kg , 60 J kg
1 1
(D) 40 J kg1, 50 J kg1
(89) Find the change in gravitational potential energy if a body of mass 2 kg is taken from the origin
to the point (12 m, 5 m) ......
(A) 225 J (B) 240 J (C) 245 J (D) 480 J
(90) Find the change in potential energy if the body is taken from (12 m, 0) to (0, 5m)
(A) 10 J (B) 50 J (C) 0 (D) 60 J
Paragraph - 2
Assume that orbits of Earth and the Mars around the sun to be circular. An artificial satellite is
launched from the earth which can revolve around the sun in such a way that its apogee is lying on
the axis of rotation of Mars and the perigee is lying on the axis of rotation of earth. The orbital time
periods for earth and the Mars are Te and Tm respectively around the sun and symbols for different
parameters are as under :
Me = mass of earth, Mm = mass of Mars, M = mass of artificial satellite, Le = angular momentum of
earth around sun, Lm = angular momeatum of Mars around sun, Re = semi major axis of arbit of
Earth, Rm = Semi major axis of orbit of Mars, Ee = total energy of the earth, Em = total energy of
Mars.
(91) The orbital time period of a satellite around the sun is ...... (Neglect the effect of gravitational
field by earth and by Mars.)
ª 2 º2
3
« Te 3 Tm 3 »
2
(D) « »
Te Tm
(A) (B) (C) T T
2 Te Tm
« »
Te Tm 2
¬ ¼
2 e m
118
(92) Total energy of the satellite is ......
2 M § R e Ee · 2 M § R e Ee ·
(A) M ¨ R R ¸ (B) M ¨ R R ¸
e © e m ¹ m © e m ¹
§ ·
2 Ee M § R e R m · 2 Ee M ¨ R e R m ¸
(C) M ¨ R ¸ (D) M ¨ ¸
m © ¹ © Re Rm ¹
m 2 2
e
(93) Areal velocity of a satellite around the sun is ......

(A) Less than that of the areal velocity of earth.
(B) Greater than that of the areal velocity of Mars.
(C) Same as that of the areal velocity of earth.
(D) Greater than that of the areal velocity of earth.
Ans : 87 (A), 88 (C), 89 (B), 90 (B), 91 (D), 92 (A), 93 (D)
Match the columns :

(94) A satellite is projected vertically near the surface of a planet with speed v. The value of
acceleration of a freely falling body near this planet is found to be 4.9 ms2. Radius of the planet
is 3200 km. For various values of v, the path of satellite can be predicted. Match the velocity of
satellite with its respective path 2 1.4

Column-1 Column-2
(a) v = 4 km s1 (p) Elliptical (A) a ® q b®p c®s d®r
(b) v = 5 km s 1
(q) Circular (B) a ® p b®q c®r d®s
(c) v = 5.6 km s1 (r) Hyperbolic (C) a ® s b®r c®p d®q
(d) v = 6.6 km s1 (s) Parabolic (D) a ® r b®s c®q d®p
(95) Match Column 1 and Column 2
Column-1 Column-2
(a) Elliptical orbit of a planet (p) Conservation of kinetic energy
(b) Circular orbit of a satellite (q) Conservation of angular momentum
(c) Escape velocity (r) Independent of mass of a satellite
(d) Orbital velocity (s) GM

R
(t) Constant areal velocity
(A) a ® q, t b ® p, q, t c ® r d ® r, s (B) a ® p, r b ® q, r c®t d®p

(C) a ® s b®r c®s d®t (D) a ® p b®q c®r d®s
Ans. : 94 (A), 95 (A)
119
9 Kinetic Theory of Gases
Boyle's Law
"For a gas having sufficiently low density, its pressure is inversly proportional to its volume, at
constant temperature."
Pµ 1 Þ PV = constant ................... (1)

V
Þ P1V1 = P2V2
(A) But volume V = m

U
From equation (1),
§m·
\ P ¨ ¸ = constant
©U¹
If mass m is constant, then
= constant
P1 P2
U1 U2
P =
U
Þ
(B) Number of molecules in unit volume, n = N Þ V = N

V n
from equation (1),
P Nn = constant
If N is constant then, = constant Þ = constant
P P1 P2
n
= n2
n1
Charle's Law
"For a gas having sufficiently low density, at constant pressure, its volume is directly proportional to its
absolute temperature."
VµT = constant
V V1 V2
Þ
T
Þ
T1
= T2
(A) But density r = ÞV m = constant

m m
U
V
=
So, m = constant Þ r T = constant r1 T1 = r2 T2

UT
(B) At constant pressure for a given mass of gas Volume at 0 °C is V0 then Volume at t °C is
Vt = V0 1 t
273.15
.
Gaylussac's Law
"For a gas having sufficiently low density, at constant volume, its pressure is directly proportional to its
absolute temperature."
PµT Þ P = constant
P1 P2
T
Þ
T1
=
T2
(A) At constant volume, for a given mass of gas pressure at 0 °C is P0 then pressure at t °C is
Pt = P0 ª«1 t º»
¬ 273.15 ¼
170
(1) If speed of sound in air is vs and its rms speed in air is vrms then ......
§ J ·2 § J ·2 §J·
1 1 2
(A) vs = vrms (B) vs = vrms ¨3¸ (C) vrms = vs ¨ ¸ (D) vs= vrms ¨ ¸
© ¹ ©3¹ ©2¹
(2) On increasing temperature of a gas filled in a closed container by 1°C, its volume increases by
0.4 %, then intial temperature of gas would be ........
(A) 250 °C (B) 150 °C (C) 250 K (D) 150 K
(3) Volume of a gas at 2 atm pressure and 746.3 K temperature for question 2 is .........
(A) 100 m3 (B) 100 cc (C) 1 m3 (D) 1 cc
(4) ...... = constant in Boyle's law.
(A) (B) V T (C) PV (D)

P P
T V
(5) To double the volume of a given quantity of ideal gas at 27 °C, temperature should be ...... °C
at constant pressure.
(A) 600 (B) 270 (C) 370 (D) 54
(6) On decreasing volume of a gas at constant temperature by 5 %, its pressure ......
(A) decreases by 5.26 % (B) increases by 5.26 % (C) increases by 11 % (D) decreases by 11 %
(7) 2 mole ideal gas is mixed with 3 mole diatomic rigid rotator gas. Molar specific heat at constant
volume will be ......
(A) 1.2 R (B) 2.1 R (C) R (D) R

3 5
2 2
(8) A gas is filled in a closed container at temperature 250 K, on increasing its temperature by 1 K,
percentange change in its pressure is ......
(A) 0.8 % (B) 0.2 % (C) 0.4 % (D) 0.1 %
(9) Two gases having equal mass are in thermal equillibrium. If their pressure are Pa and Pb and
volumes are Va and Vb respectively, then ......
(A) PaVa = PbVb (B) V = (C) Pa ¹ Pb ; Va = Vb (D) Pa = Pb ; Va ¹ Vb

Pa Pb
a Vb
(10) At what temperature will volume of an ideal gas becomes 3 times than that at 0 °C at constant
pressure ?
(A) 819 °C (B) 646 °C (C) 546 °C (D) 182 °C
(11) 1 mol oxygen gas is filled in a container at pressure P and temperature T. In another similar
container, 1 mol Helium gas is filled at temperature 2T then pressure of helium gas will be .......
(A) 8P (B) P/8 (C) P (D) 2P
(12) Volume of a gas at temperature 27 °C is V. If its temperature is increased to 327 °C at constant
pressure, then its volume becomes ......
(A) V/2 (B) V (C) 2V (D) 3V
(13) At what temperature will pressure of 1 g N2 gas be equal to pressure of 1 g O2 gas at 15 °C ?
Molecular mass of O2 and N2 are 32 and 28 respectively.
(A) 13 °C (B) 15 °C (C) 56.4 °C (D) 21 °C
171
(14) Kinetic theory of gas provides support to ......
(A) Boyle's law (B) Charle's law
(C) Boyle's and Charle's law (D) None of the laws.
(15) At constant temperature, on increasing pressure of 1200 ml gas from 70 cm-Hg to 120 cm-Hg,
its volume becomes ......
(A) 400 ml (B) 500 ml (C) 600 ml (D) 700 ml
Ans. : 1 (B), 2 (C), 3 (B), 4 (C), 5 (C), 6 (B), 7 (B), 8 (C), 9 (A), 10 (C), 11 (D), 12 (C), 13 (D),
14 (C), 15 (D)
Avogadro's hypothesis
"For given constant temperature and pressure, number of molecules per unit volume is same for all gases."
Number of molecules in 1 mole gas is NA = 6.023 × 1023
Graham's law for gas expansion
"If two different gases are mixed at constant temperature and pressure, then rate of mixing is
inversely proportional to square root of density of gas."
rµ Þ r = density
1
U
rµ 1 Þ M = Molecular mass of gas

M
U2
= =
r1 M2
U1
\
r2 M1
If volume V of gas mixes in time t then
r= t
V
= ×
r1 V1 t2
r2 V2 t1
Ideal Gas Equation :
PV = mRT for m mole gas
PV = §¨ R ·
¸T for 1 mole gas
© NA ¹
= kBT kB = N = 1.38 × 10 23 JK1 = Boltzmann's constant

R
A
= NkBT for N molecules
Þ PV = MR T for 1 g gas
where, r = specific Gas constant

PV = rT
172
PV = mrT for m g gas.
where r = = Gas constant per unit mass.

R
M
unit of r = Jg1 k1
Van-der-waal's correction
(A) Correction in Volume : (V b) Where b = 1 RTc

8 Pc
(B) Correction in pressure : §¨ P + a ·¸ Where a = 27 R Tc

2 2
© 2
V ¹ 64 Pc
Here Pc = Critical pressure, Tc = Critical temperature and Vc = Critical volume
for 1 mole gas §¨ P + a ·¸ (V b) = RT

© 2
V ¹
§ 2 ·
for m mole gas ¨ P P a ¸ (V mb) = mRT
© 2
V ¹
(16) In equation PV = RT value of constant R at STP, is ......

(A) 2 cal K1 (B) 10 cal K1 (C) 0.2 cal K1 (D) 200 cal K1
(17) A gas is filled in container at temperature 27 °C. To take out (release) half the mass of gas from
container, up to how much temperature should the container will be heated ?
(A) 54 °C (B) 177 °C (C) 277 °C (D) 327 °C
(18) On increasing the temperature of a gas in closed container by 1°C, its pressure increases by
0.4 %. Then initial temerature of this gas would be ......
(A) 250 K (B) 250 °C (C) 2500 k (D) 2500 °C
(19) In a metallic cylindrical container, pressure of gas at 27 °C temperature is 2 atmosphere. On
making its temperature 54 °C, pressure becomes ...... atmosphere.
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 2.18 (D) 1/2
(20) At constant pressure, 1 litre ideal gas is heated from 27 °C to 97 °C then its final volume
becomes ...... litre.
(A) 1.2 (B) 1.9 (C) 19 (D) 2.4
(21) At constant temperature, how much percentage decrease in pressure of gas should be done so as
to increase its volume by 10 % keeping mass constant ?
(A) 8.1 % (B) 9.1 % (C) 10.1 % (D) 11.1 %
(22) A mixture of 8 g oxygen, 14 g Nitrogen and 22 g Carbon Dioxide at 27 °C temperature is filled
in a container of 4 litre. Then pressure of mixture is ...... N m2.
(A) 5.79 × 105 (B) 6.79 × 105 (C) 7.79 × 103 (D) 7.79 × 105
(23) A mixture of 8 g O2 ; 14 g N2 and 22 g CO2 gases at 27 °C is filled in a container of 10 litre
Then pressure of mixture is ...... (Take R = 0.082 units)
(A) 1.4 atm (B) 2.5 atm (C) 3.075 atm (D) 8.7 atm
173
(24) Two containers of equal volume are filled with same gas at pressure P1 and P2 and temperature
T1 and T2. Now when both containers are joined then their common pressure and temperature
becomes P and T respectively. then ratio P/T ......
(A) (B) (C) (D)

P1T2 + P2 T1 P1T2 + P2 T1 P1T2 + P2 T1 P1T2 + P2 T1
T1 T2 T1 + T2 2 T1 T2 T1 – T2
(25) Main difference between ideal gas and real gas is related to .....
(A) change of state (B) temperature (C) pressure (D) mole
(26) Two different gases have pressure P, volume V and temperature T each. Now, keeping volume and
temperature same, when both gases are mixed, pressure of mixture will be .....
(A) P/2 (B) P (C) 2P (D) 4P
Ans. : 16 (A), 17 (D), 18 (A), 19 (C), 20 (A), 21 (D), 22 (D), 23 (C), 24 (C), 25 (A), 26 (C)
Pressure of Gas :
PV = NkBT N = Number of molecules
P = N kBT
V
P = nkBT Where n = = Number of molecule in unit volume.

N
V
PV = mRT
Mass of gas
PV = M RT m= =
M M
0 M0 Molecular mass of gas
P= T
M R
V M0
U RT
P= M where r = = Density of gas
M
0 V
P = 1 r <v2> where <v2> = vx2 + vy2 + vz2

3
<v2> = <vx2> + <vx2> + <vx2>
vrms = <v2> = 3<vx2>

3P
U
Where v 2 ! = vrms
= 3k B T where m = mass of one molecule.

m
= where M0 = molecular mass

3RT
M0
Internal energy Eint =

f
mRT
2
Here f = Degrees of freedom
174
Monoatomic gas (He, Ne, Ar,...) f = 3
Diatomic gas (H2, O2, N2,...) f = 5 (Rigid rotator)
CO2 f=7
(27) At a given temperature, pressure of an ideal gas is proportional to ...... (Here r = density of gas)
1
(A) U (B) U (C) r (D) r2
1 2
(28) Average kinetic energy of an ideal gas per mole is ......
(A) 1 kBT (B) 2 RT (C) 3 kBT (D) 2 RT

1 3
2 2
(29) At what temperature rms speed of O2 molecule will be equal to that of H2 molecule at
1000 K ?
(A) 160 K (B) 16 K (C) 1600 K (D) 16000 K
(30) For H2 molecule at 300 K, vrms = 1000 m s then vrms for O2 molecule at 1200 K = .......
1
(A) 500 m s1 (B) 50 m s1 (C) 5000 m s1 (D) 5 m s1
(31) Which of the following equation is incorrect ?
(A) vrms = 3P (B) vrms = (C) vrms = 3P

(D) vrms =
U
3RT 3k B T
U M0 m
(32) Cl2 gas is filled in a closed container. If pressure of the gas is doubled and temperature is made
four times then how much times will its density become ?
(A) 2 (B) 2 (C) 4 (D)

1 1
4
(33) vrms speed of dust particles having mass 1.38 × 10 kg at NTP is = .......
10
(A) 9.49 × 109 cms1 (B) 9.49 × 109 ms1 (C) 9.49 × 106 cms1 (D) 9.49 × 106 ms1
(34) Mean kinetic energy of a gas molecule at 127 °C temperature is 6.21 ×1021 J. Then its kinetic
energy at temperature 327 °C is ......
(A) 9.315 × 1021 J (B) 9.315 × 1021 J (C) 9.315 × 1023 J (D) 9.315×10+23 J
(35) For Oxygen gas filled in a container, mass is 5 g, pressure is P, absolute temperature is T and
volume V. Equation of state for this ideal gas would be ......
(A) PV =
5
32
RT (B) PV = 5RT (C) PV = 2 RT
5
(D) PV = 16 RT 5
(36) Kinetic energy of CO2 molecule at 500 K temperature is E, then kinetic energy of CO molecule
at same temperature is .......
(A) E (B) 32 E (C) 16 E (D) E

32
(37) At a given temperature, ratio of rms speeds of molecules of H2 and He is ......
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 2 :1 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 2 : 1
(38) For 1 mole He gas, Cv = ......
(A) R (B) R (C) R (D) R

3 7 1 5
2 2 2 2
175
(39) If mole number of an ideal gas is m and its degrees of freedom is f, then its internal energy is ......
(A) f m kBT (B) mkBT (C) (D) fmRT

f f 3
mRT
2 2 2
(40) For 1 mole Ar gas at constant pressure, molar specific heat is ......
(A) Cv = R (B) CP = R (C) Cv = R (D) CP = R

5 5 3 3
2 2 2 2
(41) For 1 mole gas,

R
Cv
= 0.672 then molecules of this gas will be ......
(A) diatomic (B) triatomic (C) monoatomic (D) polyatomic

(42) If absolute temperature of a gas is made nine times, rms speed of its molecules become .......
time.
(A) (B) (C) 3 (D) 3

1 1
3
3
(43) Mean free path in gases is of the order of ......

(A) 1A° (B) 10 A° (C) 10+3 A° (D) 103 A°
(44) Length of straight path of molecules between two consecutive collisions is called ......
(A) free path (B) janpath (C) mean free path (D) Degrees of freedom
(45) If ratio of vapour density of two gases is 64 then at constant pressure, ratio of their rms speed is ......
1
(A) 1 : 8 (B) 8 : 1 (C) 1 : 8 (D) 8 :1
(46) At normal temperature and pressure, number of molecule of O2 gas per cubic meter is
2.5 × 1025. Then mean free path of O2 molecule is ...... (d = 3.4 A°)
(A) 8.7 × 108 cm (B) 8.7 × 10+8 cm (C) 7.8 × 108 m (D) 7.8 × 10+8 m
(47) Diameter of molecule of Ar gas is 3.56 × 1010 m. Mean free path of this molecule at 27 °C
temperature and 1 atm pressure is ......
(A) 7.3 × 106 m (B) 7.3 × 10+8 cm (C) 7.3 A° (D) 7.3 × 108 m
(48) If mean free path of molecules of H2 gas at temperature T and pressure P is d, then mean free
path of molecules of H2 gas at temperature 4T and pressure 4 will be ......

P
(A) 16 d (B) 16 d (C) 1.6 d (D) 1.6 d

1 1
(49) Degreees of freedom of molecules of CO2 gas is ......

(A) 3 (B) 5 (C) 7 (D) 9
(50) If for a given gas g = 5 , then this gas would be ......

7
(A) Ne (B) Ar (C) He (D) H2
176
(51) Assertion : When temperature of gas is increased from 27 °C to 927 °C, rms speed of its
molecules becomes four times.
Reason Ñ vrms µ T
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(52) Assertion : Molecules of monoatomic gas (He) performs both liner motion and vibrational
motion f = 3
Reason Ñ For He gas f = 5,
For linear motion f = 3
For vibrational motion f = 2
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(53) Assertion : For ideal gas (Ar), PV = constant according to Boyle's law.
Reason Ñ vrms =
3 RT
M
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d

(54) Assertion : At constant temperature, rms speed of molecules does not change with change in
volume of gas.
Reason Ñ rms speed of molecules does not depends on volume of gas.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(55) Assertion : Energy E of gas at 0 K temperature is zero.
Reason Ñ At 0 K temperature, energy of molecules of gas is zero.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(56) Assertion : Mean free path l of gas molecules is inversely proportional to density of gas.
Reason Ñ Mean free path is inversely proportional to pressure of gas.

(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(57) Assertion : Three molecules have speed 1 v, 2 v and 3 v Their vrms speed is 2 v.
Reason Ñ vrms = v 2
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
177
Match the columns :
(58) In column 1 and column 2, gas laws and related quantites are given. Match them appropriatly.
Column-1 (Gas laws) Column-2 (Quantities)

(i) Boyle's law P Pressure = Constant
(ii) Charle's law Q Volume = Constant
(iii) Gaylussac's law R Temperature = Constant
(iv) Equation of state S Quantity of gas = Constant.
(A) (i) ® S (ii) ® Q (iii) ® P (iv) ® R

(B) (i) ® Q (ii) ® R (iii) ® R (iv) ® P
(C) (i) ® R (ii) ® P (iii) ® Q (iv) ® S
(D) (i) ® P (ii) ® S (iii) ® S (iv) ® Q
(59) Match the following appropriately
Column-1 Column-2
(i) vrms of gas P 2 kBT

1
(ii) Energy related to each degrees of freedom Q 5
3P
(iii) Kinetic energy per mole R U
(iv) Degrees of freedom of O2 molecule S 2 RT

3
(A) (i) ® R (ii) ® P (iii) ® S (iv) ® Q

(B) (i) ® P (ii) ® Q (iii) ® R (iv) ® S
(C) (i) ® Q (ii) ® R (iii) ® P (iv) ® S
(D) (i) ® S (ii) ® P (iii) ® Q (iv) ® R
Ans. : 27 (C), 28 (D), 29 (D), 30 (A), 31 (A), 32 (B), 33 (D), 34 (A), 35 (A), 36 (D), 37 (B), 38 (A),
39 (C), 40 (B), 41 (C), 42 (C), 43 (C), 44 (A), 45 (B), 46 (C), 47 (D), 48 (A), 49 (C), 50 (D),
51 (D), 52 (D), 53 (B), 54 (C), 55 (D), 56 (A), 57 (D), 58 (C), 59 (A)
178
10 Oscillations and Waves
Periodic Motion and Oscillatory Motion
A repeated motion along a fixed path, about a fixed point at a regular interval of time is called
periodic motion.
e.g. The motion of hands of a clock, the motion of the Earth around the Sun, the motion of the
Earth about its own axis etc.
If a body moves to and fro, back and forth or up and down about a fixed point, at a regular
interval of time is called Oscillatory motion. e.g. the motion of the pendulum of the clock, The
motion of a loaded spring etc.
All Oscillatory motions are Periodic but all Periodic motions are not Oscillatory.
Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)
The periodic motion of a body on a fixed linear path, under the influence of the force acting towards
the fixed point and directly proportional to the distance from the fixed point is called simple harmonic
motion. The body performing SHM is called simple harmonic oscillator (SHO).
The displacement of SHO at time t
y(t) = A sin (wt + f)
A = Amplitude of oscillations (ymax= A)
Also,
y(t) = A sin (wt + f)
y(t) = B cos (wt + f)
y(t) = a sin (wt) + b cos (wt)
Where, A = a 2 b2
a
initial phase f = tan1 b
q = wt + f is called phase of the oscillator at time t.

is called initial phase. S
SHO starts its motion Initial Phase 2
(f) (radian)
(1) From fixed point (y = 0) 0
towards positive end
p 0
S
(2) From positive end (y = +A) 2
(3) From fixed point (y = 0) p
towards negative end 3S
2
(4) From negative end (y = A) 3S
2
179
SHO Starts its motion Initial Phase
f (radian)
From the mid point of fixed point and positive end
positive end (y = A ) and move toward 5S S

2 6 A 6
(1) positive end S rad
x-axis
2
6 A
–
(2) negative end 5S 7S 2 11S
6 6 6
From the mid point of fixed point and negative end
negative end (y = – A ) moves towards y-axis
2
(1) negative end 7S

6
11S
(2) fixed Point 6
SHO starts its motion from :
(1) y = + A and moves towards

2
(a) Positive end thean f = S rad

4
(b) Negative end then f = 3S rad

4
(2) y = – A and moves towards

2
7S
(a) Positive end then f = rad
4
5S
(b) Negative end then f = 4 rad
(3) From y = +
3 A and move towards
2
(a) Positive end then f = S rad

3
(b) Negative end then f = 2 S rad

3
(4) from y = –
3 A and moves towards
2
5S
(a) Positive end then f = 3 rad
4S
(b) Negative end then f = 3 rad
180
Phase at the end of time t when periodic time is T; q = 2 S t + f
T
When frequency is f; q = 2p f t + f
When SHO completes n oscillations q = 2p (n) + f
Velocity (v) and Acceleration (a) of SHO
Velocity of SHO at time t, v(t) = Aw cos (wt + f)
When displacement is y, v = ± w A 2 y2
Acceleration of SHO at time t, a(t) = Aw2 sin (wt + f)
When displacement is y, a = w2y
The graph of y(t) ® t, v(t) ® t and a(t) ® t [when f = o]
+A
O t
A
Aw
O t
Aw
w2A
O t
w2A
t=0 T T 3T T
4 2 4
At fixed point (y = 0) velocity of SHO, vmax = ± wA
At end points (y = ±A) acceleration of SHO is maximum, amax = ± w2A
= Þ T = 2p
amax vmax
\ w
vmax amax
Also, v max = A
2
amax
181
When displacement of SHO is y1, its velocity is y1 and when displacement is y2, velocity is v2 than
ª v12 y2 2 – v2 2 y12 º2 ªy 2 –y2 º2

1 1
Amplitude A = « » Periodic time T = 2p « 22 12 »

«¬ v12 v2 2 »¼ ;
«¬ v1 v2 »¼
y = + A Positive end v = 0, amax = w2A, f= S

2
2S vmax
f= y= v= , a= f= 3
3A 3 amax S
3

2 2 2
3S vmax amax S
f= 4 y= v= , a= f= 4
A
2
2 2
5S S
f= y= v= v , a = max f= 6
A a
6 2
3
2 max 2
moving from end point towards the mean position moving from the mean position towards
the positive end
v increases v decrease
a decreases a increases
y = 0 ...... mean vmax = Aw, a = 0, f = 0....
3S
y = A ...... negative end v = 0, amax= +w2A, f=
2
(1) SHO starting from the mid point of its mean position and negative end, moves towards its negative
end, completes one oscillation in 0.5 s. Its initial phase f = ...... rad and its phase at the end of
10 s, q = ...... rad.
(A) f = 3S , q = 83S (B) f = 7 S , q = 247 S

2 2 6 6
(C) f = 5S , q = 245S (D) f = 11S , q = 251S

6 6 6 6
(2) SHM is given by y = 2 sin 10p t + 7 cos 10p t. Where y is in cm and t is in sec. The
amplitude, periodic time and initial phase of the oscillations are ......
(A) A = 5 cm, T = 0.2 s and f = 48°52' (B) A = 3 cm, T = 0.5 s and f = 48°52'
(C) A = 3 cm, T = 0.2 s and f = 48°52' (D) A = 3 cm, T = 0.5 s and f = 52°48'
(3) Periodic time of SHO is T, it starts its oscillation from the mean position. In what time it completes
7 th of its oscillation ?
8
(A) 7 T (B) 10 T (C) 12 T (D) 13 T
9 11 12
8
(4) SHO starts its oscillation from y = and move towards the mean position. Its phase when it
A
2
completes 10 2 oscillation, q = ...... rad.
1
S 43S 45S S
(A) 41 (B) (C) (D) 87
4 4 4 4
182
(5) When the displacement of SHO is 1 cm, its velocity is 2 cms1 and when displacement is 2 cm,
its velocity is 1 cms1. Its amplitude A = ...... cm and periodic time T = ...... s.
(A) 5 , 6.28 (B) A = 0, 0 (C) 5 , 3.14 (D) A = 10, 6.28
(6) The displacement of SHO is given by y = 10 sin 2p t

1

; where y is in cm and t is in s.
12
Calculate its initial displacement, initial velocity and initial acceleration.
(A) y0 = 10 cm, v0 = 10p cms1, a = 20p cms2
(B) y0 = 5 cm, v0 = 17.32 p cms1, a = 10p2 cms2
(C) y0 = 10 cm, v0 = 10 p cms1, a = 10p2 cms2

(D) y0 = 5 cm, v0 = 17.32 p cms1, a = 20p2 cms2
(7) Amplitude of SHO is 0.05 m. When its displacement is 0.03 m, its acceleration is 3.0 ms2.
Calculate its velocity at this time. Also calculate maximum velocity and maximum acceleration of
the oscillations.
(A) v = 0.4 ms1, vmax = 0.4 ms1, amax = 5 ms2
(B) v = 0.5 ms1, vmax = 0.5 ms1, amax = 4 ms2
(C) v = 0.4 ms1, vmax = 0.5 ms1, amax = 5 ms2

(D) v = 0.5 ms1, vmax = 0.4 ms1, amax = 4 ms2
(8) Amplitude and periodic time of SHO are 20 cm and 3 s respectively. It starts its oscillation from
the positive end. Calculate the time taken by it to travel first 10 cm distance towards the mean
position.
(A) 0.25 s (B) 0.50 s (C) 0.75 s (D) 1 s
(9) Amplitude and periodic time of SHO are A and T respectively. Calculate the minimum time to
travel distance from its mean position.

3A
2
(A) (B) (C) (D)

T 3T T T
2 2 6 8
(10) A particle is moving in the XY plane. Where x = A cos (w t + f) and y = A sin (w t + f). The
path of the motion of the particle is ...... .
(A) linear (B) circular (C) parabola (D) irregular
(11) Two particles are performing SHM along y-axis, with the equal amplitude A and equal angular
frequency w. The distance between their mean positions is y0, (Where y0 > A). If the maximum
distance between the two particles during their motion is (y0 +A), calculate the phase difference
between them, in radian.
S S S
(A) (B) (C) (D) p
3 4 6
183
(12) The periodic time of SHM of a particle 16 s. At time t = 2 s, it passes from its mean position,
and at time t = 4 s, its velocity is 2 ms . Then amplitude of the oscillations A = ...... m.
1
(A) (B) (C) (D)

8 16 32 32 2
S S S S
(13) Amplitude of SHO is 1 m. When it is at a distance of 0.5 m from the mean position, it receives
blow in the direction of its motion. soits, instantaneouly, velocity becomes 3 times to its initial.
Find the new amplitude of its oscillations.
(A) 5m (B) 7 m (C) 11 m (D) 13 m

(14) Velocity of SHO at its mean position is 2 ms1 and its acceleration at its negative end is 1ms2.
Then A = ...... m, T = ...... s.
(A) A = 4 m and T = p s (B) A = p m and T = 4 s
(C) A = p m and T = 4p s (D) A = 4 m and T = 4p s
(15) A particle perfoms SHM along the path of length 20 cm. When it is 6 cm away from its mean
position, its velocity is 16 cms1. Calculate its acceleration when it is 3 cm away from its
positive end.
(A) 7 cms2 (B) 14 cms2 (C) 21 cms2 (D) 28 cms2
(16) An amplitude and periodic time of SHO are 10 cm and 2p s respectively. Calculate its velocity in
cms1, when its acceleration is 8 cms2.
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 8
S
(17) The displacement of SHO performing SHM along X-axis is x(t) = 20 sin (15t + 0.5) cm. And
3
the displacement of SHO performing SHM along Y-axis is y(t) = 8 [sin 10pt + 0.75 cos 10pt]
cm. Calculate the ratio of their amplitudes and periodic times.
Ax Tx Ax Tx
(A) A = 2 ; T = 2 (B) A = 1 ; T = 2
y y y y
Ax Tx Ax Tx
(C) A = 2 ; T = 1 (D) A = 1 ; T = 1
y y y y
(18) The displacement of SHO is y(t) = 200 sin 35S t D cm. It starts its oscillations from a point
100 cm away from its mean position and moves towards its positive end. Calculate its phase
(in rad) at the end of 10 s.
S 17 S 37 S
(A) 0 (B) (C) (D)
6 6 6
2S
(19) The periodic time of SHO is
5
s. Its velocity at the mean Position is 10 5 cms1. Calculate its
displacement when its velocity is 10 cms1.
(A) 4 cm (B) 4 5 cm (C) 5 cm (D) 2 5 cm
184
(20) A simple pendulum performs SHM about x = 0, with an amplitude A and periodic time T. Its
velocity at mean point is 0.02 ms1. Now its amplitude is made doubled by keeping its length
constant. Calculate the velocity of the pendulum at its mean position.
(A) 0.01 ms1 (B) 0.02 ms1 (C) 0.04 ms1 (D) 0
(21) The graph of y ® t for an SHO is shown in figure. Its acceleration at the end of time t = s
1
y 2
is ...... cms2.
4 cm
S S2
(A) – (B) –
t
2
y=0
2
2 4 6
(C) – 2 p (D) – 2 p 2
y
(22) Periodic times of two SHO are T and
3T
4
. They begin their motion simultaneously from their
mean positions. What is the difference between their phases when 1 oscillation of the oscillator
having periodic time T is completed ?
(A) 62° (B) 72° (C) 110° (D) 120°
(23) SHO perfoms SHM on the path of length 24 cm with the frequency of s , Calculate its
3 1
2S
displacement when the magnitudes of its velocity and acceleration become equal.
(A) 3 cm (B) 6 cm (C) 7 cm (D) 9 cm
(24) Angular frequency of SHO is 2 3 rad s1. If at time

12
, its displacement is 2 cm, then its
T
velocity v = ...... .
(A) 6 cms1 (B) 12 cms1 (C) 18 cms1 (D) 24 cms1
(25) What would be the amplitude of SHO whose velocity is a and acceleration is b.
ª D 2 y 2 E2 y 2 º 2 ª D 2 y E2 y 2 º 2 ª D 2 y Ey 2 º 2 ª D 2 y E2 y º 2
1 1 1 1
(A) « » (B) « » (C) « » (D) « »

«¬ E »¼ «¬ E »¼ «¬ E »¼ «¬ E »¼
Ans. : 1 (B), 2 (C), 3 (C), 4 (D), 5 (A), 6 (D), 7 (C), 8 (B), 9 (C), 10 (B), 11 (A), 12 (B), 13 (B),
14 (D), 15 (D), 16 (C), 17 (A), 18 (D), 19 (A), 20 (C), 21 (B), 22 (D), 23 (B), 24 (B), 25 (C)
Force Acting on SHO (Variable force depending on the displacement)

For SHM along y-axis; Fµy
F = ky
For SHM along x-axis, Fµx
F = kx
Where, k = force constant
k = mw2
= ; T = 2p
k m
w
m k
185
Oscillations of the loaded Spring :
(1) Series Connection (2) Parallel Connection (3) Connection of two
Loaded spring
k1
k1
k1
k2
m
k2
m k2
m
An equivalent force constant In both at the case equivalent force constent

k1 k 2
k = k +k k = k1 + k2
1 2
or k = k + k Periodic time,
1 1 1
1 2
Periodic time T = 2p T = 2p
m (k1 + k 2 ) m
k1 k 2 k1 + k 2
(26) N springs are having equal force constant k. When they are connected in series an equivalent
force constant is ks and when they are connected in Parallel the equivalent force constant
becomes kp. Than,
(A) ks = N and kp = kN (B) ks = and kp = N2k

k k
N2
(C) ks = and kp = kN (D) ks = N and kp = N2k

N 2
k k
(27) 5 springs each of equal mass m and equal force constant (k) are
connected as shown in the figure. Calculate the periodic time of SHM
of the system. k k
(A) T =
m
2p k
k
(B) T = 2 2 p k
m
k k
(C) T = 2p 2 k
m
(D) T = 2p 2 k
3m m
186
(28) As shown in the figure a block of mass m is attached with the springs having force constant
k1 and k2. The periodic time of SHM is T1. When the springs having force constant 4k1 and 4k2
are used, the periodic time is T2. Then,
(A) T2 = 2T (B) T2 = 4T1 k1 k2
m
(C) T2 = 1 (D) T2 = 1
T T
2 4
[Note : If we take the series connection of springs instead of parallel connection of springs then
answer will remain same in this question.]
(29) The length of the spring having force constant k is l. The spring is divided in two parts of length
and . A block of mass m is attaced as shown in the figure. calculate the

3l l
4 4
periodic time of SHM of the System.
3l l
4 4
m
S S
(A) T = 2p (B) T = (C) T = (D) T = 2p 3 k
3m 3m m m
k 2 k 2 k
(30) Four identical springs each of force constant k are

connected as shown in the figure. calculate the frequency
of the simple harmonic oscillations. k k
(A) (B)
1 k 1 4k
2S m 2S m
k k
(C) (D)
1 2k 2 k
2S m S m
m
(31) When a body of mass 1 kg is suspended at the end of the spring, its length is increased by
9.8 cm. Now if the body is given SHM, what would be the periodic time of its oscillation ?
(A) 0.2 p s (B) 2 p s (C) 20 p s (D) 200 p s
(32) A body of mass 100 g is suspended at the end of an elastic spring. Amplitude of its SHM is
A1. Now, when the body is at its mean position, another body of mass 21 g is kept on it. It both of
A1
the objects are jointly perform SHM, the amplitude becomes A2. Than A = ......
2
(A) (B) (C) (D)

10 20 11 15
11 15 10 20
(33) When mass m is suspended by a spring of force constant k and given SHM, its period is T. Now the
spring is cut in two equal parts and arranged in parallel and the same mass m is oscillated by them
then the new periodic time will be ...... .
(A) T (B) 2 (C) 2T (D) 2T

T
187
(34) Four identical springs each of force constant 1000 Nm1 are
M
connected as shown in the figure. If a body of mass 10 kg
is kept at the top and the system is given SHM, the periodic
time will be ...... .
(A) 6.28 s (B) 3.14 s
(C) 0.628 s (D) 0.314 s
(35) A block P of mass m is kept on a frictionless surface.

Block Q of the same mass m is kept on block P. A k Q
spring of force constant k is connected as shown in ms
wall
the figure. The co-efficient of friction between P and P
Q is ms. Both the blocks are oscillating togather with
equal amplitude A. The maximum static frictional frictionless surface
force between the blocks is ...... .
(A) kA (B) (C) ms kA (D) ms mg

KA
2
(36) A U-tube is partially filled with a liquid of density r. The length of the liquid column in each arm
is the same. Now the free-surface of the liquid in one arm is given a displacement 3.92 mm and
allowed to oscillate. calculate the frequency of its SHM.
(A) (B) (C) (D)

5 10 25 50
S S S S
(37) When the compression of an elastic spring is 1 cm, the restoring force produced in it is 2 N.
When an object of mass 0.5 kg is kept on the spring it is compressed by y and object performs
SHM with the periodic time T, calculate y and T.
S S
(A) y = 0.025m, T = s (B) y = 0.25 m, T = s
10 100
S S
(C) y = 0.025 m, T = s (D) y = 0.25 m, T = s
100 10
(38) As shown in the figure, an object of mass M performs SHM with an amplitude A. The amplitude
of point P is.
k1 A k2 A k1 k2
(A) k + k (B) k + k
p M
1 2 1 2
k1 + k 2 k1 + k 2
(C) k A (D) k2 A
2
Ans. : 26 (A), 27 (B), 28 (C), 29 (B), 30 (A), 31 (A), 32 (C), 33 (B), 34 (D), 35 (B), 36 (C), 37 (A), 38 (B)
188
Energy of SHO
Potential energy of SHO U = ky k = force constant = mw2, y = displacement

1 2
2
K. E. of SHO, K = 2 mw2 (A2 y2)

1

The total energy (Mechanical energy) of SHO, E=K+U= m w2 A2 = k A2

1 1
2 2
P. E. U µ y2
K. E. K µ (A2 y2)
M. E. E µ A2 (independent of y)
If displacement y increases, P. E. (U) increases, K.E. (K) decreases but, E = constant.

U decreases y = +A K = 0, U = max. = E U increases
K increases y= K=U= K decreases

A E
2 2
E constant E constant
y=0 U = 0, K = max. = E
U increases y= K=U= U decreases

A E
2 2
K decreases y = A K increases
E constant K = 0, U = max = E E constant
If the change in the P. E. = DU, The change in the K. E. = DK then DK = DU
The change in the P. E. and the change in the K. E. is always equal and opposite, so that the
total change is always zero.
[If U increases then K decrease and if U decreases then K increases.]
So net change is always zero.
DK + DU = 0 [law of conservation of M. E.]
So net mechanical energy remain constant.
The graph of P. E. (U) ® displacement (y) :
Potential energy
U=E E U=E
U= ky2
1
2
y = A y=0 y = +A
U=0
189
The graph of K.E. (K) ® displacement (y) :
Kinetic enery
K=E
K= E ky2
1
2
y = A y=0 y=A
K=0 K=0
The graph of M.E. (E) ® displacement (y) :
Mechanical energy
E E E
E does not depend on displacement
E = constant
y = A y=0 y=A
Energy of SHO as function of time
Energy (f = 0)
E
E
2
O T T 3T T 5T 3T 7T T t®
8 4 8 2 8 4 8
The time (T) during which SHO completes 1 oscillation, the values of K. E. and P. E. becomes
twice maximum and twice minimum. Thus, if frequency of SHO is f, the frequency for K. E.
or P. E. becomes 2f.
(39) What would be the values of displacement, velocity and acceleration of SHO when its K. E.
becomes equal to its P. E.
ZA Z2 A ZA
(A) y = ± ;v=± 2 ;a=± (B) y = ± ;v=± ; a = ±Z A
A A 2
2 2 2 2 2
(D) y = ± 2 ; v = ± 2 ; a = ± Z A
ZA Z A 2
ZA
(C) y = ± ;v=± ;a=±
A A 2
2 2 2 2
(40) When the K. E. of SHO is 43 J, its P. E. is 58 J. Now its K. E. increases and becomes 61 J.
Calculate its displacement. [force constant k = 20 Nm1]
(A) 2m (B) 2m (C) 12 m (D) m

1
2
190
(41) The mass, periodic time and amplitude of SHO are 20 g, 2p s and 10 cm respectively. Calculate
its K. E., P. E. and M. E. for the displacement 6 cm.
(A) K = 6.4 × 105 J, U = 3.6 × 105 J, E = 106 J
(B) K = 4.6 × 105 J, U = 5.4 × 105 J, E = 104 J
(C) K = 3.6 × 105 J, U = 6.4 × 105 J, E = 106 J
(D) K = 6.4 × 105 J, U = 3.6 × 105 J, E = 104 J
(42) The periodic time of SHO of mass 20 kg is 6 s. It starts its oscillations from its mean position. Its
velocity at the end of 1 s is 2 ms1. Calculate its K. E. and P. E. at this time.
(A) K = 40 J ; U = 120 J (B) K = 40 J ; U = 160 J
(C) K = 80 J ; U = 160 J (D) K = 80 J ; U = 120 J
(43) The force constant of a spring is 400 Nm1. When a massive body is suspended, the restoring
force produced in the spring is 40 N. Calculate the total mechanical energy of the spring.
(A) 0.2 J (B) 2 J (C) 20 J (D) 200 J
(44) When 100 J energy is given to the SHO of mass 2 kg, it perfoms SHM with the amplitude 1 cm.
Calculate the force constant and angular frequency.
(A) k = 2 × 106 Nm1, w = 106 rads2 (B) k = 2 × 106 Nm1, w = 103 rads2
(C) k = 2 × 106 Nm1, w = 106 rads2 (D) k = 2 × 106 Nm1, w = 103 rads2
(45) Mass of SHO is 0.1 kg. The total length of the path of SHM is 20 cm. The K. E. of the SHO at
its mean position is 8×103 J. Calculate angular frequency and force constant.
(A) w = 4 rads1 , k = 1.6 Nm1 (B) w = 4 rads1 , k = 0.4 Nm1
(C) w = 2 rads1 , k = 0.4 Nm1 (D) w = 2 rads1 , k = 1.6 Nm1
(46) The mechanical energy of SHO is E. Calculate its kinetic energy at the mid point of its mean
position and end point.
(A) E (B) 0 (C) 4 (D) 4

E 3E
(47) What would be the displacement of SHO when its potential energy becomes 14 times its maximum value ?
(A) 0 (B) (C) (D)

A A 3A
2 2 2
(48) Calculate the ratio of potential energy and total energy of SHO at any instant of time.
ª y º2 ªyº
1 2
(C) « »
y2
(A) (B) « » (D)
y
A ¬A¼ ¬A¼ A
(49) What would be the change in the mechanical energy of SHO on decreasing its amplitude by 25 %.
(A) decreases by 56.25 % (B) decreases by 43.75 %
(C) increases by 56.25 % (D) increases by 43.75 %
191
(50) When the displacement of SHO is y1, its potential energy is E1 and when displacement is y2, the
potential energy is E2. For the displacement (y1 + y2) where (y1 + y2) < A) the potential energy is
E. then ...... .
(A) E = E1 + E2 (B) E = E1 + E2
(C) E2 = E12 + E22 (D) E = E + E

2 E1E 2
1 2
(51) One end of an elastic spring (mass less) is fixed at a rigid support. At the other end, a solid
cylinder is attached in such a way that the cylinder can rotate without slipping. The force constant
of a spring is 4 Nm1. Now cylinder is given 0.5 m displacement and allowed free to move. The
cylinder performs SHM and rotational motion about its own axis. Calculate K. E., rotational K. E.
and periodic time.
(A) K = J, Kr = J, T = 2p (B) K = J, Kr = J, T = 2p
1 1 3m 1 2 3m
3 6 2k 3 3 2k
(C) K = J, Kr = J, T = 2p (D) K = J, Kr = J, T = 2p
1 1 2k 2 1 2k
3 6 3m 3 3 3m
(52) The displacement of SHO is ...... % of its amplitude, when its kinetic energy is 25% of it
potential energy.
(A) 69.88 % (B) 96.44 % (C) 49.88 % (D) 89.44 %
(53) SHO, starting from its mean position, completes 1 oscillation in 12 s. At what time its kinetic
energy becomes 25 % of its total energy (or decreases by 75%)
(A) t = 2 s (B) t = 0.5 s (C) t = 4 s (D) t = 8 s
S
(54) An initial phase of SHO is 3 rad. Total energy is E. Calculate its initial kinetic energy and initial
potential energy.
(A) K0 = 4 , U 0 = E4 (B) K0 = E , U 0 = 0
3E
(C) K0 = 0 , U 0 = E (D) K0 = E4 , U 0 = 4
3E
Ans. : 39 (C), 40 (A), 41 (D), 42 (A), 43 (B), 44 (B), 45 (A), 46 (D), 47 (B), 48 (C), 49 (B), 50 (A),
51 (A), 52 (D), 53 (A), 54 (D)
Simple Pendulum
Only for small oscillations, the motion of simple pendulum is SHM.
If m = mass of the sphere, l = length of the pendulum, g = gravitational acceleration
Force constant of the simple pendulum k =

mg
l
angular frequency of the simple pendulum w =

g
l
Periodic time of the simple pendulum, T = 2p g

l
192
T2
For constant g (place is same), T = T µ l ; (l < Re)
l2
l1
1
T2 1
For constant length at different planets, T = Tµ g
g1
g2
1
For the pendulum of thin metallic wire, T µ l ; l µ temperature
\ Temperature increases periodic time increases and oscillations becomes slow.
The value of g is less at mountains or in mines than that at surface of the earth.
\ Periodic time increase at mountains or inside the mines. [oscillations becomes slow]
Simple pendulum in a lift (Elevator)
(1) Elevator is moving with acceleration a :

moving upward geff = g + a ; moving downward, geff = g a
(2) Elevator is moving with retardation or deceleration (a)

moving upward, geff = g a ; moving downward, geff = g + a
Periodic time T = 2p g
l
eff
(3) If elevator is freely falling, a = g

geff = g g = 0
\ T = ¥ That is Pendulum does not oscillate.
Simple pendulum in a train
When the train is moving with an acceleration or retardation a,
geff = g 2 a2 [a is '+ve' or 've' a2 will be positive]
T = 2p g
l
eff
Second Pendulum
Periodic time T = 2 s
length on earth l » 100 cm » 1 m
193
Graphs for Simple Pendulum :
T T
straight line straight line
l l
g
T2
T
Parabola
straight line
l l
T2
T
Hyperbola
straight line
l g
g
(55) The periodic time of a simple pendulum is doubled on increasing its length by 7.5 m. The original
length of the pendulum l = ...... m.
(A) 1.5 m (B) 2m (C) 2.5 m (D) 3.0 m
(56) By keeping the length of a simple pendulum constant, it is taken at a place where gravitational
acceleration reduces by 75%. Then the periodic time of the pendulum
(A) increases by 100 % (B) decreases by 100 % (C) increases by 200 % (D) decreaser by 200 %
(57) The mass of a planet is 4 times that of earth and the diameter of the planet is doubled than that
of the earth. If the periodic time of the pendulum on the earth is Te. What would be the periodic
time of the same simple pendulum on the planet ?
(A) Te (B) 2 Te (C) 2 Te (D)

Te
2
(58) A hollow metallic sphere filled with mercury is taken as sphere of a simple pendulum. If some
part of the mercury flows out of the sphere ......
(A) period and oscillations does not change (B) T decreases, Oscillations becomes slow
(C) T decreases, Oscillations becomes fast (D) T increases, Oscillations becomes slow
194
(59) The period of a simple pendulum in a stationary elevator is T. When an elevator moves up with
an acceleration of , its period is T1. If it moves downward with the same acceleration, its
g
4
period is T2. Then T1 = ...... .
T2
T1 T1 T1 T1
(A) T = (B) T = (C) T = 5 (D) T = 3
2 2 3 5
2 5 2 3 2 2
(60) An electric charge q is induced on a metallic sphere of a simple pendulum. There is positive
charge on the horizontal surface below this pendulum. What would be the period of the
oscillations of the simple pendulum ?
ª º2
1
« l »
ª º2
1
(A) T = 2p « ml » (B) T = 2p « »
¬ qE ¼ « g qE »
¬« m ¼»
ª º2
1
« l » ª º2
1
(C) T = 2p « » (D) T = 2p « l »
« g – qE » ¬g¼
¬« m ¼»
(61) Calculate the effective gravitational acceleration at a place, where periodic time of a simple
pendulum of length 0.25 m is 1 s.
(A) p2 (B) 4p2 (C) 2p (D) 0.25 p2
(62) The ratio of frequencies of two simple pendulum kept at the same place is 5 : 4. Then the ratio of
their length is ...... .
(A) 5 (B) (C) 25 (D) 1

4 2 16
5
(63) The length of a simple pendulum is l. When an iron sphere is used as a bob of this pendulum, the
period of its simple harmonic oscillation is T. If a steel sphere of the same volume is used instead
of iron sphere the period becomes 2T. Calculate the length of the pendulum if the density of steel
is n times the density of iron.
(A) 4l (B) (C) 4nl (D) 4n2l

4l
n
(64) A simple pendulum is suspended from the celling of an aeroplane. If the plane starts moving on
the horizontal run-way with a constant acceleration of 12.49 ms2. Calculate the periodic time of
simple harmonic oscillations of the pendulum. The length of the pendulum is 1m and g = 10 ms2.
(D) S
S
(A) 2p (B) 2 (C) 2p2
2
2
(65) When a child swing, in sitting and standing inside the swing, the periodic time of the oscillations is
T and T' respectively, then.
' ' ' '
(A) T = T (B) T > T (C) T < T (D) T = T2
195
P
(66) A pendulum of length l m lift at P, when it reaches Q, it
losses 20 % of its total energy due to air resistance. The
velocity at Q = ...... ms1. (g = 10 ms2) 1m
(A) 4 ms1 (B) 6 ms1
(C) 8 ms1 (D) 10 ms1
(67) A simple pendulum with a bob of mass m oscillates along Q
P O R
PQR path. Its motion is simple periodic motion. Calculate
the velocity of the bob when it passes through point Q.
H
(A) v = mgH (B) v = 2 gH
(C) v = 2g H (D) v = 2g H Q
(68) The length of a simple pendulum is 0.9 m. When it passes through its mid point, it velocity is 5 ms1.
calculate its velocity when it makes an angle of 60° with the vertical line. [g = 10 ms2]
(A) 4 ms1 (B) 3 ms1 (C) 2 ms1 (D) 0
(69) On the surface of a planet, when the length of the simple pendulum is kept 25 m, its periodic
time is T. At a height of 2000 km from the surface of this planet, when the length is kept 9 m,
the periodic time remains same as T. Then the radius of the planet is ...... .
(A) 2400 km (B) 3000 km (C) 6000 km (D) 8000 km
(70) The periodic time of a simple pendulum is T1. When the point of suspension from the rigid support
T12
is moved by y = kt , its periodic time becomes T2. Then
2
= ...... . [g = 10 ms2, k = 1]
T22
(A) 7 (B) 5 (C) 7 (D) 6

6 6 5 5
Ans. : 55 (C), 56 (A), 57 (A), 58 (D), 59 (C), 60 (B), 61 (A), 62 (C), 63 (A), 64 (B), 65 (C), 66 (A),
67 (D), 68 (A), 69 (B), 70 (B)
Natural Oscillations Damped Oscillations, Forced Oscillations and Resonance :
Natural Oscillations : The oscillations performed in absense of any type of resistive forces are
known as Natural oscillations (free oscillations)
frequency of the natural oscillations = f0.
natural angular frequency w0 = 2pf0.
Damped Oscillations : The oscillations performed in the presence of resistive force, which are of
decreasing amplitude are called damped oscillations.
Forced Oscillations : The oscillations performed in the Presanse of external periodic force
with constant amplitude are called forced oscillations.
Natural Oscillations Damped Oscillations Forced Oscillations
Amplitude (A) remains A exponentially decrease A remains constant with time
constant with time with time
The resultant Force F = ky F = ky bv F = ky bv + F0 sin wt
196
differential equation
d2 y
dt 2 + m
dt
b
+w02y = 0
dy d2 y
dt 2 + m b dy
dt
+w02y = 0 sin wt
m
F
d2 y
+ w02y = 0
dt 2
Solution; y(t) = A'(t) sin (w't + f) y(t) = A sin (wt + f)
y(t) = A sin (w0t + f)
F0
A doesnot depend on time t A'(t) = A e bt A=
[ m 2 ( Z 02 Z 2 ) 2 b 2 Z 2 ] 2
2m 1

§ Z y0 ·
Natural angular frequency w' = f = tan1 ¨ v ¸
2
k b
m 2m © 0 ¹
w02 = , w0 = b = damping co-efficient of

k k
m m
the medium
Natural frequency b=
F
v
(for small velocity)
f0 = 21S 2p If velocity is large

k
m
b= (n depends on velocity)
F
vn
N s
unit of b = Nsm1
m
[b] = M1L0T1
For Forced oscillations (y)
Displacement (y) ® time (t) Amplitude (A) ® time (t)
(1) constant amplitude (2)
y(t) A constant amplitude
y = +A f=0
y=0
t
y = A t
For Damped Oscillations

S
Displacement (y) ® time (t) (f = 0) Displacement (y) ® (t) (f = )
2
(3) (4)
A'(t)
y = +A A'(t) y = +A
y(t)
y (t)
y=0
time (t)
time (t)
y = A y = A
197
3S
Displacement (y) ® time (t) (f = ) Damping Ossicillation
2
(5) (6) Amplitude (A') ® time (t)
|
A'(t) A
y = +A y(t) A max
amplitude exponentially decreases with time
y =0
time (t)
y = A
O
time (t)
Resonance
Amplitude of forced oscillation

Z0
Aµ
1
2
Z2
As w move toward w0, A increases

When w = w0, A = maximum. This phenomenon is called Resonance.
For Resonance f = f0
When the frequency of external periodic force becomes equal to the natural frequency of the
oscillations, the amplitude of the oscillations becomes maximum. This phenomenon is called
resonance.
w
0
is called resonant angular frequency
f0 is called resonant frequency
At the time of resonance A =

F0
bZ
b ® 0; A ® ¥
Resonance Curves
b=0Þ A=¥
With the increase of b, maximum b1 = 0
amplitude decreases. A
b1 < b2< b3< b4
When the external periodic force is
acting on the system and frequency of b2
b3
the external periodic force becomes b4
equal to the natural frequency Z
(or nearly equal), the system oscillates w = w0 Z0
with a very large amplitude and the Z
=1
system may break or collapse. e.g. Z0
(1) When soldiers are marching on a suspended bridge, the frequency of the external periodic
force becomes equal to the natural frequency of the bridge, the bridge might be collapse.
(2) The gusts of wind exerts external periodic force to the trees and structures. If this
frequency becomes equal to the natural frequency, tree oscillate with very large amplitude
and collapses.
198
(3) When a bridge is designed, care is taken so that the external force due to gusts of wind
and natural frequency of the bridge do not becomes equal.
Frequency of the Seismic waves (f) Ñ
The frequency (f) of the seismic waves is very less than the natural frequency (f0) of low
rise structures. (f < f0)
The frequency (f) of the seismic waves is greater than the natural frequency (f0) of
high rise structures. (f > f0)
Therefore, in an earthquake, low and high-rise structures remain less affected while
medium high structure fall down. (f = f0)
Significant Amplitude :
1
e
times the amplitude of the damped oscillator is called its significant amplitude.
(71) In what time the amplitude of damped oscillator becomes 1e times of its maximum value ?
(A) 2 m (B) 2b (C) (D) m

b m 2m 2b
b
(72) The mass of an oscillator is 100 g. It is oscillating in a medium having damping co-efficient
0.805 dyne s cm1. Calculate the time during which its amplitude decreases by 80 % of its initial
value.
(A) 200 s (B) 400 s (C) 600 s (D) 800 s
(73) The mass of a damped oscillator is m. Its initial amplitude is A0. If at time t, its amplitude
becomes At, then the damping co-efficent of the medium is ...... .
ª º ª º ª § At ·º ª § A0 ·º
« » « » « t ln ¨ ¸» « t ln ¨ ¸»
« 2m » « 2m » « © A0 ¹» « © At ¹»
(A) b = « § At ·» (B) b = « § A0 ·» (C) b = « 2 m » (D) b = « 2 m »
« t ln ¨ ¸» « t ln ¨ ¸» « » « »
¬« © A0 ¹ ¼» ¬« © At ¹ ¼» ¬« ¼» ¬« ¼»
(74) The mass and periodic time of a damped oscillater is 500 g and 2 s respectively. Its amplitude
reduces by 50 % of its initial value, When it completes 50 oscillations. Calculate the damping
co-efficient of the medium.
(A) 0.6930 dyne s cm1 (B) 6.930 dyne s cm1 (C) 0.06930 dyne s cm1 (D) 69.30 dyne s cm1
(75) The amplitude of damped oscillator becomes 0.8 times of its initial value in 5 s. Then it becomes
N times of its initial value in next 10 s. What would be the value of N ?
(A) 0.813 (B) 0.729 (C) 0.512 (D) 0.343
(76) The periodic time of a simple pendulum in air is T0. If the pendulum oscillate in the medium of a
liquid, the period becomes T. If the density of the liquid is 4 times the density of the material of
the sphere, calculate T.
(A) T = (B) T = 2T0 (C) b = T (D) T

T0 3 2
2 2 0 3 0
199
(77) When the damped oscillator completes 100 oscillations its amplitude becomes 20 % of its initial
value. What will be the amplitude when it completes 200 oscillations ?
(A) 10 % of A0 (B) 4 % of A0
(C) 6 % of A0 (D) 8 % of A0
(78) The mass of a damped oscillator is m. The damping co-efficent of the medium is b. How many
oscillations are performed in 1 s ?
(A) 2S
k b
(B) 2S mk 2bm
2 2
1 1
m 2m
(C) mk (D)
2 2
b k b
1 1
2S 2m 2S m 2m
(79) What would be the time taken by a damped oscillator to acheive its significant amplitude
(average life time) ?
(A) (B) (C) (D)

2m b 0.6930 m 0.6930
b 2m b 2mb
(80) What would be the amplitude of the forced oscillations at the time of resonance ?
bZ bZ
(A) a (B) m a (C) (D)
m a0 a0
0 0 bZ bZ
(81) During earthquake, which one of the following structure have maximum posibility of fall down ?
(A) High rise structure (B) low rise structure
(C) medium high structure (D) All of them having equal probability
(82) In the case of forced oscillations, the resonant wave becomes more sharp when.
(A) the magnitude of resistive force is less (B) the magnitude of external periodic force is less.
(C) the frequency of external periodic force is less. (D) the damping coeffcient of the medium is less.
(83) If w
0
is the natural angular frequency and w is the angular frequency of the external periodic
Z0
force, then at the time of resonance .
Z
Z0 Z0 Z0 Z0
(A) ³1 (B) =0 (C) =1 (D) =¥
Z Z Z Z
(84) A damped oscillator of mass m performs damped oscillation in the medium of damping
co-efficient b. At time t1 and t2, its amplitude is A1 and A2 respectively. Which one of the
following is true ?
b(t1 -t 2 ) b(t 2 -t1 )

(A) A2 = A1 e 2m (B) A2 = A1 e 2m
§ t +t ·
–b ¨ 1 2 ¸
–b(t1 + t 2 ) © 2 ¹
(C) A2 = A1 e 2m (D) A2 = A1 e 2m
200
(85) At a certain time the amplitude of a damped oscillator is 10 % of its initial value. Now the
oscillator is allowed to oscillate in the medium having damping co-efficient twice that of the
previous one. Calculate the percentage decrecse in its amplitude during the same time.
(A) 20 % (B) 5 % (C) 2 % (D) 1 %
Ans. : 71 (C), 72 (B), 73 (B), 74 (B), 75 (C), 76 (D), 77 (B), 78 (D), 79 (A), 80 (C), 81 (C), 82 (D),
83 (C), 84 (A), 85 (D)
Waves
The motion of the disturbance propagating in the medium (or in free space) is called a wave.
The wave is neither a 'Physical body' travelling in the medium nor medium Particles are moving
as a single unit.
Mechanical waves : The waves which require elastic medium for their transmission are called
mechanical waves.
Non-mechanical waves : The waves which do not require any elastic medium [even propagate in
the medium] and also propagate in the free space are called non mechanical waves [They are also
known as electro magnetic waves]
Transverse waves : The waves in which the oscillations of the particles are in a direction
perpendicular to the direction of propagation are called transverse waves.
Longitudinal waves : The waves in which the oscillations of the particles are in the direction of
propagation of the wave are called longitudinal waves.
Sound waves are mechanical and longitudinal.
waves produce on the string are mechanical and transverse.
Light waves are non mechanical and transverse.
Intensity of the wave (I) : Energy passing through a unit area, taken in the direction normal to the
propagation, in one second is called intensity of the wave.
Energy (E)/Time (t)

(I) =
Area (A)
Js –1 watt
Its unit is : = = Wm2
m 2 m2
[I] = M1L0T3
Note :
Dimensional Formula Quantity
MT : 1
damping coefficient to the medium
MT2 : Force constant of the spring, surface tension.
MT : 3
Wave intensity, emissive power ot the surface
1
Intensity I µ E (= kA2)
2
\ I µ A2, Intensity µ (Amplitude)2
201
Wave length (l) and Velocity (v) of the wave
l
O p 2p 3p 4p 5p
t=0 l t=T
Wave length (l) : The distance between two particles having phase difference 2p rad is called
wave length (l).
Velocity of the wave (v) : The effect of disturbance travels distance l in time T.
O Z
\ Velocity of the wave v = = lf = ;k= = wave vector
2S
T k O
Note : distance º Phase difference º time
l º 2p º T
Wave equation
y
O x t=t
The displacement of a particle at a distance x from the origin at time t is,

y = A sin (w t kx) [for positive X-direction]
x
y = A sin 2p (f t )
O
x
y = A sin 2pf (t )
v
For the wave propagating in the X direction take x = x.
2S x
The phase difference between the two particles having seperation x is, d =
O

Note : The time derivative of wave equation represent velocity of the particle at a distance x from
the origin, at time t.
[It does not represent velocity of the wave]
v= Þ v = Aw cos (w t kx)
dy
dt
The slope of the wave form at a distance x from the origin at time t
= Ak cos (w t kx)

dy
dx
202
S
(86) The minimum distance between the two particles having phase difference 17
2
is ...... A°.
[k = 6.28×108 rad cm1]
(A) 4.25 (B) 8.5 (C) 17 (D) 3.4
(87) The value of a wave vector is 10 p rad cm . Calculate the phase difference between two
1
particles having 3.6 cm distance.

(A) 1.8p (B) 3.6p (C) 18p (D) 36p
(88) Wave equation is y = 10 sin (4pt px) cm, t is in second. Calculate the ratio of velocity of a
particle at 38 cm away from the origin at the end of 10 s and velocity of the wave.
(A) 40 p (B) 10 p (C) 0.1 p (D) 4 p
(89) An amplitude of a progressive harmonic wave is 5 cm. The displacement of a particle at a distance
4 cm away from the origin, at the end of 2 s is cm and the displacement of a particle 16 cm
5
2
away from the origin, at the end of 4 s is 2.5 cm. Calculate the values of w and k.
7S S 5S S S 3S S S
(A) w = 24 , k = 24 (B) w = 24 , k = 24 (C) w = 24 , k = 24 (D) w = 24 , k = 12
(90) The frequency of a wave is

10
S
Hz. If the maximum displacement of particles of the medium is
0.4 cm, the maximum velocity of the particle is ...... cms1.
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 8 (D) 10
(91) The wave equation is y = 10 sin (pt px) cm. Time t is in second. Calculate the displacement
and acceleration of a particle which is 2 cm away from the origin, at the end of s.
13
6
(A) y = 5 cm, a = 5p2 cms2 (B) y = 10 cm, a = 10 p2 cms2
(C) y = 5 cm, a = 10 p2 cms2 (D) y = 10 cm, a = 5p2 cms2
(92) The frequency of an electromagnetic wave is 150 MHz. Calculate the value of wave-vector in
rad m1.
S 3S 3S
(A) p (B) (C) (D)
2 2 4
S
(93) The wave equation for a progressive harmonic wave is y = 0.5 sin (0.05t + 0.02px ) cm.
6
Where time t is in second. Calculate the minimum distance between the two particles having
S
phase difference rad.
4
(A) 3.125 cm (B) 6.25 cm (C) 12.5 cm (D) 25 cm
(94) The frequency and velocity of a wave are 1 kHz and 330 ms respectively. Calculate the
1
minimum distance (in metre) between the two particles having phase difference 60°.
(A) 11×102 (B) 5.5 × 102 (C) 6.6 × 102 (D) 3.3 × 102
S
(95) For particle-1, wave equation is y1 = 10 sin (50pt + 3 ). For particle-2, wave equation is
y2 = 10 cos pt. Calculate the phase difference of the displacement [or velocity or acceleration] of
the particle-2 with respect to particle-1.
S S S S
(A) (B) (C) – (D) –
6 3 6 3
203
(96) The wave equation for a wave propagetting in X-direction is y = 0.008 cos (a x bt) m. The
wavelength and periodic time are 0.08 m and 0.5 s respectively. Calculate values of a and b.
(A) a = 25p, b = 4p (B) a = 4 p, b = 25p (C) a = 50 p, b = 2p (D) a = 2p, b = 50 p
x
(97) The wave equation is y = y0 sin 2p (f t ). The maximum velocity of a particle is 4 times the
O
velocity of the wave. Calculate the wave length of the wave.
S y0 S y0 S y0
(A) (B) (C) (D) 4py0
4 8 2
(98)
The wave equation is y = 0.01 sin 2p 0.05 0.02 m [Where y and x are in metre, t is in
t x
second] Calculate the values of maximum velocity and maximum acceleration.

(A) vmax = 0.4p, amax = 4p2 ms2 (B) vmax = 16 p, amax = 4p2 ms2
(C) vmax = 16 pms1 , amax = 16p2 ms2 (D) vmax = 0.4 p ms1 , amax = 16p2 ms2
S
(99) The displacement of some particle of the medium is given by y = 106 sin (100 t + 20x +
4
)m.
(where x is in metre, t is in second). Calculate the wave-speed.
(A) 5 ms1 (B) 0.5 ms1 (C) 5p ms1 (D) 5p2 ms1
x
(100) The wave equation for one dimensional progressive harmonic wave is y = 10 sin 20p (t ) m.
160
(where x is in metre, t is in second). Calculate the slope of the wave at a distanace of 320 m, at
the end of 2 s.
S 5S 5S 3S
(A) –10 (B) – (C) – (D) –
5 4 8 8
Ans. : 86 (A), 87 (D), 88 (B), 89 (B), 90 (C), 91 (A), 92 (A), 93 (C), 94 (B), 95 (C), 96 (A), 97 (C),
98 (D), 99 (A), 100 (B)
Speed of waves in a medium :

Speed of transverse wave on stretched string
v= Where T = Tension force

T
P
m = linear mass density of the string
Speed of longitudinal wave (sound wave) in a medium :

E = Elastic constant of the medium
v= U
E
B = Bulck's modulus
Y = Young's modulus
v=
B
U P = Pressure
r = density of the medium
v=
Y
U
JP Cp
v= g = C
U v
204
J RT
v= rV = mass
UV
V = volume of gas
v=
J RT m = Molar mass of gas.
M
Note :
The phenomenon of the propagation of sound in the gas is adiabatic
At a constant temperature, velocity of sound in the gas is independent of the Pressure.
Velocity (speed) of sound increases with increasing humidity
The speed of sound is comparatively much greater in solid than that in the liquid and in the gas.
[except Vulcanized rubber]
At STP, the speed of sound in air v = 332 ms1.
In practice, the range of wave length of audible sound is from l = 1.7 cm to l = 17 m.
Waves having l < 1.7 cm are not audible. They are known as Ultrasonic waves.
Waves having l > 17 m are also not audible. They are know Infrasonic waves.
An object moving with a velocity greater than the velocity of sound is called supersonic.
When such supersonic body (e.g. an aeroplane) travels in air, it produces energetic
disturbance. Such disturbance moves in backward direction and diverge in the form of a cone.
Such waves [disturbances] are called Shock waves. When Shock waves collides with structure,
a very huge sound is produced.
The speed of supersonic is measured in Mach Number
Velocity of source
Mach Number =
Velocity of sound
Speed of the sound is directly proportional to its absolute temperature.
v1
v2 =
T1
T2
For two different gases having equal pressure (P) and equal value of g, the ratio of velocity of
sound.
v1 U2
v2 = U1
, r1 and r2 are the density of the gas.
For sound, the temperature coefficient of expansion (a) is given by

205
a= , where, vT = velocity of sound at T °C, v0 = velocity of sound at 0 °C. The unit
vT v0
T
of a is °C1.
For sound waves, the time interval between two successive condensation and rarefaction is equal
to .
T
2
When a person hear echo sound from the reflector at a distance d, then velocity of sound.
v= d
2d
t reflector
Person
\ Time interval of Echo. t = v
2d
§ I ·
Sound intensity level is given by L = 10 log ¨ I ¸ Where I0 = minimum intensity (refrence
© 0¹

intensity), I = intensity of the sound
Sound intensity level is meausured in decibels (dB).
(101) A sound wave of frequency 400 Hz is propagating with the speed of 332 ms1. What would be
the minimum time to form rarefaction at a place where maximum condensatin occurs.
(A) s (B) s (C) s (D) s

1 1 1 1
800 200 332 664
(102) The speed of sound in H2 is 1225 ms1. By taking volume ratio 1:2 of H2 and O2, a mixture
H2O2 is prepared. What would be the speed of sound (in ms1) in the mixture ? [density of O2 is
16 times that of H2]
(A) 2450 (B) 1000 (C) 500 (D) 250
(103) At what temperature the speed of sound would be double than its value at NTP ?
(A) 600 K (B) 1200 K (C) 150 K (D) 75 K
(104) A person standing at the mid point of the two parallel walls claps his hand, hears its echo after
1 s. Calculate the distance between the two walls (in metre) if the speed of the sound in air is
332 ms1.
(A) 332 (B) 116 (C) 664 (D) 58
(105) A stone is dropped in a well from the height of 20 m from the water surface. The sound of
collision of the stone with water is heard after 2.06 s (after dropping). Then the velocity of sound
in ms1 is ...... . [take g = 10 ms2]
(A) 333 (B) 300 (C) 350 (D) 260
(106) The minimum intensity of an audible sound is 10 Wm . Calculate the sound intensity level (in
2 2
decibel) when the intensity of the sound becomes 107 Wm2.

(A) 5 (B) 3 (C) 30 (D) 50
(107) A sound of intensity level 50 dB is how many times powerful than the sound of intensity level
20 dB ?
(A) 30 (B) 300 (C) 900 (D) 1000
(108) What would be the minimum distance (in metre) of reflector from the person (source) for
listening the echo of sound ? Velocity of sound is 330 ms1.
(A) 16.5 (B) 33 (C) 66 (D) 99
206
(109) An intensity of a sound wave decreases by 10 % while passing through a slab. Such two slabs
are kept together and sound wave is allowed to pass through it. Calculate the percentange
decrease in the intensity of the sound wave.
(A) 20 % (B) 19 % (C) 21 % (D) 10 %
(110) Young's modulus of a matter is 13.2×10 Nm . The density of this matter is 3.3×102 kg m3.
10 2
Calculate the velocity (in ms1) of longitudinal wave in this matter.

(A) 500 (B) 1000 (C) 2000 (D) 2500
(111) Velocity of sound in a gas at STP is 273 ms . Calculate the temperature coefficient of velocity
1
in ms1 K1.
(A) 0.5 (B) 0.25 (C) 0.8 (D) 0.75
(112) A wire PQR is prepared by connecting two wires PQ and QR of equal radius. The length and
mass of wire PQ are 2 m and 0.025 kg respectively. Those for wire QR are 1 m and 0.05 kg
respectively. The tension produced in wire PQR is 80 N. Calculate the time taken by the sound
(in second) to travel from P to R.
(A) 0.025 (B) 0.05 (C) 0.25 (D) 0.5
Ans. : 101 (A), 102 (C), 103 (B), 104 (A), 105 (A), 106 (D), 107 (D), 108 (B), 109 (B),
110 (C), 111 (A), 112 (B)
Principle of Superposition
When two or more waves superpose at same particle of the medium, the resultant displace-
ment of a particle at the superposition is equal to the vector sum of the individual displacement
produced by each wave.
Reflection of Waves
Reflection from the rigid support :
When a wave is reflected from the rigid support, its phase incident wave
is increased by p.
\ crest becomes trough
and trough becomes crest
reflected wave
If yi = A sin (w t kx) its reflected wave,
yr = A sin (w t + kx)
[Note : The negative sign indicates that the phase increases by p. The sign inside the bracket
changes indicates that direction of propogation is reversed]
From the free end
The reflection at free end (open boundary) takes place incident wave
without any change in the phase.
crest remains crest
trough remains trough reflected wave
If yi = A sin (w t kx)
yr = A sin (w t + kx)
Stationary Waves
The resultant wave obtained due to the superposition of two waves having equal amplitude (A),
equal wave length (l) [or equal frequency f ] and travelling in mutually opposite directions, is called
Stationary wave.
equation for the stationary wave y = 2A sin kx cos w t
energy does not propagate in this type of wave.
207
Nodes
The positions in a stationary wave where the amplitude always remains zero are called
the Nodes.
O 3O
The nodes are located at a distance x = 2 , l, 2 , 2l, ......, 2 from the end x = 0
nO

O
The distance between two successive node is
2
O
The first nodel point is at a distance of 2 (from x = 0 end).
Antinodes
The positions in a stationary wave where the amplitude always remains maximum are called
Antinodes.
O 3O 5O O
Antinodes are located at a distance x = , , ......, (2n-1) from the end x = 0.
4 4 4 4
O
The distance between two successive antinode or two successive node is
2
O
The distance between successive node and antinode is
4
O
The first antinodel point is at a distance of (from x = 0 end).
4
rigid support
A A A
N N N N
O
O O
2
2
O
4
2
Normal Modes of Vibration

Fundamental frequency (First harmonic)
n=1 A
f1 = l1 = 2L
v
2L
Second harmonic (First overtone)
f2 = 2 L l2 = L
2v
A N A
n=2
f2 = 2f1
Third harmonic (Second overtone)
f3 = l3 = L
3v 2
N
2L 3
A A N A
n=3 f3 = 3f1
nth harmonic (n1th overtone)
fn = ln =
nv 2L
n=n
2L n
fn = nf1
208
Note :
For oscillations having nth harmonic;
number of closed loops = n
number of Antinodes = n
number of Nodes = (n1)
The difference between two successive harmonic is equal to fundamental frequency.
fn fn1 = f1 or fn+1 fn = f1
Stationary Waves in Pipes
For closed pipe n = 1 fundamental frequency (first harmonic)

frequency wave length n = 2 third harmonic (first overtone)
n = 3 fifth harmonic (second overtone)
fn = = (2 n 1)
v (2 n –1) 4L
n = n (2n 1)th harmonic ((n 1) overtone)
n
l
4L
Note : For closed piple all harmonics are not possible only f1, 3f1, 5f1, 7f1 ...... possible.
Open pipe
frequency wave length n = 1 fundamental (first harmonic)

n = 2 Second harmonic (first overtone)
fn = =
nv 2L
n
n = 3 third harmonic (second overtone)
l
2L n
fopen pipe = 2 fclosed pipe n = n, nth harmonic ((n 1)th overtone)
(113) The possible maximum wave length of the stationary wave produced on the string of length
100 cm is ...... cm.
(A) 25 (B) 50 (C) 100 (D) 200
(114) In a case of stationary wave, the distance between successive node and antinode is 0.01 m. If
the speed of the components of the wave is 320 ms1, calculate the frequency of the stationary
wave.
(A) 4 kHz (B) 8 kHz (C) 800 kHz (D) 0
(115) The fundamental frequency for an open-pipe is 512 Hz. If it is closed at one end the fundamental
frequency becomes ...... Hz.
(A) 256 (B) 512 (C) 1024 (D) 0
(116) The air column in a closed pipe experiences first resonance with a tuning fork of frequency
160 Hz. The length of the air column in the closed pipe is ...... cm. (v = 320 ms1)
(A) 25 (B) 50 (C) 2.5 (D) 5
(117) A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe are tuned to the same fundamental frequency. What
is the raito of lengths.
(A) 2 : 3 (B) 3 : 4 (C) 1 : 2 (D) 3 : 2
209
(118) What would be the minimum length (in cm) of an open-pipe to have resonance with the tuning
fork of 160 Hz ? (v = 320 ms1)
(A) 10 (B) 25 (C) 50 (D) 100
(119) The frequencies of two consecutive overtone are 285 Hz and 325 Hz respectively. What would
be the fundamental frequency ?
(A) 20 Hz (B) 40 Hz (C) 80 Hz (D) 305 Hz
(120) The length of a closed pipe is 130 cm. The frequency of stationary waves form is equal to the
frequency of third overtone. Calculate wavelenth (in cm) of the wave.
(A) 40 (B) 80 (C) 130 (D) 260
(121) A closed pipe and an open pipe have their first overtones identical in frequency. Their lengths are
in the ratio ...... .
(A) 1 : 2 (B) 3 : 4 (C) 4 : 5 (D) 5 : 6
(122) A string of length 100 cm is oscillating with 10th harmonic. The number of nodes and antinodes
form on the string are ...... and ...... respectively.
(A) 9 and 10 (B) 10 and 9 (C) 10 and 11 (D) 11 and 10
(123) The length of a closed pipe is 125 cm. The sound wave is produced with a tuning fork of
frequency 320 Hz. Now water is filled gradually in this tube. For which height of water column
will resonance occur ? v = 320 ms1.
(A) 25 (B) 75 (C) 100 (D) 125
(124) A string is attached with rigid supports separated by 100 cm distance. It is observed to have
resonant frequencies of 295 Hz and 415 Hz. There is no other resonant frequency between these
two. Then, the lowest resonant frequency for this string is ...... .
(A) 120 Hz (B) 60 Hz (C) 220 Hz (D) 250 Hz
2S
(125) The wave equation for a stationary wave produced on a stretched string is y = 10 sin 7
x cos 70p t
Distance between two successive node is ...... cm. [Where x and y are in cm, t is in sec.]
(A) 1.75 cm (B) 3.5 cm (C) 6.5 cm (D) 7.5 cm
(126) The length of the wire of guitar is 100 cm. Its fundamental frequency is 250 Hz. Calculate the
length of the wire required to have 500 Hz frequency.
(A) 50 cm (B) 100 cm (C) 200 cm (D) 250 cm
S
(127) The stationary wave produced on a string is given by y = 10 sin 4
x cos 40pt [Where x and y
are in cm, t is in s] The positions of antinodes from the rigid support are ...... .
(A) 2 cm, 6 cm, 10 cm, 14 cm... (B) 4 cm, 8 cm, 16 cm, 20 cm...
(C) 2 cm, 4 cm, 6 cm, 8 cm.... (D) 4 cm, 6 cm, 8 cm, 10 cm...
210
(128) A block is attached at the free end of the sonometer wire. The fundament frequency for the
vibrations of the wire is 500 Hz. When the block is immersed in the water the fundamental
frequency becomes 300 Hz. Now, instead of water the block is immersed in the liquid. the
fundamental frequency becomes 100 Hz. Calculate the specific density of the liquid.
(A) 1 (B) 1.5 (C) 2 (D) 2.5
(129) A string of length 35 cm is vibrating with the frequency of 3 kHz. The velocity of the wave is
350 ms1. Find the fundamental frequency and number of closed loops formed on the string.
(A) f1 = 1000 Hz, n = 6 (B) f1 = 500 Hz, n = 5
(C) f1 = 500 Hz, n = 6 (D) f1 = 300 Hz, n = 10
(130) The wave equation for a progresive harmonic wave propagating in the negative X-direction is
y = 20 sin (4pt + 3px). The wave reflects from the rigid support. The equation for the reflected
wave is ...... .
(A) y = 20 sin (4pt 3px) (B) y = 20 sin (4pt + 3px)
S S
(C) y = 20 sin (4pt 3px + ) (D) y = 20 sin (4pt + 3px + )
2 2
2S
(131) The wave equation for a progressive harmonic wave is y = 10 sin (4pt 5
x). It reflects from
the rigid support. If the intensity of the reflected wave is 0.81 times the intensity of the incident
wave, what would be the wave equation for the reflected wave ?
2S 2S
(A) yr = 8.1 sin (4pt + x) (B) yr = 0.81 sin (2pt + x)
5 5
2S 2S
(C) yr = 9 sin (4pt 5 x) (D) yr = 9 sin (4pt + 5 x)
Ans. : 113 (D), 114 (B), 115 (A), 116 (B), 117 (C), 118 (D), 119 (B), 120 (A), 121 (B), 122 (A),
123 (C), 124 (A), 125 (B), 126 (A), 127 (A), 128 (B), 129 (C), 130 (C), 131 (D)
Beats
The Phenomenon of the loudness of sound becoming maximum and minimum periodically due to
super-position of two sound waves of equal amplitude (A) and slightly different frequencies
(f1 f2 < 7) is called beats.
The number of beats in unit time = f1 f2
The periodic time of sound intensity becomes maximum or minimum T =

1
f1 f 2
By filing one of the prongs of a tuning fork, its frequency will increase a little.
By putting some wax on one of the prongs of a tuning fork, its frequency will decrease a little.
Doppler Effect
Whenever there is a relative motion between a source of a sound and a listener, with respect to
medium in which the waves are propagatting, the frequency of the sound experienced by the listener
is different from the frequency emitted by the source. This phenomenon is called
Doppler effect.
If, fs = Original frequency of the sound emitted by the source, fL = frequency of the sound
experienced by the listener, vs = velocity of the source of sound, vL = velocity of the listener
v = velocity of the sound.
§ v vL ·
The general formula for the frequency experienced by the listener is, fL = ¨ v v ¸ fs
© s ¹
211
Spaceial cases :
(1) The listener is moving towards the stationary source
§ v vL ·
vs = 0, vL = positive; fL = ¨ v ¸ fs
© ¹
(2) The listener is moving away from the stationary source.

§ v – vL ·
vs = 0, vL = negative; fL = ¨ v ¸ fs
© ¹
(3) The source is moving towards the stationary listener.

§ ·
vL = 0, vs = negative; fL = ¨ v v ¸ fs
v
© s ¹
(4) The source is moving away from the stationary listener.

§ ·
vL = 0, vs = positive; fL = ¨ v v ¸ fs
v
© s ¹
(5) Both (source and listener) are moving towards each other (approaching each other)
§ v vL ·
vs = negative, vL = positive; fL = ¨ v – v ¸ fs
© s ¹
(6) Both are moving away from each other

§ v – vL ·
vs = positive, vL = negative; fL = ¨ v v ¸ fs
© s ¹
(7) The listener is moving away from the source and the source is moving towards the listener, with
relative velocity.
§v–v ·
vs = negative, vL = negative; fL = ¨ v vL ¸ fs
© s ¹
(8) The listener is moving towards the source and the source is moving away from the listener with
relative velocity.
§ v vL ·
vs = positive, vL = positive, fL = ¨ v v ¸ fs
© s ¹
(132) Frequencies of two tuning forks are 320 Hz and 480 Hz respectively. They produced sound waves
in air having difference in the wave length 48 m. Calculate velocity of sound in air (in ms1)
17
(A) 280 (B) 300 (C) 340 (D) 360

(133) Two waves having wavelengths 50 cm and 50.5 cm produced 6 beats in 1s. Calculate the
velocity of the waves.
(A) 303 ms1 (B) 404 ms1 (C) 505 ms1 (D) 606 ms1
212
(134) The wave lengths of two pitches of the sound are 90
175
m and
90
173
m respectively. Both of them
produces 4 beats in 1s with the third pitch. Calculate the fixed frequency of this third pitch.
(A) 174 Hz (B) 348 Hz (C) 522 Hz (D) 696 Hz
(135) Frequencies of three sound sources having equal intensity are 312 Hz, 316 Hz and 320 Hz
respectively. Calculate the number of beats produced by any two successive source in 1 s.
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 0
(136) A tunimg fork P, produces 4 beats in 1s with a tuning fork Q of frequency 384 Hz. filing one of the
prongs of tuning fork P, it produces 3 beats in 1s. Calculate the original frequency of the tuning fork
P. (in Hz).
(A) 380 (B) 388 (C) 381 (D) 387
(137) A tuning fork M, produces 5 beats in 1s with a tuning fork N of frequency 588 Hz. After loading
one of the prongs of tuning fork M, it produces 3 beats in 1s. Calculate the original frequency of
the fork M. (in Hz).
(A) 583 (B) 593 (C) 585 (D) 591
(138) 51 tuning forks are arranged in the ascending order of their frequencies. Any two consecutive
forks produce 3 beats in 1s. If the frequency of the last fork is 3 times that of the first fork,
calculate the frequency of 26th tuning fork.
(A) 120 Hz (B) 150 Hz (C) 170 Hz (D) 190 Hz
(139) 21 tuning forks are arranged in the ascending order of their frequecies. Any two consecutive forks
produces x beats in 1s. The frequency of 21st fork is 1.4 times that of the first fork. Calculate x if
the frequency of 11th fork is 120 Hz.
(A) 2 (B) 4 (C) 6 (D) 8
(140) Two tuning forks are of frequency 350 Hz and 355 Hz produces beats. After what time (least)
the minimum occurs at a place where maximum is occured ?
(A) s (B) s (C) s (D) s

1 1 1 1
5 10 15 20
(141) A tuning fork produces 2 beats in 1s with the stretched wire of sonometer of length 80 cm and
60 cm. What would be the frequency of the tuning fork ?
(A) 12 Hz (B) 14 Hz (C) 16 Hz (D) 18 Hz
(142) A tuning fork produces 5 beats in 1s with the sonometer wire of length 50 cm. If the length of
the wire is reduced by 2 cm then also the number of beats remains 5. Calculate the frequency of
the tuning fork. (in Hz).
(A) 490 (B) 245 (C) 390 (D) 295
(143) A tuning fork having unknown frequency produces 4 beats in 1s with the fork having 350 Hz
frequency and produces 6 beats in 1s. with the fork having frequency 360 Hz. Find the unknown
frequency.
(A) 354 Hz (B) 346 Hz (C) 366 Hz (D) 358 Hz
213
(144) The frequencies of three sound waves of equal amplitude are (f12), f1 and (f1+2) respectively.
If they superpose to produce beats, calculate number of beats produced in 1s.
(A) 1 (B) 2 (C) 3 (D) 4
(145) f1, 1.5f1, 2.25f1, 3.375f1 ...... are the frequencies of the tuning forks in the ascending order. Any
two consecutive forks produces N beats in 1 s. Calculate frequency f1.
(A) N (B) 2N (C) 3N (D) 4N
(146) When two tuning forks are made vibrate they produces 4 beats in 1s. Now a strip is attached
with one of the prongs of fork-2, they produces 6 beats in 1s. Calculate the frequency of fork-2
if the frequency of tuning fork-1 is 200 Hz.
(A) 196 Hz (B) 194 Hz (C) 204 Hz (D) 206 Hz
(147) What would be the difference of angular frequencies in order to hear the beats clearly, in the
case of sound waves ?
(A) > 6p (B) £ 6p (C) > 12 p (D) £ 12p
(148) Using the superposition, for which of the following waves phenomenon of beats can be possible ?
(A) y1 = A1sin w1t and y2 = A2sin w2t (B) y1 = A1sin wt and y2 = A2sin wt
(C) y1 = Asin wt and y2 = Asin wt (D) y1 = A sin w1t and y2 = A sin w2t
(149) Wave equation for two waves propagating the medium and producing beats are; y1 = A sin 2pf1t
and y2 = A sin 2pf2t. What would be the resultant amplitude ?
(A) A' = (B) A' = 2A

A
2
§ f1 f 2 · ª f1 f 2 º
(C) A' = 2A cos 2 p ¨ ¸t (D) A' = 4A2 cos2 2 p « »t
© 2 ¹ ¬ 2 ¼
(150) Two harmonic waves having slightly different frequencies f1 and f2 superpose on each other to
produce beats. The loudness of sound in unit time becomes ......
(A) (f1 f2) times maximum and (f1 + f2) times minimum.
(B) (f1 f2) times maximum and (f1 f2) times minimum.
(C) (f1 + f2) times maximum and (f1 f2) times minimum.
(D) (f1 + f2) times maximum and (f1 + f2) times minimum.
(151) The ratio of the frequencies of the sound of a car horn heard by a stationary traffic police when
the car is moving towards and away from him is 1.5. If the speed of the sound is 340 ms1.
Calculate the speed of the car in ms1.
(A) 68 (B) 78 (C) 48 (D) 58
(152) The frequency of the sound of a car horn experienced by a stationary listener, when car is
moving towards him is 5 % more than its original frequency. If the speed of the sound is
325 ms1, find the speed of the car in ms1.
(A) 6 (B) 8 (C) 15 (D) 25
214
(153) Find the difference of apparent frequencies of the sound of a car horn heard by a stationary
listener when the car is moving towards and away from the listener with a speed of 72 kmh1.
The frequency of the sound emitted by the horn is 1000 Hz, velocity of sound v = 320 ms1.
(A) 124.8 Hz (B) 142.8 Hz (C) 184.2 Hz (D) 0
(154) Two trains are moving towards a stationary listener with the speed of 72 kmh1 and 36 kmh1.
The frequency of the sound of the whistle of both the trains is 200 Hz. Velocity of sound is
320 ms1. Calculate the number of beats heared by the listener in 1 s.
(A) 4 (B) 5 (C) 7 (D) 8
(155) The whistle of an engine, approaching a hill with the speed of 72 kmh1 produces sound of
frequency 600 Hz. Find the frequency heared by the driver of the same engine, of the sound of
whistle reflected from the hill. The speed of sound is 320 ms1.
(A) 680 Hz (B) 700 Hz (C) 780 Hz (D) 860 Hz
(156) The driver of a stationary train at the railway plateform blows the whistle of sound frequency
700 Hz. A person is moving towards the train with the speed of 36 kmh1. Calculate the
frequency experienced by the person. Velocity of sound v = 350 ms1.
(A) 640 Hz (B) 720 Hz (C) 780 Hz (D) 820 Hz
(157) A source of sound is moving towards the listener with the speed of 72 kmh1 and the listener is
moving away from the source with the speed of 36 kmh1. The source emitts the sound of
frequency 990 Hz with the speed of 350 ms1. Calculate the frequency experienced by
the listener.
(A) 660 Hz (B) 900 Hz (C) 1020 Hz (D) 1300 Hz
(158) A rickshaw is moving with the speed of 10 ms1. A loudspeaker on this rickshaw emits the sound
with the speed of 330 ms1. A car is behind this rickshaw and moving towards the rickshaw with
the speed of 108 kmh1. Calculate the ratio of the frequency experienced by the driver of the car
to the original frequency of the sound emitted by the loudspeaker.
(A) (B) (C) (D)

36 36 18 18
32 17 34 17
(159) A Radar transmits radio waves of frequency 103 MHz towards an aeroplane. The frequency of
the reflected radio waves observed by Radar is 5 kHz more than the frequency send by it.
Calculate the speed of the aeroplane. Speed of the radio wave is 3×108 ms1.
(A) 0.5 kms1 (B) 1 kms1 (C) 1.5 kms1 (D) 3 kms1
(160) A sound of frequency 500 Hz is performing uniform circular motion on the circumference of a
circle of radius 50 cm, with a constant angular speed of 20 rads1. A person is standing very far
away on the line passing through the centre of this circle and along the plane of the circle. (The
person is stationary). The velocity of the sound is 340 ms1. Calculate the maximum and minimum
frequency experienced by the person.
(A) 515 Hz and 486 Hz (B) 846 Hz and 515 Hz
(C) 515 Hz and 400 Hz (D) 648 Hz and 515 Hz
215
(161) As shown in the figure, a boy is in between a wall
and a stationary observer. The boy is walking towards
the wall at a speed of 2 ms1 in a direction at right
angles to the walll. The boy blows a whistle. The
Observer Boy
observer hears 4 beats in 1 s. If the speed of the
sound is 332 ms1. Calculate the frequency of the (Steady) Wall
whistle.
(A) 150 Hz (B) 200 Hz (C) 330 Hz (D) 440 Hz
(162) A source emitting a sound of frequency f, which is placed at a very large distance from the
listener. The source starts moving towards the listener with a constant acceleration a. Calculate
the frequency experienced by the listener corresponding to the sound emitted just after the source
starts. The speed of the sound is v.
2vf 2 vf 2 2 vf 2 vf 2
(A) (B) (C) (D)
2vf a 2vf a 3 vf a 2 vf a
(163) A stationary listener experiences the frequency of a sound of the horn of a car moving towards
him with the difference of 10% with the original frequency. Velocity of sound is 330 ms1.
Compute the velocity of the car in ms1.
(A) 10 ms1 (B) 20 ms1 (C) 30 ms1 (D) 40 ms1
(164) A train moving towards a stationary listener with a constant speed of 108 km h1. The driver of
the train keeps on blowing the whistle continuously. Calculate the ratio of the frequencies heard
by the listener, for the train coming towards him and moving away from him. Velocity of the
sound is 330 ms1.
(A) 9 : 8 (B) 9 : 5 (C) 6 : 1 (D) 6 : 5
(165) As shown in the figure a train has just completed semicircu-
lar path on a U-shaped railway track. The engine is at one Q
end of the semicircular path while the last coach is at the
other end of the path. The driver blows a whistle of fre-
lùÖë
quency 160 Hz. Compute the apparent frequency heared by R
a passenger in the middle of a train. The velocity of the
sound is 330 ms1.
P
(A) 160 Hz (B) 200 Hz engine
(C) 80 Hz (D) 320 Hz
Ans. : 132 (C), 133 (A), 134 (D), 135 (B), 136 (A), 137 (B), 138 (B), 139 (A), 140 (B), 141 (B),
142 (B), 143 (A), 144 (B), 145 (B), 146 (A), 147 (D), 148 (D), 149 (C), 150 (B), 151 (A),
152 (C), 153 (A), 154 (C), 155 (A), 156 (B), 157 (C), 158 (D), 159 (C), 160 (A), 161 (C),
162 (A), 163 (C), 164 (D), 165 (A)
Questions based on practicals :
(166) In an experiment of determining the force constant of a spring, dead weight is 100 g. When 100
g mass is suspended, the length of the spring increases by 1 mm and equilibrium is maintained.
Now if the mass is given SHM, Calculate its periodic time. [g = 103 cms2]
(A) p s (B) 2 p s (C) 0. p s (D) 0. 02 p s
216
(167) In an experiment of simple pendulum, the diameter of the sphere is 1.98 cm. The length of the
pendulum is 50 cm. Calculate the total time taken for 25 oscillations. [g = 980 cms2]
(A) 38.1 s (B) 35.8 s (C) 53.8 s (D) 13.8 s
(168) In an experiment to determine the force constant of a spring by the method of oscillations, when
the mass 250 g is suspended the periodic time is 0.5 s. What would be the increase in the length
of the spring, when the system is in the equilibrium ? (p2 = 10 and g = 103 cms2.)
(A) 0.625 cm (B) 6.25 cm (C) 0.625 mm (D) 0.625 m
(169) What would be the slope of l ® T2 graph in an experiment of simple pendulum ?
2S 4S2 g g2
(A) g (B) (C) (D)
g 4S2 4 S2
(170) In an experiment of simple pendulum, what is the necessary angular amplitude so that the motion
of the pendulum can be considerd to be SHM ?
(A) greater than 10° (B) greater than 6° (C) less than 4° (D) in between 6° and 4°
(171) A rubber cork is used as the rigid support in an experiment of simple pendulum. By mistake of
experimenter, the string comes out of the cork from a thin cruck and oscillates from a point
above the lowest end of cork. Then ...... .
(A) T will be more then its actual value. (B) T will be less than its actual value.
(C) T increase, oscillations becomes slow. (D) T increases, oscillations becomes fast.
(172) In an experiment of simple pendulum, the length of the pendulum is taken as 50 cm, 60 cm, 70 cm,
80 cm and 90 cm. The periodic time is measured by taking 20 oscillations for each length. Then with
the increase of length.
(A) periodic time decreases, oscillations become slow
(B) periodic time decreases, oscillations become fast
(C) periodic time increases, oscillations become slow
(D) periodic time increases, oscillations become fast
(173) The length of second pendulum from the graph of l ® T2 is 99.4 cm. The slope of this line
is ...... cms2.
(A) 980.5 (B) 49.75 (C) 24.85 (D) 100
(174) In an experiment of resonance tube, which one of the following is correct regarding the
frequency of the fork and balancing length ?
(A) length decreases with the increase of frequency
(B) length increases with the increase of frequency
(C) length will not change with the frequency
(D) Initially length increases with increase of frequency and than length decreases
(175) In an experiment of resonance tube, what would be the velocity of the sound wave at 0° C ?
vt vt
(A) v0 = vt (1 + 2 aT) (B) v0 = 1 1 D T (C) v0 = vt + 2 aT2 (D) v0 = 1 1 D T 2
1 1
2 2
217
(176) In an experiment of resonance tube, three readings are taken by using three different frequen-
cies. An average value of measured fl is 82.55 Hz m. Calculate the velocity of the sound at the
given constant temperature.
(A) 3 ×108 ms1 (B) 165.1 ms1 (C) 330.2 ms1 (D) 825.5 ms1
(177) In an experiment of measuring speed of sound using resonance tube, a student measures length
of tube at first resonance at 12 cm, on winter morning (at comparatively low temperature). When
same experiment is repeated with same tuning fork in summer afternoon (comparatively high
temperature), length for second resonance is found to be x cm. Then which of the followin
goptions is correct ?
(A) 12 > x (B) x > 36 (C) 36 > x > 12 (D) 36 > x > 24
Ans. : 166 (D), 167 (B), 168 (B), 169 (C), 170 (C), 171 (A), 172 (C), 173 (C), 174 (A), 175 (B),
176 (C), 177 (B)

(178) Assertion : All oscillatory motions are periodic motions but all periodic motions are not oscillatory.
Reason : For small oscillations, motion of the simple pendulum is oscillatory motion.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(179) Assertion : The kinetic energy and the mechanical energy of SHO is equal at the end points.
Reason : At the end point, velocity of SHO is zero.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(180) Assertion : Acceleration of SHO a = w y. 2
Reason : Acceleration of SHO is always negative

(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(181) Assertion : At mean position, acceleration of SHO is zero
Reason : At mean position, velocity of SHO is zero
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(182) Assertion : The mechanical energy of SHO does not depend on its displacement.
Reason : The mechanical energy of SHO E = 1
2
kA2.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(183) Assertion : At mean position of SHO, its kinetic energy is equal to its mechanical energy.
Reason : At mean position of SHO, its velocity is zero.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(184) Assertion : Oscillations performed by a hard-spring are slow.
Reason : The force constant of hard spring is high.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
218
(185) Assertion : If the kinetic energy of SHO increases, its potential energy decreases and if its
P. E increases, its K. E. decreases.
Reason : The mechanical energy of SHO remains constant.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(186) Assertion : The mechanical energy of SHO does not depend on its maximum displacement
Reason : The maximum displacement of SHO is equal to its amplitude.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(187) Assertion : The periodic time of the simple pendulum increases with the increase of mass of
the bob.
Reason : The periodic time of SHO is given by T = 2p k .

m
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d

(188) Assertion : On doubling the amplitude of the simple pendulum its period remains the same.
Reason : The period of the simple pendulum is independent of its amplitude.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(189) Assertion : The amplitude of the damped oscillations decreases with time.
Reason : There exsi resistive force of air on the oscillator.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(190) Assertion : An oscillator can possess more than one natural frequency.
Reason : Natural oscillations are performed in the absanse of all external forces.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(191) Assertion : An amplitude of the forced oscillations remains constant.
Reason : No external force acts on the forced oscillator.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(192) Assertion : During an earthquake, high-rise structures fall down.
Reason : The frequency of the Seismic waves is very greater than the natural frequency of
high-rise structures.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(193) Assertion : Mechanical waves require some elastic medium for their propagation.
Reason : Mechanical waves Propogate due to an elastic property of the medium.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(194) Assertion : Electromagnetic waves space require any medium and even propagate in the
free-space.
Reason : Electromagnetic waves do not propagate in the medium.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
219
(195) Assertion : Longitudinal waves are also called pressure - waves.
Reason : The pressure of the different regions change with time, during the propagation of
longitudinal waves.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(196) Assertion : Longitudinal waves can propagate in the solid-medium.
Reason : Solid-medium can posses shearing strain.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(197) Assertion : The origin of earthquake (epicentre) can be determined by using seismograph.
Reason : Both transverse and longitudinal waves are produced during an earthquake.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(198) Assertion : Wave equation represents the displacement of a particle at a distance x from the origin.
Reason : The time derivative of wave equation represents velocity of the wave.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(199) Assertion : When a wave changes its medium, its wave length remains constant.
Reason : The wavelength is a property of the medium.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(200) Assertion : When a wave changes its medium, its frequency remains constant but its wave
length does not.
Reason : Frequency is the Property of the source, and wavelength is a Property of the
medium.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(201) Assertion : Speed of the transverse wave Propagating on stretched string does not depend on
frequency and amplitude of the wave.
Reason : Elasticity and inertia of medium are necessary for the propagation of the
mechanical waves.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(202) Assertion : The phenomenon of propagation of sound in air is adiabatic.
Reason : Isothermal bulk modulus is equal to the Pressure of the air.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(203) Assertion : When crest of the wave is incident at a rigid support, it becomes trough due to
the reflection from the rigid support.
Reason : The Phase of the wave increases by p rad when it reflects from the rigid support.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(204) Assertion : Energy does not Propagate in the Stationary wave.
Reason : Stationary wave is not Prograssive.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(205) Assertion : For closed-pipe fn represents (n1)th Overtone.
Reason : All the harmonics are Possible for closed-pipe.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
220
(206) Assertion : During the Phenomenon of beats, the loudness of sound becomes 2 (f1 f2) times
maximum.
Reason : The number of beats in unit time is (f1 f2).
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
(207) Assertion : In Doppler effect, the wavelength of sound waves in the front of the source
decreases while behind the source, its wavelength increases.
Reason : There is relative displacement between the source of sound and wave.
(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d
Ans. : 178 (B), 179 (D), 180 (C), 181 (C), 182 (a), 183 (C), 184 (B), 185 (A), 186 (B), 187 (D),
188 (A), 189 (A), 190 (B), 191 (C), 192 (D), 193 (A), 194 (C), 195 (A), 196 (A), 197 (B),
198 (C), 199 (D), 200 (A), 201 (B), 202 (C), 203 (A), 204 (B), 205 (C), 206 (D), 207 (A)
(208) A particle perfoms SHM along the path of length 20 cm. Initially it is at the mid point of its mean
position and positive end, and start moving towards the mean position. It completes 2.5
Oscillations in 8 s.
(1) Its amplitude A = ...... cm
(i) 20 (ii) 10 (iii) 5 (iv) 40
(2) Its initial phase f = ...... rad
S 5S 7S 11S
(i) 6 (ii) 6 (iii) 6 (iv) 6
(3) Its phase at the end of 2.5 oscillation q = ...... rad.

35 S S S S
(i) (ii) 25 (iii) 45 (iv) 15
6 6 6 6
(4) Its periodic time T = ...... s.
(i) 1.6 (ii) 0.8 (iii) 3.2 (iv) 4.8
(A) 1 (i) 2 (ii) 3 (iii) 4 (iii) (B) 1 (ii) 2 (ii) 3 (iii) 4 (iii)
(C) 1 (ii) 2 (ii) 3 (i) 4 (iii) (D) 1 (ii) 2 (ii) 3 (iv) 4 (iv)
2S
(209) An amplitude and periodic time of SHO are 10 cm and 3
s respectively :
(1) Its velocity at its mean position v = ...... cms1

(i) 0 (ii) 10 (iii) 20 (iv) 30
(2) Its acceleration at its mean position a = ...... cms2
(i) 0 (ii) 30 (iii) 60 (iv) 90
(3) Its velocity at the positive end v = ...... cms1
(i) 0 (ii) 10 (iii) 20 (iv) 30
(4) Its acceleration at the negative end a = ...... cms2
(i) 0 (ii) 30 (iii) 60 (iv) 90
(A) 1 (i) 2 (i) 3 (i) 4 (i) (B) 1 (iv) 2 (i) 3 (i) 4 (iv)
(C) 1 (iv) 2 (iv) 3 (iv) 4 (iv) (D) 1 (iv) 2 (i) 3 (iv) 4 (i)
221
(210) The mechanical energy of SHO is twice its kinetic energy.
(1) What would be its displacement ?
(i) y = ± (ii) y = ± (iii) y = ± (iv) y = 0
A A 3A
2 2 2
(2) What would be its velocity ?
vmax
(i) v = 0 (ii) v = vmax (iii) v = (iv) v =
vmax
2 2
(3) What would be its acceleration ?
amax
(i) a = 0 (ii) a = amax (iii) a = (iv) a =
amax
2 2
(4) What would be its potential energy ?
E
(i) U = 0 (ii) U = (iii) U = (iv) U = 2E
E
2 2
(A) 1 (i) 2 (iii) 3 (i) 4 (iii) (B) 1 (ii) 2 (iii) 3 (iii) 4 (iv)
(C) 1 (ii) 2 (iv) 3 (iii) 4 (iii) (D) 1 (ii) 2 (iii) 3 (iii) 4 (ii)
S
(211) The wave equation for a prograssive harmonic wave is y = 10 sin (4pt x) cm.
5
(Where x and y are in cm, t is in s)
(1) The wave length of the wave l = ...... cm ?
(i) 10 (ii) 5 (iii) 20 (iv) 30
(2) What would be the frequency of the wave ?
(i) 0.5 (ii) 2 (iii) 20 (iv) 50
(3) What would be the wave-vector in rad cm ?1
2S 3S S 2S
(i) 5 (ii) 5 (iii) 5 (iv) 3
(4) What would be the velocity of the wave in cms1 ?
(i) 10 (ii) 20 (iii) 15 (iv) 30
(A) 1 (i) 2 (ii), 3 (iii) 4 (iv) (B) 1 (i) 2 (iii) 3 (ii) 4 (ii)
(C) 1 (ii) 2 (ii) 3 (iii) 4 (iv) (D) 1 (i) 2 (ii) 3 (iii) 4 (ii)
S
(212) The wave equation for a progressive harmonic wave is y = 10 sin (2pt 8
x)
[Where x and y are in cm and t is in s.]
(1) What would be the velocity of the wave in cms1 ?
(i) 0 (ii) 8 (iii) 16 (iv) 32
(2) What would be the displacement of a particle at a distance 4 cm away from the origin at the
end of 1 s ?
(i) 10 cm (ii) 10 cm (iii) 4 cm (iv) 5 cm
(3) What would be the velocity of a particle at a distance 16 cm away from the origin at the end
of 1 s. [in cms1]
(i) 0 (ii) 10 p (iii) 20 p (iv) 30 p
(4) What would be the acceleration (in cms ) of the particle in the question 3.
2
(i) 0 (ii) 20 p (iii) 40 p2 (iv) 40 p2

(A) 1 (iii) 2 (ii) 3 (iii) 4 (i) (B) 1 (iii) 2 (i) 3 (iii) 4 (iv)
(C) 1 (ii) 2 (iii) 3 (iv) 4 (iv) (D) 1 (ii) 2 (ii) 3 (ii) 4 (i)
222
(213) The stationary waves produced in a 20 cm long string fixed at both the ends with rigid support
S
are represented by y = 20 sin 4 x cos 80 S t . (Where x and y are in cm at t is in s)
(1) Wavelength of the wave in cm is ......

(i) 8 cm (ii) 2 cm (iii) 20 cm (iv) 5 cm
(2) Velocity of the wave in cms1 is ...... .
(i) 20 cms1 (ii) 80 cms1 (iii) 160 cms1 (iv) 320 cms1
(3) The positions of nodes from x=0 (in cm) are ...... .
(i) 1, 5, 9, 13 (ii) 4, 8, 12, 16 (iii) 2, 6, 10, 14, 18 (iv) 3, 7, 11, 15
(4) The positions of antinodes from x = 0 (in cm) are.
(i) 1, 5, 9, 13 (ii) 4, 8, 12, 16 (iii) 2, 6, 10, 14, 18 (iv) 3, 7, 11, 15
(A) 1 (i) 2 (iv) 3 (ii) 4 (iii) (B) 1 (i) 2 (i) 3 (iii) 4 (ii)
(C) 1 (i) 2 (iv) 3 (iii) 4 (ii) (D) 1 (iii) 2 (iii) 3 (ii) 4 (iii)
Ans. : 208 (C), 209 (B), 210 (D), 211 (D), 212 (A), 213 (A)
Matching Column Type :
(214) Column-1 represents time in terms of periodic time T and Column-2 represents phase at that
time. Correctly match the columns. (f= 0).
Column-1 Column-2
a t= 8 (i) q=p (A) a (iii), b (i), c (iv), d (ii)

T
S
b t= (ii) q=5 (B) a (iii), b (i) c (ii) d (iv)
T
2 4
S
c t=5 8 (iii) q= 4 (C) a (ii), b (iii), c (i), d (iv)
T
3S
d t=3 (iv) q= (D) a (iv), b (i) c (ii) d (iii)
T
4 2
(215) The SHO is given 100 J energy to perform SHM. Values of kinetic energy and potential energy are
given in column 1 and columns 2 respectively. Match them :
Column-1 Column-2
a K=0 (i) U = 40 J (A) a (iv), b (ii), c (i), d (iii)
b K = 50 J (ii) U = 90 J (B) a (ii), b (iii) c (i) d (iv)
c K = 10 J (iii) U = 50 J (C) a (iv), b (iii), c (i), d (ii)
d K = 60 J (iv) U = 100 J (D) a (iv), b (iii) c (ii) d (i)
223
Match the columns :
(216) Match the column-1 (DF) with column-2 (physical quantity) :

Column-1 Column-2
a M1L0T1 (i) Wave intensity (A) a (iii), b (iv), c (i), d (ii)
b M1L0T2 (ii) damping force (B) a (ii), b (iv), c (i), d (iii)
c M1L0T3 (iii) damping coefficients (C) a (iii), b (iv), c (ii), d (i)

d M1L1T2 (iv) force constant of spring (D) a (iii), b (ii), c (i), d (iv)
(217) For simple pendulum, graph of Y-axis ® X-axis is given in column 1. In column 2, shape of graph
is given. Match them.
Column-1 Column-2
a T2 ® l (i) Straightline (A) a (i), b (ii), c (iii), d (iv)
b T2 ® g (ii) Straightline (B) a (ii), b (iv), c (iii), d (i)
c T® l (iii) Paraboba (C) a (iii), b (i), c (ii), d (iv)
d T® l (iv) Hyperboly (D) a (iv), b (ii), c (iii), d (i)
(218) Match the velocity and acceleration of SHO in column-2 with its displacement in column-1.
Column-1 Column-2
a y=± (i) v= (A) a (ii), b (iv), c (i), d (iii)

A vmax
2 2
b y=± (ii) a= (B) a (iv), b (iii), c (i), d (ii)

2A amax
3 2
vmax
c y= ± (iii) v= (C) a (ii), b (iv), c (iii), d (i)
A
2 2
2 amax
d y= ± (iv) a= (D) a (i), b (iii), c (ii), d (iv)
3A
2 3
(219) Correctly Match the values of kinetic energy of SHO with its displacement in column-1.
Column-1 Column-2
a y= (i) K= 4 (A) a (iv), b (iii), c (i), d (ii)

A 3E
2
b y= (ii) K= (B) a (iv), b (iii), c (ii), d (i)

A E
3 4
c y= (iii) K= (C) a (iv), b (i), c (ii), d (iii)

A 2E
2 3
d y= (iv) K= 2 (D) a (iv), b (i), c (iii), d (ii)

3A E
2
224
(220) Match the column-1 and column-2 for SHO :
Column-1 Column-2
a At mean position (y = 0) (i) K increasese, U decreases.
b negative end (y = A) (ii) K decreases, U increases.
c moving from m. p. towards positive end (iii) U = E and K = 0
d moving from negative end toward m.p. (iv) K = E and U = 0
(A) a (iv), b (iii), c (i), d (ii) (B) a (iii), b (iv), c (i), d (ii)
(C) a (iv), b (iii), c (ii), d (i) (D) a (iii), b (iv), c (ii), d (i)
(221) Correctly match the characteristic of the wave in column-2 with the given wave in column-1.
Column-1 Column-2
a Sound waves (i) Nonmechanical and transverse
b light waves (ii) mechanical, transverse and longitudinal
c seismic waves (iii) mechanical and transverse
d waves on the string (iv) mechanical and longitudinal
(A) a (iv), b (iii), c (i), d (ii) (B) a (i), b (iv), c (ii), d (iii)
(C) a (i), b (iv), c (iii), d (ii) (D) a (iv), b (i), c (ii), d (iii)
(222) Correctly match the Dimensional formula in column-2 with the physical quantity given in column-1.
Column-1 Column-2
a Wave vector (i) M1L0T3
b mass density (ii) M1L1T2
c Elastic constant (iii) M0L1T0
d Intensity of wave (iv) M1L1T0
(A) a (iii), b (iv), c (i), d (ii) (B) a (iii), b (iv), c (ii), d (i)
(C) a (iv), b (iii), c (ii), d (i) (D) a (iii), b (i), c (iv), d (ii)
(223) Correctly match the frequency given in column-2 Corresponding to various harmonic or overtone
for clarinet given in column-1 :
Column-1 Column-2
a Second harmonic (i) f2 = 3 f1
b Seccond overtone (ii) f3 = 5 f1
c Third harmonic (iii) f5 = 7 f1
d Third overtone (iv) Not possible
(A) a (iv), b (ii), c (iii), d (i) (B) a (i), b (ii), c (iii), d (iv)
(C) a (iv), b (i), c (ii), d (iii) (D) a (iv), b (ii), c (i), d (iii)
225
(224) Correctly match the amplitude given in column-1 with column-2.
Column-1 Column-2
§ f1 f 2 ·
a Amplitude of damped oscillation (i) 2A sin 2p ¨ ¸ t
© 2 ¹
b Amplitude of forced oscillation (ii) A
c Amplitude of Stationary waves (iii) A

– bt
e 2m
d resultant amplitude in (iv) 2A sin kx
phenomenon of Beast
(A) a (iii), b (ii), c (i), d (iv) (B) a (iii), b (ii), c (iv), d (i)
(C) a (ii), b (iii), c (i), d (iv) (D) a (ii), b (iii), c (iv), d (i)
(225) The various relative motion between the source of sound and the listener is given in column-1.
The frequency experienced by the listner is given in column-2. Correctly match the columns.
Column-1 Column-2
§ v vL ·
a The source and the listener are moving (i) fL = ¨ v v ¸ fs
© s ¹
towards each other.
§ v – vL ·
b Both are moving in the opposite (ii) fL = ¨ v – v ¸ fs
© s ¹
direction.
§ v vL ·
c Source is moving towads the (iii) fL = ¨ v – v ¸ fs
© s ¹
listener and the listener is moving

away from the source.
§ v – vL ·
d listener is moving towards the source (iv) fL = ¨ v v ¸ fs
© s ¹
and the source is moving away from

the listener.
(A) a (iii), b (iv), c (ii), d (i) (B) a (iii), b (iv) c (i) d (ii)
(C) a (iv), b (iii), c (ii), d (i) (D) a (iv), b (iii) c (i) d (ii)
Ans. : 214 (B), 215 (D), 216 (A), 217 (B), 218 (C), 219 (A), 220 (C), 221 (D), 222 (B), 223 (D),
224 (B), 225 (A)
226

11th MCQ Question Bank

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

11th MCQ Question Bank

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

11th MCQ Question Bank

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 Physical World and Measurement

Physics : Scope, Technology and under standing

No. Supplementry SI Unit Symbol Formula

Where, b = Distance between two positions for observation on the Earth.

(40) 1° = ...... rad

(A) 180 (B) (C) (D) 360

Ans : 40 (A), 41 (B), 42 (C), 43 (A), 44 (A), 45 (A)

Absolute error in each observation

\ Measurement of any physical quantity = a ± D a

(3) Percentage error

'Z 'A 'B

' R1 'R 2 ' R1 'R 2 'R1 'R 2 'R1 'R 2

3 % and % respectively. Find the percentage error in measurement of Z.

(A) 8 % (B) 7 % (C) 6 % (D) 5 %

'r 'r 'r

Dimension and Dimensional Formula

18. Planks constant (h) Energy / frequency Js M1 L2 T1

26. Resistivity (r) RA Resistance × Area Wm M1 L3 T3A2

27. Conductivity (s) U = RA W1m1 M1 L3 T3A2

29. Capacitance (C) Charge CV1 or F M1 L2 T4A2

31. Magnetic flux (f) N B A Vs or weber M1 L2T2A1

32. Self inductance (L) NI Vs A1 or henry M1 L2T2A2

33. Stress Force / area Nm2 M1 L1T2

37. Co-efficient of viscosity (h) Nsm2 M1 L1T1

(A) Plane angle (B) time (C) mass (D) Length

(79) Which one is dimensionally correct ?

(A) v = v0 + at2 (B) F = (C) d = v (D) d =

v = final velocity, v0 = initial velocity, a = acceleration, W = work, d = displacement

(A) (B) AB + C (C) (A + B)C (D) AB

(81) Which pair given below having different dimension ?

(A) Torque and Work (B) Angular momentum, Planks constant

(A) M1 L° T1 (B) M1 L1 T1 (C) M1 L1T1 (D) M1 L1 T°

(A) M1 L° T° (B) M° L° T1 (C) M° L1T° (D) M1 L° T1

(84) Dimensional formula of Power is ......

(A) M1 L2 T2 (B) M1 L2 T2 (C) M1 L2T3 (D) M° L2 T3

(85) Dimensional formula of Impulse of force is ......

(A) M1 L1 T1 (B) M1 L1 T1 (C) M1 L1T1 (D) M1 L2 T1

(86) M° L° T1 is dimensional formula of ......

(87) Dimensional formula of Intensity of radiation is ......

(A) M1 L2 T2 (B) M° L3 T2 (C) M1 L°T1 (D) M1 L° T3

(A) M° L1 T1 (B) M° L1 T° (C) M° L°T1 (D) M° L° T1

(A) Distance (B) time (C) mass (D) velocity

R = Radius of bubble, T = Surface tension, dimension of surface Tension is ......

(A) M1 L1 T1 (B) M1 L1 T1 (C) M1 L°T2 (D) M1 L° T1

(A) 2 ×1010 (B) 2 ×1012 (C) 2 ×1013 (D) 2 ×106

(A) 103 kg (B) 104 kg (C) 105 kg (D) 106 kg

(A) n = u (B) n = u (C) u = n (D) u = u

(A) p1 A1 T1 (B) p2 A1 T1 (C) p2 A 2 T1 (D) p1 A 2 T1

formula of A, B and C are ...... .

(103) Momentum (p) is given by equation p = mv . Dimension of c and p are ...... .

(A) L1 T2, M1 L1 T2 (B) M1 L1T1, L1 T1

(A) unitless, Ns1 (B) unitless, Ns (C) m, Ns1 (D) m, Ns

(A) 12 , –1 , 2 (B) –1 , , 1 (C) –1 , , 1 (D) 12 , –1 , 2

(A) x + b + c (B) ax + by + cz (C) ax + by  cz (D) x + b  c

(112) 76 cm height of Hg = ...... Nm2.

Questions depents on experimental skills :

Where pitch (p)= distance of one division on main scale.

(A) a (B) b (C) c (D) d

(121) Assertion : In all measurement, last significant digit is more in accurate.

3 % and % respectively. Find the percentage error in measurement of Z.

18. Planks constant (h) Energy / frequency Js M1 L2 T1

26. Resistivity (r) RA Resistance × Area Wm M1 L3 T3A2

27. Conductivity (s) U = RA W1m1 M1 L3 T3A2

29. Capacitance (C) Charge CV1 or F M1 L2 T4A2

31. Magnetic flux (f) N B A Vs or weber M1 L2T2A1

32. Self inductance (L) NI Vs A1 or henry M1 L2T2A2

33. Stress Force / area Nm2 M1 L1T2

37. Co-efficient of viscosity (h) Nsm2 M1 L1T1

(A) Torque and Work (B) Angular momentum, Planks constant

(A) M1 L° T1 (B) M1 L1 T1 (C) M1 L1T1 (D) M1 L1 T°

(A) M1 L° T° (B) M° L° T1 (C) M° L1T° (D) M1 L° T1

(A) M1 L2 T2 (B) M1 L2 T2 (C) M1 L2T3 (D) M° L2 T3

(A) M1 L1 T1 (B) M1 L1 T1 (C) M1 L1T1 (D) M1 L2 T1

(86) M° L° T1 is dimensional formula of ......

(A) M1 L2 T2 (B) M° L3 T2 (C) M1 L°T1 (D) M1 L° T3

(A) M° L1 T1 (B) M° L1 T° (C) M° L°T1 (D) M° L° T1

(A) M1 L1 T1 (B) M1 L1 T1 (C) M1 L°T2 (D) M1 L° T1

(A) p1 A1 T1 (B) p2 A1 T1 (C) p2 A 2 T1 (D) p1 A 2 T1

(A) L1 T2, M1 L1 T2 (B) M1 L1T1, L1 T1

(A) unitless, Ns1 (B) unitless, Ns (C) m, Ns1 (D) m, Ns

(A) x + b + c (B) ax + by + cz (C) ax + by cz (D) x + b c

(112) 76 cm height of Hg = ...... Nm2.

Match the columns :

If A and B are parallel then, If A and B are parallel or anti parallel

(2) A force act on a substance having mass m is F = 5 i 4 j + 2 k N. An angle of this force

Unit of average speed and average velocity is ms1.

(A) 3 ms1, 9 ms1 (B) 9 ms1, 9 ms1

(C) 4.5 ms1, 3 ms1 (D) 4.5 ms1, 4.5 ms1

dnth = v0 + 2 (2n 1)

For freely falling body v0 = 0 and a = g.

For freely falling body,

(A) 10 3 kmh1 (B) kmh1 (C) 5 3 kmh1 (D) 15 kmh1

= (x x0) i + (y y0) j = (x x0) i + (y y0) j

2ax = v2 v02 2 a . d = v2 v02 2 a . d = v2 v02

Dircetion of instantaneous velocity is in a direction of tangent drawn at given point of path.

velocity at time t, vx = v0 cosq0 velocity at time t, vy = v0 sin q0 gt

Position of projectile at time t, r = (v0 cosq0)t i + [(v0 sinq0)t 1 gt2] j

velocity of projectile at time t, v = v0 cosq0 i + (v0 sinq0 gt) j

velocity (v) ms1 (A) 12

First law depends on frame of reference

In such a frame of reference, for a solution